[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2025210468A1 - Semiconductor device and production method for same - Google Patents

Semiconductor device and production method for same

Info

Publication number
WO2025210468A1
WO2025210468A1 PCT/IB2025/053337 IB2025053337W WO2025210468A1 WO 2025210468 A1 WO2025210468 A1 WO 2025210468A1 IB 2025053337 W IB2025053337 W IB 2025053337W WO 2025210468 A1 WO2025210468 A1 WO 2025210468A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
layer
insulating layer
semiconductor
transistor
substrate
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
PCT/IB2025/053337
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
山崎舜平
井坂史人
吉住健輔
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co Ltd filed Critical Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co Ltd
Publication of WO2025210468A1 publication Critical patent/WO2025210468A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09FDISPLAYING; ADVERTISING; SIGNS; LABELS OR NAME-PLATES; SEALS
    • G09F9/00Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09FDISPLAYING; ADVERTISING; SIGNS; LABELS OR NAME-PLATES; SEALS
    • G09F9/00Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements
    • G09F9/30Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements in which the desired character or characters are formed by combining individual elements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05BELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
    • H05B33/00Electroluminescent light sources
    • H05B33/02Details
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05BELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
    • H05B33/00Electroluminescent light sources
    • H05B33/12Light sources with substantially two-dimensional radiating surfaces
    • H05B33/14Light sources with substantially two-dimensional radiating surfaces characterised by the chemical or physical composition or the arrangement of the electroluminescent material, or by the simultaneous addition of the electroluminescent material in or onto the light source
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10BELECTRONIC MEMORY DEVICES
    • H10B12/00Dynamic random access memory [DRAM] devices
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10DINORGANIC ELECTRIC SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
    • H10D30/00Field-effect transistors [FET]
    • H10D30/01Manufacture or treatment
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10DINORGANIC ELECTRIC SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
    • H10D30/00Field-effect transistors [FET]
    • H10D30/60Insulated-gate field-effect transistors [IGFET]
    • H10D30/67Thin-film transistors [TFT]
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10DINORGANIC ELECTRIC SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
    • H10D84/00Integrated devices formed in or on semiconductor substrates that comprise only semiconducting layers, e.g. on Si wafers or on GaAs-on-Si wafers
    • H10D84/80Integrated devices formed in or on semiconductor substrates that comprise only semiconducting layers, e.g. on Si wafers or on GaAs-on-Si wafers characterised by the integration of at least one component covered by groups H10D12/00 or H10D30/00, e.g. integration of IGFETs
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10DINORGANIC ELECTRIC SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
    • H10D84/00Integrated devices formed in or on semiconductor substrates that comprise only semiconducting layers, e.g. on Si wafers or on GaAs-on-Si wafers
    • H10D84/80Integrated devices formed in or on semiconductor substrates that comprise only semiconducting layers, e.g. on Si wafers or on GaAs-on-Si wafers characterised by the integration of at least one component covered by groups H10D12/00 or H10D30/00, e.g. integration of IGFETs
    • H10D84/82Integrated devices formed in or on semiconductor substrates that comprise only semiconducting layers, e.g. on Si wafers or on GaAs-on-Si wafers characterised by the integration of at least one component covered by groups H10D12/00 or H10D30/00, e.g. integration of IGFETs of only field-effect components
    • H10D84/83Integrated devices formed in or on semiconductor substrates that comprise only semiconducting layers, e.g. on Si wafers or on GaAs-on-Si wafers characterised by the integration of at least one component covered by groups H10D12/00 or H10D30/00, e.g. integration of IGFETs of only field-effect components of only insulated-gate FETs [IGFET]
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10DINORGANIC ELECTRIC SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
    • H10D88/00Three-dimensional [3D] integrated devices
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10KORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K50/00Organic light-emitting devices
    • H10K50/80Constructional details
    • H10K50/84Passivation; Containers; Encapsulations
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10KORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K59/00Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
    • H10K59/10OLED displays
    • H10K59/12Active-matrix OLED [AMOLED] displays
    • H10K59/121Active-matrix OLED [AMOLED] displays characterised by the geometry or disposition of pixel elements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10KORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K59/00Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
    • H10K59/10OLED displays
    • H10K59/12Active-matrix OLED [AMOLED] displays
    • H10K59/131Interconnections, e.g. wiring lines or terminals
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10KORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K71/00Manufacture or treatment specially adapted for the organic devices covered by this subclass
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10KORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K71/00Manufacture or treatment specially adapted for the organic devices covered by this subclass
    • H10K71/60Forming conductive regions or layers, e.g. electrodes
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10KORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K77/00Constructional details of devices covered by this subclass and not covered by groups H10K10/80, H10K30/80, H10K50/80 or H10K59/80
    • H10K77/10Substrates, e.g. flexible substrates
    • H10P14/20
    • H10P95/00

Definitions

  • one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to the above technical field.
  • Examples of technical fields of one embodiment of the present invention disclosed in this specification and the like include semiconductor devices, display devices, light-emitting devices, power storage devices, memory devices, electronic devices, lighting devices, input devices, input/output devices, driving methods thereof, and manufacturing methods thereof.
  • a semiconductor device refers to any device that can function by utilizing semiconductor characteristics.
  • a CPU is a collection of semiconductor elements processed from a semiconductor wafer and containing chipped semiconductor integrated circuits (at least transistors and memory), with electrodes serving as connection terminals.
  • Patent Document 1 discloses a low-power CPU that utilizes the low leakage current characteristic of transistors using oxide semiconductors.
  • Patent Document 2 discloses a memory device that uses an oxide semiconductor and can retain stored data for a long period of time.
  • Non-Patent Document 1 reports a polycrystalline indium oxide film that exhibits high hole mobility and a transistor using it.
  • One embodiment of the present invention is a semiconductor device including a first transistor, a second transistor, a first insulating layer, a second insulating layer, a first single crystal substrate, and a second single crystal substrate.
  • the first transistor has a channel formed in a first single crystal semiconductor included in the first single crystal substrate.
  • the second transistor is located above the first transistor and has a channel formed in a second single crystal semiconductor in contact with the second single crystal substrate.
  • the second single crystal substrate is located above the second transistor.
  • the first insulating layer is located between the first transistor and the second transistor.
  • the second insulating layer is located between the first insulating layer and the second transistor and has a first junction surface in contact with the first insulating layer.
  • the first single crystal semiconductor contains silicon.
  • the second single crystal semiconductor contains metal oxide.
  • the second single crystal substrate has a cubic crystal structure
  • the second single crystal semiconductor has a cubic crystal structure
  • the second single crystal substrate has an oxide containing yttrium and zirconium, and the second single crystal semiconductor has indium oxide.
  • the lattice mismatch of the second single crystal semiconductor with respect to the second single crystal substrate is between -5% and 5%.
  • the semiconductor device further comprises a first conductive layer and a second conductive layer.
  • the first conductive layer is connected to one of the source electrode and drain electrode of the first transistor and is embedded in the first insulating layer.
  • the second conductive layer is connected to one of the source electrode and drain electrode of the second transistor, is embedded in the second insulating layer, and has a second junction surface in contact with the first conductive layer.
  • Another aspect of the present invention is a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device, which includes a first transistor and a first insulating layer over the first transistor, and includes the steps of: preparing a first single crystal substrate including a first single crystal semiconductor; preparing a second single crystal substrate; forming a semiconductor film including the second single crystal semiconductor over the second single crystal substrate; processing the semiconductor film into an island shape to form a semiconductor layer; forming a gate insulating layer, a gate electrode, a source electrode, and a drain electrode over the semiconductor layer to manufacture a second transistor; forming a second insulating layer over the second transistor; and bonding an upper surface of the first insulating layer to an upper surface of the second insulating layer.
  • the first single crystal semiconductor contains silicon and the second single crystal semiconductor contains metal oxide.
  • the second single crystal substrate has a cubic crystal structure
  • the second single crystal semiconductor has a cubic crystal structure
  • the second single crystal substrate has an oxide containing yttrium and zirconium, and the second single crystal semiconductor has indium oxide.
  • the lattice mismatch of the second single crystal semiconductor with respect to the second single crystal substrate is between -5% and 5%.
  • a semiconductor device using a high-quality semiconductor film can be provided.
  • a semiconductor device using a single-crystal oxide semiconductor film can be provided.
  • a high-performance semiconductor device can be provided.
  • a semiconductor device having favorable electrical characteristics can be provided.
  • a highly reliable semiconductor device can be provided.
  • a semiconductor device that can be easily highly integrated can be provided.
  • a low-power semiconductor device can be provided.
  • a semiconductor device having a novel configuration can be provided. According to one aspect of the present invention, at least one of the problems of the prior art can be at least alleviated.
  • 1A to 1I are diagrams illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device.
  • 2A to 2D are diagrams illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device.
  • 3A and 3B are schematic diagrams illustrating the vicinity of the bonding surface.
  • 4A and 4B are schematic diagrams illustrating the vicinity of the bonding surface.
  • 5A to 5E are diagrams illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device.
  • 6A to 6D show examples of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
  • FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
  • FIG. 8 shows an example of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
  • 9A to 9D show examples of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
  • 10A to 10D show examples of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
  • 22A to 22F show configuration examples of electronic devices.
  • 23A to 23G show configuration examples of electronic devices.
  • 24A and 24B show examples of the configuration of electronic components.
  • 25A to 25C show examples of the configuration of a mainframe computer.
  • 26A and 26B are cross-sectional images according to an embodiment.
  • 27A and 27B are cross-sectional images according to an embodiment.
  • a transistor is a type of semiconductor element that can perform functions such as amplifying current or voltage, and switching to control conduction or non-conduction.
  • transistor includes IGFETs (Insulated Gate Field Effect Transistors) and thin film transistors (TFTs).
  • source and drain may be interchangeable when transistors of different polarities are used, or when the direction of current changes during circuit operation. For this reason, in this specification, the terms “source” and “drain” may be used interchangeably.
  • electrically connected includes connection via "something that has some kind of electrical function.”
  • something that has some kind of electrical function is not particularly limited as long as it allows for the exchange of electrical signals between the connected objects.
  • something that has some kind of electrical function includes electrodes or wiring, as well as switching elements such as transistors, resistive elements, coils, and other elements with various functions.
  • top surface shapes that roughly match means that at least a portion of the contours of stacked layers overlap. For example, this includes cases where the upper and lower layers are processed using the same mask pattern, or where only a portion of the mask pattern is the same. However, strictly speaking, the contours may not overlap, and the upper layer may be located inside the lower layer, or outside the lower layer; in these cases, the term “top surface shapes that roughly match” may also be used.
  • the top surface shape of a certain component refers to the contour shape of that component when viewed from a plan view.
  • a plan view refers to a view from the normal direction of the surface on which the component is formed, or the surface of the support (e.g., substrate) on which the component is formed.
  • film and “layer” are interchangeable.
  • insulating layer may be interchangeable with the term “insulating film.”
  • One embodiment of the present invention has a structure in which a first transistor whose channel is formed in part of a first single crystal substrate is stacked above the first transistor whose channel is formed in a single crystal semiconductor film. It is preferable to use a metal oxide for the semiconductor film of the second transistor.
  • the semiconductor film having a single crystal structure used in the second transistor is preferably obtained by forming it by an epitaxial method using a second single crystal substrate, separate from the first single crystal substrate, as the base material. If the crystal structure of the second single crystal substrate and the crystal structure of the semiconductor film are the same crystal system, the lattice mismatch between them is small, making it possible to obtain a semiconductor film with good crystallinity. Note that even if the crystal structures of the two are different, this does not apply if epitaxial growth is used.
  • the metal oxide used for the semiconductor film it is preferable to use an oxide containing indium, zinc, tin, etc.
  • a metal oxide that crystallizes easily For example, indium oxide is preferable because it easily crystallizes at low temperatures and can produce a single-crystal film with good crystallinity.
  • Single-crystal or polycrystalline indium oxide is also preferable because it exhibits extremely high reliability.
  • a single-crystal indium oxide film is preferable.
  • impurities such as hydrogen may be unevenly distributed at the grain boundaries. This hydrogen generates carriers in the semiconductor film, increasing the carrier concentration in the semiconductor film, which may cause fluctuations in the threshold voltage of the transistor. Therefore, using a single-crystal indium oxide film for the semiconductor film makes it possible to achieve a transistor with extremely good electrical characteristics.
  • the lattice mismatch corresponds to the difference between the length of the unit lattice vector of the substrate and the length of the unit lattice vector of the thin film, divided by the length of the unit lattice vector of the substrate, when a thin film is epitaxially grown on the substrate.
  • the lattice constant can also be used instead of the unit lattice vector.
  • the lattice mismatch can be the difference between the two lattice constants divided by the lattice constant of the substrate.
  • the lattice mismatch is positive when the unit lattice vector of the thin film is larger than that of the substrate, and negative when it is smaller.
  • the buffer layer is provided, increasing the thickness of the buffer layer may enable epitaxial growth even with a combination with a large lattice mismatch.
  • the lattice mismatch can be less than -5% or greater than 5%.
  • the lattice mismatch between the second single crystal substrate and the semiconductor film may be -20% to 20%, -15% to 15%, or -10% to 10%.
  • a semiconductor substrate can be used for the first single crystal substrate.
  • a single crystal silicon substrate is preferably used.
  • a semiconductor substrate made of a single element, a compound semiconductor substrate, or an insulating substrate on which a single crystal semiconductor thin film is formed can be used.
  • a first transistor having a channel formed in a part of the first single crystal substrate can be provided on the first single crystal substrate.
  • a first insulating layer having a bonding surface with the second single crystal substrate is provided on the first transistor.
  • the semiconductor film After forming a single-crystal semiconductor film on a second single-crystal substrate, the semiconductor film is processed into an island shape.
  • a gate insulating layer, a gate electrode, and source and drain electrodes on the island-shaped semiconductor film (hereinafter also referred to as a semiconductor layer), a transistor in which a channel is formed in the single-crystal semiconductor can be manufactured on the second single-crystal substrate. Then, a second insulating layer having a bonding surface with the first single-crystal substrate is formed on the transistor.
  • the first single crystal substrate and the second single crystal substrate are bonded together, so that the surfaces of the first insulating layer and the second insulating layer are in contact.
  • Using the same material for the first insulating layer and the second insulating layer is preferable, as this increases the bonding strength. Furthermore, the flatter the surfaces of the first insulating layer and the second insulating layer, the better, so it is preferable to perform a planarization process beforehand. After bonding, the surface of the first insulating layer facing the second insulating layer and the surface of the second insulating layer facing the first insulating layer form the bonding surfaces, respectively.
  • the above process allows for the manufacture of a semiconductor device in which a first transistor, whose channel is formed in a portion of a first single-crystal substrate, and a second transistor, whose channel is formed in a single-crystal semiconductor film, are stacked.
  • the stacked structure including the first transistor and the stacked structure including the second transistor are upside down across the junction plane.
  • Example 1 of manufacturing method of semiconductor device 1A to 2D are schematic cross-sectional views illustrating steps of a manufacturing method of a semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • a single crystal substrate can be used for the substrate 11.
  • a single crystal substrate such as YSZ, zirconium oxide, silicon, silicon carbide, gallium nitride, or gallium oxide can be used.
  • Rare earth oxides and lanthanide oxides such as yttrium oxide, erbium oxide, gadolinium oxide, and ytterbium oxide can also be used.
  • indium oxide is used for the semiconductor film 21f
  • a material with a small lattice mismatch with the semiconductor film 21f to be formed later can be used for the substrate 11.
  • the substrate 11 is to be removed later, it is not limited to an insulating substrate; conductive substrates and semiconductor substrates can also be used.
  • a metal oxide can be used for the semiconductor film 21f.
  • single-crystal indium oxide is particularly preferable because it combines high mobility with high reliability.
  • Semiconductor film 21f can be formed by methods such as atomic layer deposition (ALD), sputtering, chemical vapor deposition (CVD), pulsed laser deposition (PLD), molecular beam epitaxy (MBE), and wet processes.
  • ALD atomic layer deposition
  • CVD chemical vapor deposition
  • PLD pulsed laser deposition
  • MBE molecular beam epitaxy
  • the semiconductor film 21f is preferably formed while the substrate 11 is heated. This allows for a single-crystal film with fewer defects. Furthermore, the higher the heating temperature of the substrate 11, the cleaner the surface of the substrate 11 can be and the fewer lattice defects there are, which is preferable. On the other hand, if the temperature of the substrate 11 during film formation is too high, oxygen in the film may be desorbed, potentially preventing the formation of a film with the desired composition. Therefore, the temperature of the substrate 11 during film formation can be set to between room temperature and 1200°C, preferably between 100°C and 600°C. It is also possible to first heat the substrate 11 to a high temperature (1000°C or higher) in a film formation apparatus, and then lower the surface temperature of the substrate 11 to 600°C or lower without exposing it to the atmosphere, and then form the semiconductor film 21f.
  • a high temperature 1000°C or higher
  • Indium oxide is particularly preferable for use as the semiconductor film 21f.
  • the band gap of indium oxide is 2.5 eV or more and 3.7 eV or less.
  • a film having a cubic crystal structure such as indium oxide
  • a substrate having a cubic crystal structure for the substrate 11.
  • zirconium oxide or yttria-stabilized zirconia (YSZ) which are cubic crystal structures, can be used for the substrate 11.
  • the crystal orientation of the surface of the substrate 11 is not particularly limited.
  • the crystal orientation of the surface of the substrate 11 may be [100], [110], or [111].
  • a YSZ substrate is used for the substrate 11 and an indium oxide film is used for the semiconductor film 21f, it is particularly preferable to use a YSZ substrate with a surface crystal orientation of [100] or [111] for the substrate 11, from the perspective of lattice mismatch, as described below.
  • Substrate 11 may also be a substrate whose surface is tilted from a specific crystal plane, i.e., a substrate with an off-angle of 0° or more.
  • the lattice mismatch between the semiconductor film 21f and the substrate 11 is small.
  • the crystallinity of the semiconductor film 21f can be improved.
  • ⁇ a is preferably between -5% and 5%, preferably between -4% and 4%, more preferably between -3% and 3%, and even more preferably between -2% and 2%.
  • the smaller the lattice mismatch ⁇ a the less strain can be in the semiconductor film 21f and the greater the critical film thickness for misfit dislocations, allowing for a film with high crystallinity even when the semiconductor film 21f is thick.
  • indium oxide with a cubic crystal structure has a lattice constant of 1.0117 nm (see ICSD ( Inorganic Crystal Structure Database) col.code.14387).
  • YSZ Zr0.9Y0.1O1.95
  • fluorite type has a lattice constant of 0.51481 nm (see ICSD col.code.248790). Therefore, the lattice mismatch of the crystal grains of the indium oxide film with respect to the crystal grains of YSZ is -1.74%.
  • the yttrium content of YSZ is set to 2 atomic % or more and 15 atomic % or less, preferably 5 atomic % or more and 10 atomic % or less, thereby making it possible to reduce the lattice mismatch between YSZ and indium oxide and form a single-crystal indium oxide film with few defects.
  • the semiconductor film 21f is not limited to indium oxide, and a metal oxide film containing indium, tin, or zinc as its main component can also be used.
  • main component refers to a metal oxide in which the ratio of the target atoms to the total number of atoms of the metal elements that make up the metal oxide is 0.1% or more. Elements with a ratio of less than 0.1% are sometimes called impurities.
  • Figures 3A and 3B show schematic cross sections near the interface between substrate 11 and semiconductor film 21f.
  • Figure 3A corresponds to the case where the lattice constant of the crystal of semiconductor film 21f is smaller than the lattice constant of the crystal of substrate 11, i.e., ⁇ a ⁇ 0
  • Figure 3B corresponds to the case where ⁇ a>0.
  • Element 15s is periodically arranged in substrate 11, and element 15f is periodically arranged in semiconductor film 21f formed on substrate 11. Because the lattice constants differ between substrate 11 and semiconductor film 21f, the lattice is distorted in the vicinity of substrate 11 in semiconductor film 21f, maintaining the continuity of the lattice at the interface. The thicker the region where the lattice of semiconductor film 21f is distorted, the easier it is to relax the distortion, making it less likely for dislocations to occur. The thickness of this region can range from a single atomic layer if thin to several ⁇ m if thick.
  • the lattice of semiconductor film 21f may distort so as to expand or contract in the in-plane direction, but may show almost no distortion in the film thickness direction.
  • semiconductor film 21f may show a different tendency.
  • the intermediate layer 16 can be confirmed, for example, in an image of a cross section near the interface between the substrate 11 and the semiconductor film 21f observed using high-angle annular dark-field scanning transmission electron microscopy (HAADF-STEM).
  • HAADF-STEM high-angle annular dark-field scanning transmission electron microscopy
  • the intermediate layer 16 can be observed as a layer with lower contrast than other regions.
  • the thickness of the intermediate layer 16 varies depending on the crystal orientation of the substrate 11, and may be one atomic layer, two atomic layers, or more.
  • a conductive film 24f is formed on the semiconductor film 21f ( Figure 1C).
  • Conductive materials that do not easily diffuse oxygen such as titanium, titanium nitride, tantalum, tantalum nitride, ruthenium, and ruthenium oxide, can be used for the conductive film 24f. This prevents oxidation by oxygen contained in the semiconductor film 21f, etc., and a decrease in conductivity.
  • the conductive film 24f can be formed by a method such as sputtering, ALD, or CVD.
  • a resist mask is formed on the conductive film 24f, and unnecessary portions of the conductive film 24f and the semiconductor film 21f are removed by etching, forming island-shaped conductive layer 24 and semiconductor layer 21 ( Figure 1D).
  • the resist mask is then removed. Etching can be performed by dry etching or wet etching, but dry etching is preferred as it facilitates fine processing.
  • Insulating layer 32 which functions as a barrier film
  • insulating layer 33a which functions as an interlayer insulating film
  • Insulating layer 32 and insulating layer 33a can be formed by sputtering, ALD, CVD, or the like.
  • an insulating material such as silicon nitride, aluminum oxide, hafnium oxide, or an oxide containing aluminum and hafnium (hafnium aluminate). These materials have barrier properties against oxygen, hydrogen, and water, and can prevent these impurities from diffusing into the semiconductor layer 21.
  • Substrate 51 is a single-crystal semiconductor substrate, and has transistor 50 formed thereon.
  • Transistor 50 has a semiconductor region 51c formed in part of substrate 51.
  • Substrate 51 can typically be made of single-crystal silicon.
  • semiconductors made of elemental elements such as germanium, or compound semiconductors made of silicon carbide, silicon germanium, gallium arsenide, indium phosphide, zinc oxide, gallium oxide, gallium nitride, etc. can be used.
  • a semiconductor substrate having an insulator region within the aforementioned semiconductor substrate, such as an SOI (Silicon On Insulator) substrate can also be used.
  • a substrate having a thin-film semiconductor film provided on an insulating substrate such as a glass substrate, quartz substrate, sapphire substrate, YSZ substrate, or resin substrate can also be used.
  • a semiconductor device can be manufactured using the above process.
  • the semiconductor device shown in Figure 2D has a stacked structure of a transistor 50 whose channel is formed in part of a single-crystal substrate and a transistor 10 whose channel is formed in a single-crystal oxide semiconductor.
  • Example 2 of manufacturing method of semiconductor device An example of a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device using a method for forming a semiconductor film different from the above will be described below.
  • a silicon substrate can be used for the substrate 11a
  • a YSZ film can be used for the base film 12.
  • the base film 12 can be any insulating film, conductive film, or semiconductor film. It is preferable to select a film that has a small lattice mismatch with both the substrate 11a and the semiconductor film 21f for the base film 12.
  • the base film 12 it is preferable to select the base film 12 so that the lattice mismatch ⁇ a with both the substrate 11a and the semiconductor film 21f is in the range of -20% to 20%, preferably -10% to 10%, more preferably -7% to 7%, even more preferably -5% to 5%, and even more preferably -4% to 4%.
  • a buffer layer for alleviating strain may be provided between the substrate 11a and the base film 12 and between the base film 12 and the semiconductor film 21f, or both.
  • a natural oxide film forms on the surface of the substrate 11a. Therefore, a process of removing the natural oxide film may be added before depositing the base film 12.
  • the natural oxide film can be removed by wet etching using an acid such as hydrofluoric acid. Alternatively, it can be removed by dry etching. When using dry etching, it is preferable to deposit the base film 12 immediately after etching without exposing the substrate 11a to the atmosphere. This prevents a natural oxide film from forming again on the substrate 11a.
  • a semiconductor film 21f having a single crystal structure is formed on the base film 12 ( Figure 5B). Because the base film 12 has a single crystal structure, the semiconductor film 21f can be epitaxially grown in the same manner as above, resulting in a film with a high-quality single crystal structure.
  • semiconductor layer 21, conductive layer 24, insulating layer 32, insulating layer 33a, insulating layer 22, and conductive layer 23 are formed in the same manner as above to fabricate transistor 10. Furthermore, insulating layer 33d and conductive layer 71d are formed in the same manner as above ( Figure 5C).
  • Substrate 11a may then be removed, as shown in Figure 5E.
  • Substrate 11a can be removed, for example, by applying upward force to the edge of substrate 11a, so that the area with the poorest adhesion becomes the peeling surface, allowing substrate 11a to be peeled off.
  • peeling preferably occurs between substrate 11a and base film 12.
  • peeling may occur inside layer 12a, at the interface between layer 12a and substrate 11a, or at the interface between layer 12a and base film 12.
  • the substrate 11a can be removed by chemical methods such as etching, or physical methods such as grinding, polishing, or sandblasting, or a combination of these.
  • peeling can be caused at the interface between the substrate 11a and the semiconductor film 21f by injecting a liquid such as water or alcohol into the interface.
  • the substrate 11a may be immersed in the liquid, or the liquid may be brought into contact with the sides of the substrate 11a and the base film 12.
  • a conductive liquid such as an ionic liquid or water containing carbon dioxide
  • this can suppress the generation of static electricity during peeling.
  • functional elements such as light-emitting elements, light-receiving elements, sensor elements, and transistors can also be fabricated above the transistor 10 (above the base film 12 in Figure 5E).
  • the substrate 11a may be thinned by back-grinding or other methods. In this case, it is preferable to thin the substrate 11a to a thickness that allows for the formation of vias for embedding plugs.
  • the thickness of the substrate 11a can be set to 1 ⁇ m or more and 100 ⁇ m or less, preferably 1 ⁇ m or more and 50 ⁇ m or less, and more preferably 1 ⁇ m or more and 20 ⁇ m or less.
  • This embodiment can be implemented by appropriately combining at least a portion of it with other embodiments described in this specification.
  • FIG. 6A to 6D are top views and cross-sectional views of the transistor 200.
  • FIG. 6A is a top view of the transistor 200
  • FIGS. 6B to 6D are schematic cross-sectional views corresponding to the cutting lines A1-A2, A3-A4, and A5-A6 in FIG. 6A, respectively.
  • FIG. 6B corresponds to a cross section of the transistor 200 in the channel length direction
  • FIGS. 6C and 6D correspond to cross sections in the channel width direction, respectively.
  • FIG. 7 is an enlarged view of FIG. 6B. Note that some components shown in FIG. 7 are omitted in FIGS. 6A and the like.
  • Transistor 200 has a semiconductor layer 230 provided on an insulating layer 201 provided on a substrate (not shown), conductive layers 242a and 242b on the semiconductor layer 230, an insulating layer 250 on the semiconductor layer 230, and a conductive layer 260 on the insulating layer 250.
  • An insulating layer 275 is provided covering the semiconductor layer 230, the conductive layer 242a, and the conductive layer 242b, and an insulating layer 280 is provided on the insulating layer 275.
  • a groove is provided in the insulating layer 280 and the insulating layer 275, reaching the semiconductor layer 230, and the conductive layer 242a and the conductive layer 242b are separated by the groove.
  • the insulating layer 250 is provided inside the groove along the surfaces of the insulating layer 280, the insulating layer 275, the conductive layer 242a, the conductive layer 242b, and the semiconductor layer 230.
  • the conductive layer 260 is provided on the insulating layer 250 so as to fill the groove.
  • insulating layer 282, insulating layer 283, and insulating layer 285 are provided in this order to cover insulating layer 280, insulating layer 250, and conductive layer 260.
  • the conductive layer 242a functions as one of the source and drain electrodes of the transistor 200, and the conductive layer 242b functions as the other.
  • the conductive layers 242a and 242b preferably have a stacked structure.
  • a conductor that is resistant to oxidation such as a metal nitride, is preferably used on the side in contact with the semiconductor layer 230. This prevents the conductive layers 242a and 242b from being excessively oxidized by oxygen contained in the semiconductor layer 230.
  • a metal or alloy that is more conductive than the layer in contact with the semiconductor layer 230 is preferably used on the side that is not in contact with the semiconductor layer 230. This allows the conductive layers 242a and 242b to function as wiring or electrodes with high conductivity.
  • a metal nitride on the side in contact with the semiconductor layer 230 it is preferable to use a metal nitride on the side in contact with the semiconductor layer 230.
  • a metal nitride on the side in contact with the semiconductor layer 230.
  • a nitride containing tantalum a nitride containing titanium, a nitride containing molybdenum, a nitride containing tungsten, a nitride containing tantalum and aluminum, or a nitride containing titanium and aluminum.
  • ruthenium, ruthenium oxide, ruthenium nitride, an oxide containing strontium and ruthenium, or an oxide containing lanthanum and nickel are preferable because they are conductive materials that are resistant to oxidation or that maintain their conductivity even when they absorb oxygen.
  • the insulating layer 201 is a layer in contact with the semiconductor layer 230, and can be made of a material having a single crystal structure.
  • single crystal materials such as YSZ, zirconium oxide, silicon, silicon carbide, gallium nitride, and gallium oxide can be used.
  • oxide insulating materials such as zirconium oxide or YSZ.
  • rare earth oxides and lanthanide oxides such as yttrium oxide, erbium oxide, gadolinium oxide, and ytterbium oxide.
  • indium oxide is used for the semiconductor layer 230, it is preferable to use yttrium oxide or erbium oxide.
  • impurities in the semiconductor layer 230 refer to, for example, anything other than the main component that constitutes the semiconductor layer 230.
  • an element with a concentration of less than 0.1 atomic % can be considered an impurity.
  • the band gap of a metal oxide that functions as a semiconductor is preferably 2 eV or more, and more preferably 2.5 eV or more.
  • a metal oxide with a wide band gap By using a metal oxide with a wide band gap, the off-state current of a transistor can be reduced.
  • a transistor that has a metal oxide in its channel formation region is called an OS transistor. Because OS transistors have a low off-state current, the power consumption of a semiconductor device can be sufficiently reduced. Furthermore, because OS transistors have high frequency characteristics, the semiconductor device can operate at high speed.
  • the semiconductor layer 230 it is preferable to use indium oxide.
  • it is preferable to use a crystalline film for the semiconductor layer 230 and it is particularly preferable to use indium oxide with a single-crystal structure, but indium oxide with a polycrystalline structure or microcrystalline structure can also be used.
  • indium oxide with a single-crystal structure carrier scattering at crystal grain boundaries can be suppressed, making it possible to realize a transistor with high field-effect mobility. It also makes it possible to realize a highly reliable transistor.
  • indium oxide having a polycrystalline structure When using indium oxide having a polycrystalline structure, it is preferable that no grain boundaries are observed at least in the channel formation region (the region overlapping with the conductive layer 260). This allows indium oxide having a polycrystalline structure to achieve the same effects as indium oxide having a single-crystalline structure.
  • the film thickness of the semiconductor layer 230 is preferably 2 nm or more and 50 nm or less, more preferably 2.5 nm or more and 30 nm or less, more preferably 2.5 nm or more and 20 nm or less, more preferably 5 nm or more and 20 nm or less, and even more preferably 5 nm or more and 10 nm or less.
  • indium oxide is a film in which hydrogen and/or oxygen move more easily than, for example, an IGZO (In-Ga-Zn-O-based oxide) film. Therefore, indium oxide is a film in which hydrogen and/or oxygen are more easily supplied and discharged than, for example, an IGZO film. This means that excess oxygen or excess hydrogen, which can become carriers or fixed charges, is less likely to accumulate in the semiconductor layer 230, resulting in a transistor with good electrical characteristics and reliability.
  • IGZO In-Ga-Zn-O-based oxide
  • the semiconductor layer 230 has a reduced concentration of elements that reduce crystallinity.
  • the concentration of elements such as boron and aluminum is preferably 1 atomic % or less, more preferably 0.1 atomic % or less, and even more preferably 0.01 atomic % (100 ppm) or less.
  • the gallium concentration in the semiconductor layer 230 is preferably 1 atomic % or less, more preferably 0.1 atomic % or less, and even more preferably 0.01 atomic % (100 ppm) or less.
  • metal oxides that can be used for the semiconductor layer 230 include tin oxide, zinc oxide, indium tin oxide, indium titanium oxide, indium gallium oxide, indium gallium aluminum oxide, indium gallium tin oxide, gallium zinc oxide, aluminum zinc oxide, indium aluminum zinc oxide, indium tin zinc oxide, indium titanium zinc oxide, indium gallium zinc oxide, indium gallium tin zinc oxide, and indium gallium aluminum zinc oxide.
  • silicon-containing indium tin oxide, gallium tin oxide, aluminum tin oxide, and the like can also be used. When using these, it is preferable that the film has at least some crystallinity, and more preferably has a single crystal structure.
  • the insulating layer 250 which functions as a gate insulating layer, preferably has the function of capturing and fixing hydrogen. This reduces the hydrogen concentration in the channel formation region of the semiconductor layer 230. This allows the channel formation region to be i-type or substantially i-type.
  • the insulating layer 250 has a laminated structure of a first layer in contact with the semiconductor layer 230, a second layer on the first layer, and a third layer on the second layer.
  • the first layer has the function of capturing and fixing hydrogen.
  • a high-dielectric constant (high-k) material for the first layer.
  • An example of a high-k material is an oxide containing one or both of aluminum and hafnium.
  • Using a high-k material for the first layer makes it possible to reduce the gate potential applied during transistor operation while maintaining the physical thickness of the gate insulator. It also makes it possible to reduce the equivalent oxide thickness (EOT) of the insulator that functions as the gate insulator.
  • EOT equivalent oxide thickness
  • an oxide containing one or both of aluminum and hafnium more preferably an oxide having an amorphous structure and containing one or both of aluminum and hafnium, and even more preferably aluminum oxide having an amorphous structure.
  • the second layer is preferably made of an insulator with a thermally stable structure, such as silicon oxide or silicon oxynitride.
  • the third layer preferably has barrier properties against oxygen.
  • the third layer is provided between the channel formation region of the semiconductor layer 230 and the conductive layer 260, and between the insulating layer 280 and the conductive layer 260. This structure prevents oxygen contained in the channel formation region of the semiconductor layer 230 from diffusing into the conductive layer 260 and forming oxygen vacancies in the channel formation region of the semiconductor layer 230. It also prevents oxygen contained in the semiconductor layer 230 and oxygen contained in the insulating layer 280 from diffusing into the conductive layer 260 and oxidizing the conductive layer 260.
  • the third layer preferably has a lower oxygen permeability than the insulating layer 280.
  • the third layer is an insulator containing at least nitrogen and silicon.
  • the third layer has barrier properties against hydrogen. This prevents impurities such as hydrogen contained in the conductive layer 260 from diffusing into the semiconductor layer 230.
  • the insulating layer 275 preferably has barrier properties against oxygen.
  • the insulating layer 275 is provided between the insulating layer 280 and the conductive layer 242a, and between the insulating layer 280 and the conductive layer 242b. This configuration prevents oxygen contained in the insulating layer 280 from diffusing into the conductive layer 242a and the conductive layer 242b. This prevents the conductive layer 242a and the conductive layer 242b from being oxidized by the oxygen contained in the insulating layer 280, increasing their resistivity and reducing their on-current.
  • the insulating layer 275 is preferably at least less permeable to oxygen than the insulating layer 280. For example, it is preferable to use silicon nitride as the insulating layer 275. In this case, the insulating layer 275 becomes an insulator containing at least nitrogen and silicon.
  • the semiconductor device preferably has a structure that prevents hydrogen from being mixed into the transistor 200, etc.
  • a structure that prevents hydrogen from being mixed into the transistor 200 etc.
  • the insulator is, for example, insulating layer 282 or insulating layer 283.
  • a similar film may be provided under the transistor 200.
  • Openings reaching conductive layer 242a are formed in insulating layer 285, insulating layer 283, insulating layer 282, insulating layer 280, insulating layer 275, and insulating layer 271a, and conductive layer 240a and insulating layer 241a are provided within the openings. Insulating layer 241a is provided in contact with the sidewalls of the openings, and conductive layer 240a is provided inside insulating layer 241a. Furthermore, openings reaching conductive layer 242b are formed in insulating layer 285, insulating layer 283, insulating layer 282, insulating layer 280, insulating layer 275, and insulating layer 271b, and conductive layer 240b and insulating layer 241b are provided within the openings.
  • Conductive layer 240a and conductive layer 240b may have a two-layer laminated structure.
  • Conductive layer 240a has conductive layer 240a1 formed along the opening and conductive layer 240a2 formed inside conductive layer 240a1.
  • Conductive layer 240b has conductive layer 240b1 formed along the opening and conductive layer 240b2 formed inside conductive layer 240b1.
  • Conductive layers 240a1 and 240b1 are preferably made of a conductive material such as tantalum, tantalum nitride, titanium, titanium nitride, ruthenium, or ruthenium oxide, which has the function of suppressing the permeation of impurities such as water and hydrogen. Furthermore, conductive materials that have the function of suppressing the permeation of impurities such as water and hydrogen may be used in a single layer or a stacked layer. Providing conductive layers 240a1 and 240b1 can suppress impurities such as water and hydrogen from entering the semiconductor layer 230 through conductive layers 240a2 and 240b2. Note that conductive layers 240a2 and 240b2 may be made of the same conductive materials that can be used for the conductive layers 240a and 240b described above.
  • the upper surfaces of conductive layer 240a and conductive layer 240b can be formed so that they coincide or nearly coincide with the upper surface of insulating layer 285.
  • the lower part of conductive layer 240a may be formed so that it is embedded in conductive layer 242a.
  • the lower part of conductive layer 240b may be formed so that it is embedded in conductive layer 242b.
  • the insulating layers 241a and 241b may be made of a barrier insulator that can be used for the insulating layer 275, etc.
  • silicon nitride may be used for the insulating layers 241a and 241b.
  • the insulating layers 241a and 241b are provided in contact with the insulating layers 285, 283, 282, and 275, as well as the insulating layers 271a and 271b, respectively. This prevents impurities such as water and hydrogen contained in the insulating layer 280 from entering the semiconductor layer 230 through the conductive layers 240a and 240b.
  • Silicon nitride is particularly suitable because it has high blocking properties against hydrogen. It also prevents oxygen contained in the insulating layer 280 from being absorbed by the conductive layers 240a and 240b.
  • the conductive layer 260 functions as the gate electrode of the transistor 200.
  • the conductive layer 260 is preferably provided so as to extend in the channel width direction. With this configuration, when multiple transistors are provided, the conductive layer 260 functions as wiring.
  • the insulating layer 280 preferably has a low dielectric constant. Using a material with a low dielectric constant as the interlayer film reduces the parasitic capacitance that occurs between wiring.
  • the insulating layer 280 preferably contains one or more of silicon oxide, silicon oxynitride, silicon oxide doped with fluorine, silicon oxide doped with carbon, silicon oxide doped with carbon and nitrogen, and silicon oxide with vacancies. Silicon oxide and silicon oxynitride are preferred because they are thermally stable. Materials such as silicon oxide, silicon oxynitride, and silicon oxide with vacancies are particularly preferred because they allow for the easy formation of regions containing oxygen that is released by heating.
  • [Variation 1] 8 illustrates an example in which the transistor 200 includes a conductive layer 205 that functions as a back gate.
  • the structure illustrated in FIG. 8 includes the conductive layer 205 and the insulating layer 202.
  • the conductive layer 205 is embedded in the insulating layer 202.
  • the insulating layer 201 is provided to cover the insulating layer 202 and the conductive layer 205.
  • the conductive layer 205 functions as a second gate (back gate) of the transistor 200.
  • the conductive layer 205 is provided in a region that overlaps with the conductive layer 260 with the semiconductor layer 230 interposed therebetween.
  • the threshold voltage of the transistor 200 can be controlled.
  • the potential on the back channel side of the semiconductor layer 230 can be fixed, variation in the electrical characteristics of the transistor 200 can be reduced.
  • the conductive layer 205 may be applied with the same potential or signal as any one of the conductive layer 242a, the conductive layer 242b, and the conductive layer 260.
  • the conductive layer 205 can be made of any material that can be used for the conductive layer 260.
  • the conductive layer 205 may also have a layered structure.
  • the insulating layer 201 functions as a second gate insulating layer.
  • a silicon oxide film can be used for the insulating layer 202. Note that it is preferable to provide an insulating film, such as silicon nitride or aluminum oxide, that has barrier properties against oxygen between the insulating layer 202 and the conductive layer 205, because this can prevent oxidation of the conductive layer 205.
  • an insulating film such as silicon nitride or aluminum oxide
  • each of the conductive layers 242a and 242b is shown as having a two-layer structure.
  • the conductive layer 242a has a stacked structure of a conductive layer 242a1 and a conductive layer 242a2 on the conductive layer 242a1.
  • the conductive layer 242b has a stacked structure of a conductive layer 242b1 and a conductive layer 242b2 on the conductive layer 242b1.
  • Insulating layer 255 is disposed inside an opening formed in insulating layer 280 or the like, and contacts the side of insulating layer 280, the side of conductive layer 242a2, the side of conductive layer 242b2, the top surface of conductive layer 242a1, the top surface of conductive layer 242b1, and the top surface of insulating layer 201 in the opening.
  • insulating layer 255 can be said to be formed in the shape of a sidewall, contacting the side wall of the opening formed in insulating layer 280 or the like.
  • the side wall of the opening corresponds, for example, to the side of insulating layer 280 or the like in the opening.
  • the insulating layer 255 preferably has a barrier property against oxygen.
  • the insulating layer 255 having a barrier property against oxygen can prevent the side surfaces of the conductive layer 242a and the conductive layer 242b from being oxidized and an oxide film from being formed on the side surfaces. This can prevent a decrease in the on-state current or the field-effect mobility of the transistor 200.
  • the insulating layer 255 can be made of a barrier insulator that can be used for the insulating layer 275, for example. For example, silicon nitride can be used for the insulating layer 255.
  • the portion of conductive layer 242b1 on which insulating layer 255 is formed protrudes toward conductive layer 260 beyond conductive layer 242b2.
  • the insulating layer 255 is formed in a sidewall shape by anisotropic etching, in contact with the sidewall of the opening provided in the insulating layer 280.
  • the insulating layer 255 is formed in contact with the side surface of the conductive layer 242a2 and the side surface of the conductive layer 242b2, and functions to protect the conductive layer 242a2 and the conductive layer 242b2.
  • a portion of insulating layer 250 is arranged overlapping the protruding portions of conductive layer 242a1 and conductive layer 242b1.
  • a portion of conductive layer 260 may be arranged overlapping the protruding portions of conductive layer 242a1 and conductive layer 242b1.
  • the protruding portions of conductive layer 242a1 and conductive layer 242b1 contact insulating layer 250.
  • the side of insulating layer 250 contacts the side of insulating layer 280, the side of conductive layer 242a2, and the side of conductive layer 242b2.
  • insulating layer 250 The portion of insulating layer 250 that is placed in the opening provided in insulating layer 280 is formed to reflect the shape of the opening. Therefore, insulating layer 250 is formed to reflect the shapes of conductive layer 242a1 and conductive layer 242b1 that protrude into the opening.
  • the distance between conductive layer 242a1 and conductive layer 242b1 is smaller than the distance between conductive layer 242a2 and conductive layer 242b2.
  • This configuration makes it possible to shorten the distance between the source and drain, and accordingly shorten the channel length. This improves the frequency characteristics of transistor 200. In this way, miniaturization of semiconductor devices can provide semiconductor devices with improved operating speeds.
  • 11A1, 11B1, 11C1, 11D1, 12A1, 12B1, and 12C1 are schematic cross-sectional views at each stage of the exemplary fabrication method illustrated below, while 11A2, 11B2, 11C2, 11D2, 12A2, 12B2, and 12C2 are perspective views. Note that the perspective views are partially cut away. Also, in the perspective views, only the outlines of some components (such as insulating layers) are shown with dashed lines.
  • Insulating layer 201 corresponds to substrate 11 or base film 12 in embodiment 1.
  • Semiconductor film 230f corresponds to semiconductor film 21f in embodiment 1, and its fabrication method can be referenced. Note that this point corresponds to the stage shown in Figure 1B in embodiment 1.
  • the conductive film 242f can be formed using sputtering, CVD, MBE, PLD, or ALD.
  • tantalum nitride is deposited as the conductive film 242f by sputtering.
  • heat treatment may be performed before the deposition of the conductive film 242f.
  • the heat treatment may be performed under reduced pressure, and the conductive film 242f may be deposited successively without exposure to the atmosphere.
  • moisture and hydrogen adsorbed on the surface of the semiconductor film 230f can be removed, and the moisture and hydrogen concentrations in the semiconductor film 230f can be further reduced.
  • the temperature of the heat treatment is preferably 100°C or higher and 400°C or lower.
  • the semiconductor film 230f and the conductive film 242f are processed into island shapes using lithography to form the semiconductor layer 230 and the conductive layer 242 ( Figures 11B1 and 11B2).
  • the above processing can be performed using dry etching or wet etching. Dry etching is suitable for fine processing. Furthermore, the semiconductor film 230f and the conductive film 242f may be processed under different conditions.
  • a layer that functions as a hard mask may be formed on the conductive film 242f.
  • a hard mask is preferable because it improves processability and makes it easier to process into the desired shape.
  • a hard mask made of an insulator or conductor may be used under the resist mask.
  • an insulating or conductive film that will serve as the hard mask material is formed on the conductive film 242f, a resist mask is formed thereon, and the hard mask material is etched to form a hard mask of the desired shape.
  • tungsten may be used as the hard mask material.
  • Etching of the conductive film 242f, etc. may be performed after removing the resist mask, or may be performed while leaving the resist mask in place. In the latter case, the resist mask may be lost during etching.
  • the hard mask may be removed by etching after etching the semiconductor film 230f, etc.
  • the hard mask material does not affect subsequent processes or can be used in subsequent processes, it is not necessarily necessary to remove the hard mask.
  • an SOC (Spin On Carbon) film and an SOG (Spin On Glass) film may be formed between the workpiece and the resist mask.
  • SOC film and an SOG film as a mask improves adhesion with the resist mask and increases the durability of the mask pattern.
  • an SOC film, an SOG film, and a resist mask may be formed in this order on the workpiece, and then lithography may be performed.
  • an insulating layer 275 is formed to cover the semiconductor layer 230 and the conductive layer 242, and an insulating layer 280 is then formed on the insulating layer 275 ( Figures 11C1 and 11C2).
  • the insulating layer 280 it is preferable to form an insulating film that will become the insulating layer 280 and then perform CMP processing on the insulating film to form an insulator with a flat upper surface.
  • a silicon nitride film may be formed on the insulating layer 280 by, for example, sputtering, and then CMP processing may be performed on the silicon nitride until it reaches the insulating layer 280.
  • Insulating layer 275 and insulating layer 280 can each be formed using, for example, sputtering, CVD, MBE, PLD, or ALD.
  • the insulating layer 275 it is preferable to use an insulator that has the function of suppressing oxygen permeation.
  • an insulator that has the function of suppressing oxygen permeation.
  • the insulating layer 275 may be formed by forming an aluminum oxide film using the sputtering method and then forming a silicon nitride film thereon using the PEALD method.
  • the insulating layer 280 is also preferable to form the insulating layer 280 using silicon oxide by sputtering.
  • the insulating layer 280 can be formed to contain excess oxygen.
  • the hydrogen concentration in the insulating layer 280 can be reduced.
  • Heat treatment may be performed before the deposition of the insulating film. The heat treatment may be performed under reduced pressure, and the insulating film may be deposited successively without exposure to the atmosphere. By performing such treatment, moisture and hydrogen adsorbed on the surface of the insulating layer 275, etc., can be removed.
  • the heat treatment conditions described above can be used for the heat treatment.
  • the conductive layer 242, insulating layer 275, and insulating layer 280 are processed using lithography to form openings (also called grooves) that reach the semiconductor layer 230 and insulating layer 201 ( Figures 11D1 and 11D2).
  • the conductive layer 242 is divided to form conductive layers 242a and 242b.
  • the openings formed in the insulating layer 280 and insulating layer 275 overlap with the semiconductor layer 230.
  • insulating layer 250 is formed so as to cover the openings formed in insulating layer 280, etc.
  • insulating layer 250 is formed along the openings in insulating layer 280.
  • insulating layer 250 contacts insulating layer 280, conductive layer 242a, conductive layer 242b, insulating layer 201, and semiconductor layer 230.
  • the insulating layer 250 can be formed using sputtering, CVD, MBE, PLD, or ALD. Since it is preferable to form the insulating layer 250 with a thin film thickness, it is preferable to form it using the ALD method, which has excellent coverage and easy film thickness control.
  • ozone ( O3 ), oxygen ( O2 ), water ( H2O ), or the like can be used as an oxidizing agent.
  • O3 ), oxygen ( O2 ), or the like that does not contain hydrogen as an oxidizing agent, the amount of hydrogen that diffuses into the semiconductor layer 230 can be reduced.
  • microwave treatment refers to treatment using, for example, a device equipped with a power source that generates high-density plasma using microwaves.
  • microwaves refer to electromagnetic waves with a frequency of 300 MHz or higher and 300 GHz or lower.
  • a microwave processing device having a power supply that generates high-density plasma using microwaves.
  • the frequency of the microwave processing device can typically be 2.45 GHz.
  • high-density plasma high-density oxygen radicals can be generated.
  • the power of the power supply that applies microwaves in the microwave processing device is preferably 1000 W or more and 10,000 W or less, and preferably 2000 W or more and 5,000 W or less.
  • the microwave processing device may also have a power supply that applies RF to the substrate side. Furthermore, by applying RF to the substrate side, oxygen ions generated by high-density plasma can be efficiently guided into the semiconductor layer 230.
  • the microwave treatment is preferably carried out under reduced pressure, with the pressure preferably being 10 Pa or higher and 1000 Pa or lower, and more preferably being 300 Pa or higher and 700 Pa or lower.
  • the treatment temperature is preferably 750°C or lower, more preferably 500°C or lower, and can be, for example, about 250°C.
  • a heat treatment may be carried out consecutively without exposure to the outside air.
  • the heat treatment temperature is, for example, preferably 100°C or higher and 750°C or lower, and more preferably 300°C or higher and 500°C or lower.
  • a conductive film that will become the conductive layer 260 is formed.
  • This conductive film can be formed using sputtering, CVD, MBE, PLD, plating, or ALD.
  • a titanium nitride film and a tungsten film can be stacked and formed using CVD.
  • the insulating layer 250 is provided in the opening in contact with the conductive layer 242a, the conductive layer 242b, the semiconductor layer 230, and the insulating layer 201. Furthermore, the conductive layer 260 is disposed so as to fill the opening via the insulating layer 250. In this manner, the transistor 200 is formed.
  • Insulating layer 282 is formed on insulating layer 250, conductive layer 260, and insulating layer 280.
  • Insulating layer 282 can be formed using, for example, sputtering, CVD, MBE, PLD, or ALD. Sputtering is preferably used to form insulating layer 282. By using sputtering, which does not require the use of hydrogen-containing molecules in the deposition gas, the hydrogen concentration in insulating layer 282 can be reduced.
  • oxygen can be added to the insulating layer 280 while the layer is being deposited. This allows the insulating layer 280 to contain excess oxygen.
  • Insulating layer 285 is formed on insulating layer 282 ( Figures 12B1 and 12B2).
  • Insulating layer 285 can be formed using sputtering, CVD, MBE, PLD, or ALD. Sputtering is preferably used to form insulating layer 285. By using sputtering, which does not require the use of hydrogen-containing molecules in the deposition gas, the hydrogen concentration in insulating layer 285 can be reduced.
  • openings are formed in insulating layer 275, insulating layer 280, insulating layer 282, and insulating layer 285, reaching conductive layers 242a and 242b, respectively.
  • the openings may be formed using lithography.
  • the shape of the openings when viewed from above can be a circle, an approximately circular shape such as an ellipse, a polygonal shape such as a square, or a polygonal shape with rounded corners such as a square.
  • the insulating film is anisotropically etched to form insulating layers 241a and 241b.
  • insulating layer 241a is formed to cover the sidewalls of the openings on conductive layer 242a
  • insulating layer 241b is formed to cover the sidewalls of the openings on conductive layer 242b.
  • Dry etching or the like can be used for anisotropically etching the insulating films that will become insulating layers 241a and 241b.
  • reactive ion etching is preferably used.
  • insulating layers 241a and 241b By providing insulating layers 241a and 241b on the sidewalls of the openings, oxygen penetration from the outside can be suppressed, preventing oxidation of conductive layers 240a and 240b, which will be formed next. Furthermore, impurities such as water and hydrogen contained in insulating layer 280 can be prevented from diffusing into conductive layers 240a and 240b. Note that this anisotropic etching may form recesses in parts of the top surfaces of conductive layers 242a and 242b.
  • the conductive film that will become conductive layer 240a and conductive layer 240b is formed. It is desirable that the conductive film have a layered structure that includes a conductor that has the function of suppressing the permeation of impurities such as water and hydrogen.
  • the conductive film can be a layered structure of tantalum nitride, titanium nitride, or the like, and tungsten, molybdenum, copper, or the like.
  • the conductive film that will become conductive layer 240a and conductive layer 240b can be formed by a sputtering method, a CVD method, an MBE method, a PLD method, an ALD method, or the like.
  • CMP processing is performed to remove portions of the conductive film that will become conductive layers 240a and 240b, exposing the upper surface of insulating layer 285 ( Figures 12C1 and 12C2). As a result, the conductive film remains only in the openings, allowing conductive layers 240a and 240b to be formed with flat upper surfaces. Note that the CMP processing may remove portions of the upper surface of insulating layer 285.
  • heat treatment may be performed after the conductive layers 240a and 240b are formed.
  • the heat treatment can be performed under the same conditions as the above-described heat treatment.
  • the amount of oxygen supplied to the semiconductor layer 230 can be adjusted. This can improve the electrical characteristics and reliability of the transistor 200.
  • the transistor 200 described in this embodiment can be replaced with the transistor 10 described in Embodiment 1. This makes it possible to realize a semiconductor device in which a transistor whose channel is formed in a single crystal substrate and a transistor whose channel is formed in an oxide semiconductor film are stacked.
  • This embodiment can be implemented by appropriately combining at least a portion of it with other embodiments described in this specification.
  • FIGS. 13 to 16 a memory device of one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16.
  • a configuration example of a memory device in which a layer having memory cells is stacked over a layer in which a driver circuit including a sense amplifier is provided will be described.
  • the transistor in which a channel is formed in a single crystal substrate (referred to as a Si transistor), as exemplified in Embodiment 1, can be used as a transistor included in a driver circuit including a sense amplifier, as exemplified below.
  • the transistor in which a channel is formed in a single crystal oxide semiconductor (referred to as an OS transistor), as exemplified in Embodiment 1, can be used as a transistor included in a memory cell.
  • ⁇ Configuration example of storage device> 13 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of a memory device 480 according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • the memory device 480 illustrated in FIG. 13 includes a layer 420 and a stacked layer 470.
  • Layer 420 is a layer including a Si transistor.
  • element layers 430[1] to 430[m] (m is an integer of 2 or more) are stacked.
  • Element layers 430[1] to 430[m] are layers including an OS transistor.
  • Layer 470 which includes a stack of layers including an OS transistor, can be stacked on layer 420.
  • Elements such as OS transistors and capacitors included in the element layers 430[1] to 430[m] constitute memory cells.
  • Figure 13 shows an example in which the element layers 430[1] to 430[m] have multiple memory cells 432 arranged in a matrix of m rows and n columns (n is an integer greater than or equal to 2).
  • memory cell 432 in the first row and first column is indicated as memory cell 432[1,1] and memory cell 432 in the mth row and nth column is indicated as memory cell 432[m,n].
  • an arbitrary row may be referred to as row i.
  • an arbitrary column may be referred to as column j. Therefore, i is an integer between 1 and m, and j is an integer between 1 and n.
  • memory cell 432 in the ith row and jth column is indicated as memory cell 432[i,j].
  • the first wiring WL (first row) is referred to as wiring WL[1]
  • the mth wiring WL (mth row) is referred to as wiring WL[m].
  • the first wiring PL (first row) is referred to as wiring PL[1]
  • the mth wiring PL (mth row) is referred to as wiring PL[m].
  • first wiring BL (first column) is referred to as wiring BL[1]
  • nth wiring BL (nth column) is referred to as wiring BL[n]. Note that the number of element layers 430[1] to 430[m] and the number of wirings WL (and wirings PL) do not have to be the same.
  • the multiple memory cells 432 provided in the i-th row are electrically connected to the i-th row wiring WL (wiring WL[i]) and the i-th row wiring PL (wiring PL[i]).
  • the multiple memory cells 432 provided in the j-th column are electrically connected to the j-th column wiring BL (wiring BL[j]).
  • the wiring BL functions as a bit line for writing and reading data.
  • the wiring WL functions as a word line for controlling the on/off (conducting or non-conducting) of an access transistor that functions as a switch.
  • the wiring PL functions as a constant potential line connected to a capacitor. Note that a separate wiring can be provided to transmit the back gate potential.
  • the memory cells 432 included in each of the element layers 430[1] to 430[m] are connected to a sense amplifier 446 via wiring BL.
  • the wiring BL can be arranged parallel to or perpendicular to the substrate surface on which the layer 420 is provided.
  • the length of the wiring between the element layer 430 and the sense amplifier 446 can be shortened.
  • the signal propagation distance between the memory cell and the sense amplifier can be shortened, and the resistance and parasitic capacitance of the bit line are significantly reduced, thereby achieving reduced power consumption and signal delay. This reduces the power consumption and signal delay of the memory device 480.
  • Layer 420 has PSW 471 (power switch), PSW 472, and peripheral circuit 422.
  • Peripheral circuit 422 has drive circuit 440, control circuit 473, and voltage generation circuit 474.
  • Each circuit in layer 420 has a Si transistor.
  • each circuit, signal, and voltage can be selected or removed as needed. Alternatively, other circuits or signals may be added.
  • Signals BW, CE, GW, CLK, WAKE, ADDR, WDA, PON1, and PON2 are input signals from the outside, and signal RDA is an output signal to the outside.
  • Signal CLK is a clock signal.
  • signals BW, CE, and GW are control signals.
  • Signal CE is a chip enable signal
  • signal GW is a global write enable signal
  • signal BW is a byte write enable signal.
  • Signal ADDR is an address signal.
  • Signal WDA is a write data signal
  • signal RDA is a read data signal.
  • Signals PON1 and PON2 are power gating control signals. Note that signals PON1 and PON2 may be generated by control circuit 473.
  • the control circuit 473 is a logic circuit that has the function of controlling the overall operation of the memory device 480. For example, the control circuit performs a logical operation on the signals CE, GW, and BW to determine the operating mode (e.g., write operation, read operation) of the memory device 480. Alternatively, the control circuit 473 generates a control signal for the drive circuit 440 so that this operating mode is executed.
  • the control circuit performs a logical operation on the signals CE, GW, and BW to determine the operating mode (e.g., write operation, read operation) of the memory device 480.
  • the control circuit 473 generates a control signal for the drive circuit 440 so that this operating mode is executed.
  • Voltage generation circuit 474 has the function of generating a negative voltage.
  • Signal WAKE has the function of controlling the input of signal CLK to voltage generation circuit 474. For example, when a high-level signal is applied to signal WAKE, signal CLK is input to voltage generation circuit 474, causing voltage generation circuit 474 to generate a negative voltage.
  • the drive circuit 440 is a circuit for writing and reading data to and from the memory cells 432.
  • the drive circuit 440 includes a row decoder 442, a column decoder 444, a row driver 443, a column driver 445, an input circuit 447, an output circuit 448, and the aforementioned sense amplifier 446.
  • the row decoder 442 and column decoder 444 have the function of decoding the signal ADDR.
  • the row decoder 442 is a circuit for specifying the row to access
  • the column decoder 444 is a circuit for specifying the column to access.
  • the row driver 443 has the function of selecting the wiring WL specified by the row decoder 442.
  • the column driver 445 has the function of writing data to the memory cell 432, reading data from the memory cell 432, and retaining the read data.
  • the input circuit 447 has the function of holding the signal WDA.
  • the data held by the input circuit 447 is output to the column driver 445.
  • the output data of the input circuit 447 is the data (Din) to be written to the memory cell 432.
  • the data (Dout) read from the memory cell 432 by the column driver 445 is output to the output circuit 448.
  • the output circuit 448 has the function of holding Dout.
  • the output circuit 448 also has the function of outputting Dout to the outside of the memory device 480.
  • the data output from the output circuit 448 is the signal RDA.
  • PSW471 has the function of controlling the supply of VDD to the peripheral circuit 422.
  • PSW472 has the function of controlling the supply of VHM to the row driver 443.
  • the high power supply potential of the memory device 480 is VDD
  • the low power supply potential is GND (ground potential).
  • VHM is a high power supply potential used to set the word line to a high level, and is higher than VDD.
  • the on/off of PSW471 is controlled by signal PON1, and the on/off of PSW472 is controlled by signal PON2.
  • the number of power domains to which VDD is supplied in the peripheral circuit 422 is one, but there can be multiple. In this case, a power switch can be provided for each power domain.
  • Element layers 430[1] to 430[m] can be stacked on layer 420.
  • the element layer 430 provided in the first layer is shown as element layer 430[1]
  • the element layer 430 provided in the second layer is shown as element layer 430[2]
  • the element layer 430 provided in the fifth layer is shown as element layer 430[5].
  • Also shown in Figure 14A are wiring WL and wiring PL extending in the X direction, and wiring BL and wiring BLB extending in the Y direction and Z direction (directions perpendicular to the substrate surface on which the driver circuit is provided).
  • Wiring BLB is an inverted bit line. Note that to make the drawing easier to understand, the wiring WL and wiring PL of each element layer 430 have been partially omitted.
  • Figure 14B is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration example of the sense amplifier 446 connected to the wiring BL and wiring BLB shown in Figure 14A, and the memory cells 432 included in the element layers 430[1] to 430[5] connected to the wiring BL and wiring BLB. Note that a configuration in which multiple memory cells (memory cells 432) are electrically connected to one wiring BL and wiring BLB is also referred to as a "memory string.”
  • Figure 14B shows an example of the circuit configuration of a memory cell 432 connected to wiring BLB.
  • the memory cell 432 includes a transistor 437 and a capacitor 438.
  • the transistor 437, the capacitor 438, and each wiring (BL, WL, etc.) may also be referred to as wiring BL and wiring WL, for example, instead of wiring BL[1] and wiring WL[1].
  • one of the source and drain of the transistor 437 is connected to the wiring BL.
  • the other of the source and drain of the transistor 437 is connected to one electrode of the capacitor 438.
  • the other electrode of the capacitor 438 is connected to the wiring PL.
  • the gate of the transistor 437 is connected to the wiring WL.
  • the wiring PL is a wiring that provides a constant potential to maintain the potential of the capacitor 438. By connecting multiple wirings PL together and using them as a single wiring, the number of wirings can be reduced.
  • OS transistors are stacked, and wirings that function as bit lines are arranged perpendicular to the surface of the substrate on which the layer 420 is provided.
  • the transistor 437 and capacitor 438 included in the memory cell 432 are arranged side by side in the perpendicular direction to the surface of the substrate on which the layer 420 is provided.
  • FIGS. 15A and 15B show a circuit diagram corresponding to the memory cell 432 described above and a circuit block diagram corresponding to the circuit diagram.
  • the memory cell 432 may be represented as a block in the drawings. Note that the wiring BL shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B can be represented in the same manner even when replaced with a wiring BLB.
  • the switch circuit 482 includes, for example, N-type transistors 482_1 and 482_2.
  • the transistors 482_1 and 482_2 switch the conduction state between the wiring pair of the wiring SA_OUT and the wiring SA_OUTB and the wiring pair of the wiring BL and the wiring BLB in response to the signal CSEL.
  • the precharge circuit 483 is composed of N-type transistors 483_1 to 483_3.
  • the precharge circuit 483 is a circuit for precharging the wiring BL and wiring BLB to an intermediate potential VPRE corresponding to a potential VDD/2 in response to a signal EQ.
  • the precharge circuit 484 is composed of P-type transistors 484_1 to 484_3.
  • the precharge circuit 484 is a circuit for precharging the wiring BL and wiring BLB to an intermediate potential VPRE corresponding to a potential VDD/2 in response to a signal EQB.
  • the amplifier circuit 485 is composed of P-type transistors 485_1 and 485_2 and N-type transistors 485_3 and 485_4 connected to wiring SAP or wiring SAN.
  • the wiring SAP or wiring SAN is a wiring that provides VDD or VSS.
  • the transistors 485_1 to 485_4 are transistors that form an inverter loop.
  • Figure 15D shows a circuit block diagram corresponding to the sense amplifier 446 described in Figure 15C etc. As shown in Figure 15D, the sense amplifier 446 may be represented as a block in drawings etc.
  • Figure 16 is a circuit diagram of the memory device 480 in Figure 13.
  • Figure 16 illustrates the circuit blocks described in Figures 15A to 15D.
  • the layer 470 including the element layer 430[m] has a memory cell 432.
  • the memory cell 432 shown in FIG. 16 is connected to a pair of wirings BL[1] and BLB[1], or wirings BL[2] and BLB[2], for example.
  • the memory cell 432 connected to wiring BL is a memory cell to which data is written or read.
  • Wiring BL[1] and wiring BLB[1] are connected to sense amplifier 446[1], and wiring BL[2] and wiring BLB[2] are connected to sense amplifier 446[2].
  • Sense amplifier 446[1] and sense amplifier 446[2] can read data in response to the various signals described in Figure 15C.
  • This embodiment can be implemented by appropriately combining at least a portion of it with other embodiments described in this specification.
  • a display device to which the transistor of one embodiment of the present invention is applied can be a display device with extremely high resolution.
  • the display device of one embodiment of the present invention can be used in the display portion of information terminals (wearable devices) such as wristwatches and bracelets, as well as in the display portion of head-mounted displays (HMDs), VR devices such as head-mounted displays, and glasses-type AR devices.
  • information terminals wearable devices
  • HMDs head-mounted displays
  • VR devices such as head-mounted displays
  • glasses-type AR devices glasses-type AR devices
  • Display module 17A shows a perspective view of the display module 580.
  • the display module 580 includes a display device 500A and an FPC 590.
  • Display module 580 has substrate 591 and substrate 592.
  • Display module 580 has display unit 581.
  • Display unit 581 is an area that displays images.
  • Figure 17B shows a perspective view that schematically illustrates the configuration on the substrate 591 side. Stacked on the substrate 591 are a circuit section 582, a pixel circuit section 583 on the circuit section 582, and a pixel section 584 on the pixel circuit section 583.
  • a terminal section 585 for connecting to the FPC 590 is provided in a portion of the substrate 591 that does not overlap with the pixel section 584.
  • the terminal section 585 and the circuit section 582 are electrically connected by a wiring section 586 that is composed of multiple wirings.
  • the pixel section 584 has a plurality of periodically arranged pixels 584a. An enlarged view of one pixel 584a is shown on the right side of Figure 17B.
  • the pixel 584a has a light-emitting element 110R that emits red light, a light-emitting element 110G that emits green light, and a light-emitting element 110B that emits blue light.
  • the pixel circuit section 583 has a plurality of pixel circuits 583a arranged periodically. Each pixel circuit 583a is a circuit that controls the light emission of three light-emitting devices in one pixel 584a.
  • One pixel circuit 583a may be configured to have three circuits that control the light emission of one light-emitting device.
  • the pixel circuit 583a may be configured to have at least one selection transistor, one current control transistor (drive transistor), and a capacitance element per light-emitting device. In this case, a gate signal is input to the gate of the selection transistor, and a source signal is input to the source. This realizes an active matrix display panel.
  • the circuit portion 582 has a circuit that drives each pixel circuit 583a in the pixel circuit portion 583.
  • it preferably has one or both of a gate line driver circuit and a source line driver circuit.
  • it may have at least one of an arithmetic circuit, a memory circuit, a power supply circuit, etc.
  • a transistor provided in the circuit portion 582 may constitute part of the pixel circuit 583a.
  • the pixel circuit 583a may be composed of a transistor included in the pixel circuit portion 583 and a transistor included in the circuit portion 582.
  • the FPC 590 functions as wiring for supplying video signals, power supply potential, etc. from the outside to the circuit section 582.
  • An IC may also be mounted on the FPC 590.
  • the display module 580 can be configured such that one or both of the pixel circuit unit 583 and the circuit unit 582 are overlapped below the pixel unit 584, thereby enabling the aperture ratio (effective display area ratio) of the display unit 581 to be extremely high.
  • the aperture ratio of the display unit 581 can be 40% or more and less than 100%, preferably 50% or more and 95% or less, and more preferably 60% or more and 95% or less.
  • the pixels 584a can be arranged at an extremely high density, enabling the resolution of the display unit 581 to be extremely high.
  • the pixels 584a be arranged in the display unit 581 at a resolution of 2000 ppi or more, preferably 3000 ppi or more, more preferably 5000 ppi or more, and even more preferably 6000 ppi or more, and 20,000 ppi or less, or 30,000 ppi or less.
  • a display module 580 has extremely high resolution, it can be suitably used in VR devices such as head-mounted displays, or in glasses-type AR devices. For example, even in a configuration in which the display section of the display module 580 is viewed through lenses, the display module 580 has an extremely high-resolution display section 581, so even if the display section is enlarged with lenses, the pixels are not visible, allowing for a highly immersive display.
  • the display module 580 is not limited to this, and can be suitably used in electronic devices with relatively small displays. For example, it can be suitably used in the display section of wearable electronic devices such as wristwatches.
  • the display device 500A shown in FIG. 18 includes a substrate 301, a light emitting element 110R, a light emitting element 110G, a light emitting element 110B, a capacitor 540, a transistor 310, and a transistor 320.
  • Transistor 310 corresponds to transistor 50, which is illustrated in embodiment 1 and has a channel formed in a single crystal substrate.
  • Transistor 320 corresponds to transistor 10 or transistor 200, which is illustrated in embodiment 1 and embodiment 2 and has a channel formed in a single crystal oxide semiconductor. Any of the various transistors illustrated in embodiment 2 can be used as transistor 320.
  • Transistor 310 is a transistor that has a channel formation region in substrate 301.
  • Substrate 301 can be, for example, a semiconductor substrate such as a single crystal silicon substrate.
  • Transistor 310 has a part of substrate 301, conductive layer 311, low-resistance region 312, insulating layer 313, and insulating layer 314.
  • Conductive layer 311 functions as a gate electrode.
  • Insulating layer 313 is located between substrate 301 and conductive layer 311 and functions as a gate insulating layer.
  • Low-resistance region 312 is a region in which impurities are doped into substrate 301, and functions as either a source or a drain.
  • Insulating layer 314 is provided to cover the side surface of conductive layer 311.
  • an element isolation layer 315 is provided between two adjacent transistors 310 so as to be embedded in the substrate 301.
  • the transistor 320 has a semiconductor layer 351, an insulating layer 353, a conductive layer 354, a pair of conductive layers 355, an insulating layer 360, and a conductive layer 357.
  • Wiring layer 371 and wiring layer 361 are provided between the layer in which transistor 310 is provided and the layer in which transistor 320 is provided.
  • Wiring layer 371 has at least an insulating layer 372 at the top and a conductive layer 373 embedded in insulating layer 372.
  • Wiring layer 361 has at least an insulating layer 362 at the bottom and a conductive layer 363 embedded in insulating layer 362.
  • Display device 500A is manufactured by bonding between wiring layer 361 and wiring layer 371. That is, insulating layer 372, conductive layer 373, insulating layer 362, and conductive layer 363 each have a bonding surface. By connecting conductive layer 363 and conductive layer 373, transistor 310 and transistor 320 can be electrically connected via various wirings.
  • Transistor 320 is sandwiched between insulating layers 352 and 359.
  • Insulating layers 352 and 359 preferably have barrier properties against hydrogen and oxygen, respectively. This prevents impurities from diffusing into transistor 320 and oxygen from being released from semiconductor layer 351.
  • films that are less susceptible to hydrogen or oxygen diffusion than silicon oxide films such as aluminum oxide films, hafnium oxide films, and silicon nitride films, can be used.
  • An insulating layer 356 and a conductive layer 357 embedded in the insulating layer 356 are provided closer to the substrate 301 than the insulating layer 352.
  • An insulating layer 360 is provided between the conductive layer 357 and the semiconductor layer 351.
  • the conductive layer 357 functions as the second gate electrode of the transistor 320, and part of the insulating layer 360 functions as the second gate insulating layer.
  • the insulating layer 360 contacts the semiconductor layer 351.
  • the insulating layer 360 can correspond to the substrate 11 or the base film 12.
  • the insulating layer 360 may be an insulating film separate from the substrate 11 and the base film 12. Note that if the substrate 11 is used for the insulating layer 360 and it is difficult to reduce its thickness, a configuration without a back gate may be used.
  • the semiconductor layer 351 is provided on the substrate 301 side of the insulating layer 360.
  • the semiconductor layer 351 preferably includes a metal oxide (also referred to as an oxide semiconductor) film that exhibits semiconductor characteristics.
  • a pair of conductive layers 355 is provided in contact with the semiconductor layer 351 and functions as a source electrode and a drain electrode.
  • Insulating layers 358 and 350 are provided to cover the pair of conductive layers 355 and the semiconductor layer 351.
  • the insulating layer 358 functions as a barrier layer that prevents impurities such as water or hydrogen from diffusing into the semiconductor layer 351 and prevents oxygen from being released from the semiconductor layer 351.
  • the insulating layer 358 can be made of an insulating film similar to the insulating layer 352.
  • the insulating layer 350 functions as an interlayer insulating layer.
  • Openings are provided in insulating layer 358 and insulating layer 350, reaching semiconductor layer 351.
  • An insulating layer 353 in contact with the top surface of semiconductor layer 351 and a conductive layer 354 are buried inside the openings.
  • the conductive layer 354 functions as a first gate electrode, and the insulating layer 353 functions as a first gate insulating layer.
  • the top surfaces (surfaces facing the substrate 301) of the conductive layer 354, the insulating layer 353, and the insulating layer 350 are planarized so that they are at the same or approximately the same height, and an insulating layer 359 is provided to cover them.
  • the insulating layer 359 functions as a barrier layer that prevents impurities such as water or hydrogen from diffusing into the transistor 320.
  • the insulating layer 359 can be made of an insulating film similar to the insulating layer 352 described above.
  • Insulating layer 565 is provided covering insulating layer 359. Insulating layer 565 functions as an interlayer insulating layer.
  • a conductive layer 364 is provided on the substrate 301 side of the insulating layer 565.
  • a plug 575 connects the conductive layer 355 and the conductive layer 364.
  • capacitor 540 is provided on insulating layer 564.
  • Capacitor 540 has conductive layer 541, conductive layer 545, and insulating layer 543 located between them.
  • Conductive layer 541 functions as one electrode of capacitor 540
  • conductive layer 545 functions as the other electrode of capacitor 540
  • insulating layer 543 functions as a dielectric of capacitor 540.
  • the conductive layer 541 is embedded in an insulating layer 554 provided on the insulating layer 564.
  • the conductive layer 541 is electrically connected to the conductive layer 364 via a plug 574.
  • the insulating layer 543 is provided to cover the conductive layer 541.
  • the conductive layer 545 is provided in a region that overlaps with the conductive layer 541 via the insulating layer 543.
  • the conductive layer 541 is connected to the conductive layer 355 of the transistor 320 via the plug 574, the conductive layer 364, and the plug 575.
  • Insulating layers 555a, 555b, and 555c can each preferably be made of an inorganic insulating film.
  • This embodiment shows an example in which part of insulating layer 555c is etched to form a recess, but insulating layer 555c does not necessarily have to have a recess.
  • Organic layer 112R of light-emitting element 110R contains a light-emitting organic compound that emits at least red light.
  • Organic layer 112G of light-emitting element 110G contains a light-emitting organic compound that emits at least green light.
  • Organic layer 112B of light-emitting element 110B contains a light-emitting organic compound that emits at least blue light.
  • Organic layer 112R, organic layer 112G, and organic layer 112B can each be referred to as an EL layer, and each contains at least a layer (light-emitting layer) that contains a light-emitting organic compound.
  • Insulating layer 125, resin layer 126, and layer 128 are provided in the area between adjacent light-emitting elements.
  • a protective layer 121 is provided on the light-emitting elements 110R, 110G, and 110B.
  • a substrate 170 is bonded to the protective layer 121 by an adhesive layer 171.
  • connection electrode 111C can be provided along the periphery of the display area. For example, it may be provided along one side of the periphery of the display area, or it may be provided across two or more sides of the periphery of the display area. In other words, if the top surface shape of the display area is rectangular, the top surface shape of the connection electrode 111C can be strip-shaped (rectangular), L-shaped, U-shaped (square bracket shaped), square, or the like.
  • light-emitting element 110R when describing matters common to light-emitting element 110R, light-emitting element 110G, and light-emitting element 110B, they may be referred to as light-emitting element 110.
  • components distinguished by letters such as organic layer 112R, organic layer 112G, and organic layer 112B, they may be described using symbols without the letters.
  • the organic layer 112 and the common layer 114 can each independently have one or more of an electron injection layer, an electron transport layer, a hole injection layer, and a hole transport layer.
  • the organic layer 112 can have a layered structure of, from the pixel electrode 111 side, a hole injection layer, a hole transport layer, a light-emitting layer, and an electron transport layer, and the common layer 114 can have an electron injection layer.
  • a protective layer 121 is provided on the common electrode 113, covering the light-emitting elements 110R, 110G, and 110B.
  • the protective layer 121 prevents impurities such as water from diffusing from above into each light-emitting element.
  • the edge of the pixel electrode 111 has a tapered shape. If the edge of the pixel electrode 111 has a tapered shape, the organic layer 112 provided along the edge of the pixel electrode 111 can also be tapered. By tapering the edge of the pixel electrode 111, the coverage of the organic layer 112 provided over the edge of the pixel electrode 111 can be improved. In addition, tapering the side surface of the pixel electrode 111 makes it easier to remove foreign matter (for example, dust or particles) during the manufacturing process by processes such as cleaning, which is preferable.
  • foreign matter for example, dust or particles
  • the organic layer 112 is processed into an island shape using photolithography.
  • the angle between the top surface and the side surface of the organic layer 112 at its edges is close to 90 degrees.
  • organic films formed using FMM (Fine Metal Mask) or the like tend to become gradually thinner the closer they are to the edges.
  • the top surface is formed in a sloped shape over a range of 1 ⁇ m to 10 ⁇ m all the way to the edges, making it difficult to distinguish between the top surface and the side surface.
  • the resin layer 126 functions as a planarization film that fills in the step between two adjacent light-emitting elements. By providing the resin layer 126, it is possible to prevent the common electrode 113 from being separated by the step at the edge of the organic layer 112 (also known as step disconnection), which would otherwise result in insulation of the common electrode on the organic layer 112.
  • the resin layer 126 can also be referred to as an LFP (Local Filling Planarization) layer.
  • An insulating layer containing an organic material can be suitably used as the resin layer 126.
  • acrylic resin, polyimide resin, epoxy resin, imide resin, polyamide resin, polyimideamide resin, silicone resin, siloxane resin, benzocyclobutene resin, phenolic resin, and precursors of these resins can be used as the resin layer 126.
  • organic materials such as polyvinyl alcohol (PVA), polyvinyl butyral, polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyethylene glycol, polyglycerin, pullulan, water-soluble cellulose, or alcohol-soluble polyamide resin can also be used as the resin layer 126.
  • a photosensitive resin can be used as the resin layer 126.
  • Photoresist can also be used as the photosensitive resin.
  • the photosensitive resin can be a positive-type material or a negative-type material.
  • the resin layer 126 may contain a material that absorbs visible light.
  • the resin layer 126 itself may be made of a material that absorbs visible light, or the resin layer 126 may contain a pigment that absorbs visible light.
  • the resin layer 126 may be, for example, a resin that can be used as a color filter that transmits red, blue, or green light and absorbs other light, or a resin that contains carbon black as a pigment and functions as a black matrix.
  • the insulating layer 125 is located between the resin layer 126 and the organic layer 112, and functions as a protective film to prevent the resin layer 126 from coming into contact with the organic layer 112. If the organic layer 112 and the resin layer 126 come into contact, the organic layer 112 may be dissolved by the organic solvent used in forming the resin layer 126. Therefore, by providing the insulating layer 125 between the organic layer 112 and the resin layer 126, it is possible to protect the side surfaces of the organic layer 112.
  • Layer 128 is a portion of a protective layer (also called a mask layer or sacrificial layer) that protects organic layer 112 when it is etched.
  • Layer 128 can be made of the same material as that used for insulating layer 125. It is particularly preferable to use the same material for layer 128 and insulating layer 125, as this allows the use of common processing equipment, etc.
  • FIG 20A shows a schematic cross-sectional view of display device 100a.
  • Display device 100a differs from display device 100 above mainly in that it has a different configuration of light-emitting elements and in that it has a colored layer.
  • the display device 100a has a light-emitting element 110W that emits white light.
  • the light-emitting element 110W has a pixel electrode 111, an organic layer 112W, a common layer 114, and a common electrode 113.
  • the organic layer 112W emits white light.
  • the organic layer 112W can be configured to include two or more light-emitting materials whose emitted light colors are complementary to each other.
  • the organic layer 112W can be configured to include a light-emitting organic compound that emits red light, a light-emitting organic compound that emits green light, and a light-emitting organic compound that emits blue light. It may also be configured to include a light-emitting organic compound that emits blue light and a light-emitting organic compound that emits yellow light.
  • the organic layers 112W are separated between two adjacent light-emitting elements 110W. This makes it possible to suppress leakage current flowing between adjacent light-emitting elements 110W via the organic layers 112W, thereby suppressing crosstalk caused by this leakage current. This makes it possible to realize a display device with high contrast and color reproducibility.
  • An insulating layer 122 that functions as a planarizing film is provided on the protective layer 121, and colored layers 116R, 116G, and 116B are provided on the insulating layer 122.
  • FIG. 20B shows a schematic cross-sectional view of the display device 100b.
  • Light-emitting element 110R has a pixel electrode 111, a conductive layer 115R, an organic layer 112W, and a common electrode 113.
  • Light-emitting element 110G has a pixel electrode 111, a conductive layer 115G, an organic layer 112W, and a common electrode 113.
  • Light-emitting element 110B has a pixel electrode 111, a conductive layer 115B, an organic layer 112W, and a common electrode 113.
  • Conductive layer 115R, conductive layer 115G, and conductive layer 115B are each translucent and function as optical adjustment layers.
  • colored layers 116R, 116G, and 116B are provided on the optical paths of light-emitting elements 110R, 110G, and 110B, respectively, thereby enabling light with high color purity to be obtained.
  • an insulating layer 123 is provided to cover the edges of the pixel electrode 111 and the conductive layer 115.
  • the edges of the insulating layer 123 preferably have a tapered shape.
  • the organic layer 112W and the common electrode 113 are each provided as a continuous film common to each light-emitting element. This configuration is preferable because it significantly simplifies the manufacturing process of the display device.
  • edges of the pixel electrode 111 are nearly vertical. This allows for the formation of steeply inclined portions on the surface of the insulating layer 123, and makes it possible to form thin portions in the organic layer 112W that covers these portions, or to separate portions of the organic layer 112W. This makes it possible to suppress leakage current that occurs between adjacent light-emitting elements through the organic layer 112W, without processing the organic layer 112W using photolithography or the like.
  • This embodiment can be implemented by appropriately combining at least a portion of it with other embodiments described in this specification.
  • the electronic device of this embodiment has a display panel (display device) in which the transistor of one embodiment of the present invention is used in a display portion.
  • the display device of one embodiment of the present invention can easily achieve high definition and high resolution and can also achieve high display quality. Therefore, the display device can be used in the display portion of a variety of electronic devices.
  • Electronic devices include, for example, electronic devices with relatively large screens such as television sets, desktop or notebook personal computers, computer monitors, digital signage, and large game machines such as pachinko machines, as well as digital cameras, digital video cameras, digital photo frames, mobile phones, portable game machines, personal digital assistants, and audio playback devices.
  • electronic devices with relatively large screens such as television sets, desktop or notebook personal computers, computer monitors, digital signage, and large game machines such as pachinko machines, as well as digital cameras, digital video cameras, digital photo frames, mobile phones, portable game machines, personal digital assistants, and audio playback devices.
  • the display panel of one embodiment of the present invention can achieve high resolution and is therefore suitable for use in electronic devices with relatively small display areas.
  • electronic devices include wristwatch-type and bracelet-type information terminals (wearable devices), as well as wearable devices that can be worn on the head, such as VR devices such as head-mounted displays, AR glasses-type devices, and MR devices.
  • the display panel of one embodiment of the present invention preferably has an extremely high resolution such as HD (1280 x 720 pixels), FHD (1920 x 1080 pixels), WQHD (2560 x 1440 pixels), WQXGA (2560 x 1600 pixels), 4K (3840 x 2160 pixels), or 8K (7680 x 4320 pixels).
  • HD 1280 x 720 pixels
  • FHD (1920 x 1080 pixels)
  • WQHD 2560 x 1440 pixels
  • WQXGA 2560 x 1600 pixels
  • 4K 3840 x 2160 pixels
  • 8K 7680 x 4320 pixels
  • the pixel density (resolution) of the display panel of one embodiment of the present invention is preferably 100 ppi or more, preferably 300 ppi or more, more preferably 500 ppi or more, more preferably 1000 ppi or more, more preferably 2000 ppi or more, more preferably 3000 ppi or more, more preferably 5000 ppi or more, and even more preferably 7000 ppi or more.
  • the screen ratio (aspect ratio) of the display panel of one embodiment of the present invention can support various screen ratios such as 1:1 (square), 4:3, 16:9, and 16:10.
  • the electronic device of this embodiment may have a sensor (including the function of sensing, detecting, or measuring force, displacement, position, velocity, acceleration, angular velocity, rotation speed, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemical substances, sound, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration, odor, or infrared light).
  • a sensor including the function of sensing, detecting, or measuring force, displacement, position, velocity, acceleration, angular velocity, rotation speed, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemical substances, sound, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration, odor, or infrared light).
  • the electronic device of this embodiment can have a variety of functions. For example, it can have a function to display various information (still images, videos, text images, etc.) on the display unit, a touch panel function, a function to display a calendar, date or time, etc., a function to execute various software (programs), a wireless communication function, a function to read programs or data recorded on a recording medium, etc.
  • FIG. 21A to 21D An example of a wearable device that can be worn on the head will be described using Figures 21A to 21D.
  • These wearable devices have one or both of the functions of displaying AR content and VR content. Note that these wearable devices may also have the function of displaying SR or MR content in addition to AR and VR.
  • Electronic device 700A shown in FIG. 21A and electronic device 700B shown in FIG. 21B each have a pair of display panels 751, a pair of housings 721, a communication unit (not shown), a pair of mounting units 723, a control unit (not shown), an imaging unit (not shown), a pair of optical members 753, a frame 757, and a pair of nose pads 758.
  • a display panel according to one embodiment of the present invention can be applied to the display panel 751. Therefore, the electronic device can display images with extremely high resolution.
  • Electronic device 700A and electronic device 700B can each project an image displayed on display panel 751 onto display area 756 of optical element 753. Because optical element 753 is translucent, the user can see the image displayed in the display area superimposed on a transmitted image visible through optical element 753. Therefore, electronic device 700A and electronic device 700B are each electronic devices capable of AR display.
  • Electronic device 700A and electronic device 700B may be provided with a camera capable of capturing images in front of them as an imaging unit. Furthermore, electronic device 700A and electronic device 700B may each be provided with an acceleration sensor such as a gyro sensor, thereby detecting the orientation of the user's head and displaying an image corresponding to that orientation in display area 756.
  • an acceleration sensor such as a gyro sensor
  • the communication unit has a wireless communication device, which can supply video signals, etc.
  • a connector may be provided to which a cable through which a video signal and power supply potential can be connected.
  • electronic device 700A and electronic device 700B are equipped with batteries that can be charged wirelessly, wired, or both.
  • the housing 721 may be provided with a touch sensor module.
  • the touch sensor module has a function of detecting when the outer surface of the housing 721 is touched.
  • the touch sensor module can detect tapping or sliding operations by the user and perform various processes. For example, a tapping operation can perform processes such as pausing or resuming a video, and a sliding operation can perform processes such as fast-forwarding or fast-rewinding. Furthermore, providing a touch sensor module on each of the two housings 721 can expand the range of operations available.
  • touch sensors can be used as touch sensor modules.
  • various types can be used, such as capacitance, resistive film, infrared, electromagnetic induction, surface acoustic wave, and optical types.
  • capacitance or optical sensors it is preferable to use capacitance or optical sensors in touch sensor modules.
  • a photoelectric conversion device (also called a photoelectric conversion element) can be used as the light-receiving device (also called a light-receiving element).
  • the active layer of the photoelectric conversion device can be made of either or both an inorganic semiconductor and an organic semiconductor.
  • a display panel according to one embodiment of the present invention can be applied to the display portion 820. Therefore, an electronic device capable of displaying images with extremely high resolution can be provided. This allows the user to feel a high sense of immersion.
  • the display unit 820 is provided inside the housing 821 in a position that can be seen through the lens 832. Also, by displaying different images on the pair of display units 820, it is possible to perform a three-dimensional display using parallax.
  • Electronic device 800A and electronic device 800B can each be considered electronic devices for VR.
  • a user wearing electronic device 800A or electronic device 800B can view the image displayed on display unit 820 through lens 832.
  • Electronic device 800A and electronic device 800B each preferably have a mechanism that can adjust the left-right positions of lens 832 and display unit 820 so that they are optimally positioned according to the position of the user's eyes. They also preferably have a mechanism that can adjust the focus by changing the distance between lens 832 and display unit 820.
  • the attachment unit 823 allows the user to wear the electronic device 800A or electronic device 800B on the head. Note that in Figure 21C and other figures, the attachment unit 823 is shown shaped like the temples of glasses, but is not limited to this. The attachment unit 823 may be shaped like a helmet or band, for example, as long as it can be worn by the user.
  • the imaging unit 825 has the function of acquiring external information. Data acquired by the imaging unit 825 can be output to the display unit 820. An image sensor can be used for the imaging unit 825. Multiple cameras may also be provided to accommodate multiple angles of view, such as telephoto and wide-angle.
  • the detection unit can be, for example, an image sensor or a range image sensor such as a LIDAR (Light Detection and Ranging).
  • LIDAR Light Detection and Ranging
  • Electronic device 800A may have a vibration mechanism that functions as a bone conduction earphone.
  • a configuration having such a vibration mechanism can be applied to one or more of display unit 820, housing 821, and wearing unit 823. This allows users to enjoy video and audio simply by wearing electronic device 800A, without the need for separate audio equipment such as headphones, earphones, or speakers.
  • Electronic device 800A and electronic device 800B may each have an input terminal.
  • the input terminal can be connected to a cable that supplies video signals from a video output device or the like, and power for charging a battery provided within the electronic device.
  • the electronic device of one embodiment of the present invention may have a function of wireless communication with an earphone 750.
  • the earphone 750 has a communication unit (not shown) and has a wireless communication function.
  • the earphone 750 can receive information (e.g., audio data) from the electronic device through the wireless communication function.
  • the electronic device 700A shown in FIG. 21A has a function of transmitting information to the earphone 750 through the wireless communication function.
  • the electronic device 800A shown in FIG. 21C has a function of transmitting information to the earphone 750 through the wireless communication function.
  • the electronic device may have an earphone unit.
  • Electronic device 700B shown in FIG. 21B has earphone unit 727.
  • earphone unit 727 and the control unit may be configured to be connected to each other by wire.
  • Part of the wiring connecting earphone unit 727 and the control unit may be located inside the housing 721 or the attachment unit 723.
  • the electronic device 800B shown in FIG. 21D has an earphone unit 827.
  • the earphone unit 827 and the control unit 824 can be configured to be connected to each other by wire.
  • Part of the wiring connecting the earphone unit 827 and the control unit 824 may be located inside the housing 821 or the attachment unit 823.
  • the earphone unit 827 and the attachment unit 823 may also have magnets. This allows the earphone unit 827 to be fixed to the attachment unit 823 by magnetic force, making storage easier and preferable.
  • the electronic device may have an audio output terminal to which earphones or headphones can be connected.
  • the electronic device may also have either or both an audio input terminal and an audio input mechanism.
  • a sound collection device such as a microphone can be used as the audio input mechanism. Having an audio input mechanism in the electronic device may give it the functionality of a so-called headset.
  • electronic devices according to one embodiment of the present invention are suitable for both eyeglass-type devices (such as electronic devices 700A and 700B) and goggle-type devices (such as electronic devices 800A and 800B).
  • the electronic device 6500 shown in Figure 22A is a portable information terminal that can be used as a smartphone.
  • the electronic device 6500 includes a housing 6501, a display portion 6502, a power button 6503, a button 6504, a speaker 6505, a microphone 6506, a camera 6507, a light source 6508, a control device 6509, and the like.
  • the display portion 6502 has a touch panel function.
  • the control device 6509 includes, for example, one or more selected from a CPU, a GPU, and a storage device.
  • a semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention can be applied to the display portion 6502, the control device 6509, and the like. Use of the semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention for the control device 6509 is preferable because power consumption can be reduced.
  • a display panel according to one embodiment of the present invention can be applied to the display portion 6502.
  • Figure 22B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the housing 6501, including the end portion on the microphone 6506 side.
  • a translucent protective member 6510 is provided on the display surface side of the housing 6501, and a display panel 6511, optical members 6512, a touch sensor panel 6513, a printed circuit board 6517, a battery 6518, etc. are arranged in the space surrounded by the housing 6501 and the protective member 6510.
  • the display panel 6511, optical member 6512, and touch sensor panel 6513 are fixed to the protective member 6510 by an adhesive layer (not shown).
  • a portion of the display panel 6511 is folded back, and an FPC 6515 is connected to this folded back portion.
  • An IC 6516 is mounted on the FPC 6515.
  • the FPC 6515 is connected to a terminal provided on a printed circuit board 6517.
  • a display device can be applied to the display panel 6511. Therefore, an extremely lightweight electronic device can be realized. Furthermore, since the display panel 6511 is extremely thin, a large-capacity battery 6518 can be mounted thereon while keeping the thickness of the electronic device small. Furthermore, by folding back a part of the display panel 6511 and arranging a connection portion with the FPC 6515 on the back side of the pixel portion, an electronic device with a narrow frame can be realized.
  • FIG 22C shows an example of a television device.
  • the television device 7100 has a display unit 7000 built into a housing 7101.
  • the housing 7101 is supported by a stand 7103.
  • the television set 7100 shown in FIG. 22C can be operated using operation switches provided on the housing 7101 and a separate remote control 7111.
  • the display portion 7000 may be provided with a touch sensor, and the television set 7100 may be operated by touching the display portion 7000 with a finger or the like.
  • the remote control 7111 may have a display portion that displays information output from the remote control 7111.
  • the channel and volume can be controlled using the operation keys or touch panel provided on the remote control 7111, and the image displayed on the display portion 7000 can be controlled.
  • FIG. 22D shows an example of a laptop personal computer.
  • the laptop personal computer 7200 includes a housing 7211, a keyboard 7212, a pointing device 7213, an external connection port 7214, a control device 7216, and the like.
  • a display portion 7000 is incorporated in the housing 7211.
  • the control device 7216 includes, for example, one or more selected from a CPU, a GPU, and a storage device.
  • the semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention can be applied to the display portion 7000, the control device 7216, and the like. Use of the semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention for the control device 7216 is preferable because power consumption can be reduced.
  • Figures 22E and 22F show an example of digital signage.
  • the digital signage 7300 shown in FIG. 22E includes a housing 7301, a display unit 7000, and a speaker 7303. It may also include LED lamps, operation keys (including a power switch or an operation switch), connection terminals, various sensors, a microphone, etc.
  • Figure 22F shows digital signage 7400 attached to a cylindrical pillar 7401.
  • Digital signage 7400 has a display unit 7000 that is provided along the curved surface of pillar 7401.
  • the larger the display unit 7000 the more information can be provided at one time. Also, the larger the display unit 7000, the more likely it is to catch people's attention, which can increase the advertising effectiveness of, for example, advertising.
  • Applying a touch panel to the display unit 7000 is preferable because it not only displays images or videos on the display unit 7000, but also allows the user to operate it intuitively. Furthermore, when used to provide information such as route information or traffic information, intuitive operation can improve usability.
  • the digital signage 7300 or the digital signage 7400 can be linked via wireless communication with an information terminal 7311 or an information terminal 7411 such as a smartphone carried by a user.
  • advertising information displayed on the display unit 7000 can be displayed on the screen of the information terminal 7311 or the information terminal 7411.
  • the display on the display unit 7000 can be switched by operating the information terminal 7311 or the information terminal 7411.
  • digital signage 7300 or digital signage 7400 run a game using the screen of the information terminal 7311 or information terminal 7411 as the operating means (controller). This allows an unspecified number of users to simultaneously participate in and enjoy the game.
  • a display panel of one embodiment of the present invention can be applied to the display portion 7000.
  • the electronic device shown in Figures 23A to 23G has a housing 9000, a display unit 9001, a speaker 9003, operation keys 9005 (including a power switch or an operation switch), a connection terminal 9006, a sensor 9007 (including the function of sensing, detecting, or measuring force, displacement, position, speed, acceleration, angular velocity, rotation speed, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemical substance, sound, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration, odor, or infrared light), a microphone 9008, etc.
  • the electronic devices shown in Figures 23A to 23G have various functions. For example, they may have a function to display various information (still images, videos, text images, etc.) on the display unit, a touch panel function, a function to display a calendar, date or time, etc., a function to control processing using various software (programs), a wireless communication function, a function to read and process programs or data recorded on a recording medium, etc.
  • the functions of the electronic devices are not limited to these, and they may have a variety of functions.
  • the electronic devices may have multiple display units. They may also have a function to include a camera or the like to capture still images or videos and save them on a recording medium (external or built into the camera), and a function to display the captured images on the display unit.
  • Figure 23A is a perspective view showing a mobile information terminal 9101.
  • the mobile information terminal 9101 can be used as a smartphone, for example.
  • the mobile information terminal 9101 may be provided with a speaker 9003, a connection terminal 9006, a sensor 9007, and the like.
  • the mobile information terminal 9101 can also display text and image information on multiple surfaces.
  • Figure 23A shows an example in which three icons 9050 are displayed.
  • Information 9051 indicated by a dashed rectangle, can also be displayed on another surface of the display unit 9001. Examples of the information 9051 include notifications of incoming emails, SNS messages, phone calls, etc., the title of the email or SNS message, the sender's name, the date and time, the remaining battery level, and signal strength.
  • an icon 9050 or the like may be displayed in the position where the information 9051 is displayed.
  • Figure 23B is a perspective view showing the mobile information terminal 9102.
  • the mobile information terminal 9102 has the function of displaying information on three or more sides of the display unit 9001.
  • information 9052, information 9053, and information 9054 are displayed on different sides.
  • a user can check information 9053 displayed in a position that can be observed from above the mobile information terminal 9102 while the mobile information terminal 9102 is stored in a breast pocket of clothes. The user can check the display without taking the mobile information terminal 9102 out of their pocket and decide, for example, whether to answer a call.
  • FIG 23C is a perspective view showing a tablet terminal 9103.
  • the tablet terminal 9103 is capable of executing various applications, such as mobile phone calls, e-mail, document browsing and creation, music playback, internet communication, and computer games.
  • the tablet terminal 9103 has a display unit 9001, a camera 9002, a microphone 9008, and a speaker 9003 on the front of the housing 9000, operation keys 9005 as operation buttons on the left side of the housing 9000, and a connection terminal 9006 on the bottom.
  • FIG 23D is a perspective view showing a wristwatch-type mobile information terminal 9200.
  • the mobile information terminal 9200 can be used, for example, as a smart watch (registered trademark).
  • the display surface of the display unit 9001 is curved, allowing display along the curved display surface.
  • the mobile information terminal 9200 can also perform hands-free conversations by communicating with, for example, a wirelessly capable headset.
  • the mobile information terminal 9200 can also perform data transmission and charging with other information terminals via the connection terminal 9006. Charging may be performed by wireless power supply.
  • Figures 23E to 23G are perspective views showing a foldable mobile information terminal 9201.
  • Figure 23E is a perspective view of the mobile information terminal 9201 in an unfolded state
  • Figure 23G is a folded state
  • Figure 23F is a perspective view of a state in the process of changing from one of Figures 23E and 23G to the other.
  • the mobile information terminal 9201 is highly portable when folded, and has a seamless, wide display area when unfolded, allowing for excellent display visibility.
  • the display unit 9001 of the mobile information terminal 9201 is supported by three housings 9000 connected by hinges 9055.
  • the display unit 9001 can be bent with a curvature radius of 0.1 mm or more and 150 mm or less.
  • This embodiment can be implemented by appropriately combining at least a portion of it with other embodiments described in this specification.
  • the semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention can be used for, for example, electronic components, electronic devices, mainframes, space equipment, and data centers (also referred to as data centers (DCs)).
  • the electronic components, electronic devices, mainframes, space equipment, and data centers using the semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention are effective in achieving high performance, such as low power consumption.
  • An electronic component or the like to which a semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention is applied can be applied to the electronic devices exemplified in Embodiment 6.
  • FIG. 24A shows a perspective view of a substrate (mounting substrate 704) on which electronic component 700 is mounted.
  • Electronic component 700 shown in FIG. 24A has a semiconductor device 710 inside a mold 711.
  • FIG. 24A omits some parts to show the interior of electronic component 700.
  • Electronic component 700 has lands 712 on the outside of mold 711. Lands 712 are electrically connected to electrode pads 713, and electrode pads 713 are electrically connected to semiconductor device 710 via wires 714.
  • Electronic component 700 is mounted on, for example, a printed circuit board 702. A plurality of such electronic components are combined and electrically connected on printed circuit board 702 to complete mounting substrate 704.
  • Semiconductor device 710 also has a drive circuit layer 715 and a memory layer 716.
  • the memory layer 716 is configured with multiple memory cell arrays stacked on top of each other.
  • the stacked configuration of drive circuit layer 715 and memory layer 716 can be a monolithic stacked configuration.
  • a monolithic stacked configuration allows connections between the layers without using through-electrode technology such as TSV (Through Silicon Via) or bonding technology such as Cu-Cu direct bonding.
  • TSV Through Silicon Via
  • bonding technology such as Cu-Cu direct bonding.
  • connection wiring can be reduced compared to technologies that use through electrodes such as TSVs, making it possible to increase the number of connection pins.
  • Increasing the number of connection pins enables parallel operation, making it possible to improve the memory bandwidth (also known as memory bandwidth).
  • the multiple memory cell arrays included in the memory layer 716 are formed using OS transistors and that the multiple memory cell arrays are monolithically stacked.
  • OS transistors By configuring the multiple memory cell arrays as a monolithic stack, it is possible to improve either or both of the memory bandwidth and the memory access latency.
  • the bandwidth is the amount of data transferred per unit time
  • the access latency is the time from access to the start of data exchange.
  • Si transistors when Si transistors are used for the memory layer 716, it is more difficult to achieve a monolithic stack configuration than OS transistors. Therefore, it can be said that OS transistors have a superior structure to Si transistors in a monolithic stack configuration.
  • Semiconductor device 710 may also be referred to as a die.
  • a die refers to a chip piece obtained during the semiconductor chip manufacturing process by forming a circuit pattern on, for example, a disk-shaped substrate (also called a wafer) and dicing it into cubes.
  • Semiconductor materials that can be used for the die include, for example, silicon (Si), silicon carbide (SiC), or gallium nitride (GaN).
  • Si silicon
  • SiC silicon carbide
  • GaN gallium nitride
  • a die obtained from a silicon substrate also called a silicon wafer
  • a silicon die obtained from a silicon substrate (also called a silicon wafer) may be called a silicon die.
  • Figure 24B shows a perspective view of electronic component 730.
  • Electronic component 730 is an example of a SiP (System in Package) or MCM (Multi-Chip Module).
  • Electronic component 730 has an interposer 731 provided on a package substrate 732 (printed circuit board), and a semiconductor device 735 and multiple semiconductor devices 710 provided on interposer 731.
  • Electronic component 730 shows an example in which semiconductor device 710 is used as a high bandwidth memory (HBM).
  • Semiconductor device 735 can also be used in integrated circuits such as a CPU (Central Processing Unit), GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), or FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array).
  • CPU Central Processing Unit
  • GPU Graphics Processing Unit
  • FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
  • the package substrate 732 can be, for example, a ceramic substrate, a plastic substrate, or a glass epoxy substrate.
  • the interposer 731 can be, for example, a silicon interposer or a resin interposer.
  • the interposer 731 has multiple wirings and functions to electrically connect multiple integrated circuits with different terminal pitches.
  • the multiple wirings are provided in a single layer or multiple layers.
  • the interposer 731 also functions to electrically connect the integrated circuits provided on the interposer 731 to electrodes provided on the package substrate 732.
  • the interposer is sometimes called a "rewiring substrate” or "intermediate substrate.”
  • through electrodes may be provided in the interposer 731, and the integrated circuits and package substrate 732 may be electrically connected using these through electrodes.
  • TSVs may also be used as through electrodes.
  • SiPs and MCMs that use silicon interposers that use silicon interposers, a decrease in reliability due to differences in the coefficient of expansion between the integrated circuit and the interposer is less likely. Furthermore, because the surface of a silicon interposer is highly flat, poor connections between the integrated circuit mounted on the silicon interposer and the silicon interposer are less likely to occur. It is particularly preferable to use silicon interposers in 2.5D packages (2.5-dimensional packaging), in which multiple integrated circuits are arranged horizontally on an interposer.
  • a monolithic stacked configuration using OS transistors is preferable.
  • a composite structure may also be used that combines a memory cell array stacked using TSVs with a monolithic stacked memory cell array.
  • a heat sink may also be provided overlapping the electronic component 730.
  • a heat sink it is preferable to align the height of the integrated circuit provided on the interposer 731.
  • the electronic component 730 shown in this embodiment it is preferable to align the height of the semiconductor device 710 and the semiconductor device 735.
  • Electronic component 730 can be mounted on other substrates using various mounting methods, not limited to BGA and PGA.
  • mounting methods include SPGA (Staggered Pin Grid Array), LGA (Land Grid Array), QFP (Quad Flat Package), QFJ (Quad Flat J-leaded package), and QFN (Quad Flat Non-leaded package).
  • [Large computer] 25A shows a perspective view of a mainframe computer 5600.
  • the mainframe computer 5600 has a rack 5610 housing a plurality of rack-mounted computers 5620.
  • the mainframe computer 5600 may also be called a supercomputer.
  • Figure 25B shows a perspective view of an example of a computer 5620.
  • Computer 5620 has a motherboard 5630.
  • Motherboard 5630 has multiple slots 5631 and multiple connection terminals.
  • a PC card 5621 is inserted into slot 5631.
  • PC card 5621 has connection terminals 5623, 5624, and 5625, each of which is connected to motherboard 5630.
  • FIG 25C shows an example of a PC card 5621.
  • PC card 5621 is a processing board equipped with, for example, a CPU, GPU, and storage device.
  • PC card 5621 has board 5622 and connection terminals 5623, 5624, 5625, electronic components 5626, 5627, 5628, and 5629 mounted on board 5622. Note that Figure 25C also shows components other than electronic components 5626, 5627, and 5628.
  • connection terminal 5629 has a shape that allows it to be inserted into the slot 5631 of the motherboard 5630, and functions as an interface for connecting the PC card 5621 and the motherboard 5630.
  • the connection terminal 5629 may conform to, for example, PCIe.
  • Connection terminals 5623, 5624, and 5625 can be, for example, interfaces for supplying power to PC card 5621, inputting signals, etc. They can also be, for example, interfaces for outputting signals calculated by PC card 5621.
  • Examples of standards for connection terminals 5623, 5624, and 5625 include USB (Universal Serial Bus), SATA (Serial ATA), and SCSI (Small Computer System Interface).
  • Examples of standards for each include HDMI (registered trademark).
  • Electronic component 5626 has terminals (not shown) for inputting and outputting signals, and by inserting these terminals into sockets (not shown) provided on board 5622, electronic component 5626 and board 5622 can be electrically connected.
  • Electronic component 5627 and electronic component 5628 have multiple terminals, and can be mounted to wiring on board 5622 by, for example, reflow soldering the terminals.
  • Examples of electronic component 5627 include FPGAs, GPUs, and CPUs.
  • Electronic component 5627 can be, for example, electronic component 730.
  • Electronic component 5628 can be, for example, a memory device.
  • Electronic component 5628 can be, for example, electronic component 700.
  • the mainframe computer 5600 can also function as a parallel computer. By using the mainframe computer 5600 as a parallel computer, it is possible to perform large-scale calculations required for artificial intelligence learning and inference, for example.
  • This embodiment can be implemented by appropriately combining at least a portion of it with other embodiments described in this specification.
  • a single-crystal oxide semiconductor film was formed on a single-crystal substrate, and its cross section was observed.
  • a single-crystal YSZ substrate was used as the single-crystal substrate.
  • Two types of substrates were used here: one with a (111) surface and one with a (100) surface.
  • An indium oxide film was used as the oxide semiconductor film.
  • an indium oxide film approximately 5 nm thick was deposited on a YSZ substrate using the ALD method.
  • the film was deposited using triethylindium as the precursor and ozone as the oxidizing agent at a substrate temperature of 200°C.
  • Figure 26A shows a cross-sectional image of a YSZ substrate with a (111) plane and an indium oxide film ( denoted as In2O3 ) formed thereon. It can be seen that the indium oxide film is also crystallized, reflecting the crystal lattice of the YSZ substrate. The crystal orientations of the YSZ substrate and the indium oxide film are shown on the right side of the figure. The cross-sectional image confirms that the crystal orientations of the YSZ substrate and the indium oxide film are consistent.
  • a low-contrast layer (referred to as a buffer layer) was confirmed between the YSZ substrate and the indium oxide film.
  • Figure 26B shows an enlarged view of a portion of Figure 26A. It can be seen that the buffer layer is a two-atom layer. Since the HAADF-STEM method superimposes information not only from the sample surface but also from the depth direction, the buffer layer is observed to have a dark contrast, suggesting the presence of sites where no atoms are present. In other words, the buffer layer can be considered a region with a lower density than other regions.
  • Figure 26B shows the interatomic distances of the YSZ substrate and the indium oxide film as numerical values.
  • the interatomic distances were averaged over 100 periods within the observation range.
  • the interatomic distances in the YSZ substrate were 0.313 nm in the in-plane direction and 0.300 nm in the thickness direction, which are similar to values for an ideal YSZ single crystal.
  • the interatomic distances in the indium oxide film were 0.313 nm in the in-plane direction and 0.291 nm in the thickness direction.
  • the in-plane direction was larger than that of an ideal single crystal. Therefore, it can be seen that, at least within the range observed in this example, the crystal structure of the indium oxide film was distorted only in the in-plane direction.
  • Figure 27A shows a cross-sectional image of a YSZ substrate with a (100) surface and an indium oxide film formed thereon.
  • Figure 27B shows an enlarged view of the same. It can be seen that even when the substrate surface is different, indium oxide with good crystallinity is obtained.
  • the interatomic distance in the YSZ substrate was 0.364 nm in the in-plane direction and 0.258 nm in the thickness direction, which was comparable to that of an ideal single crystal.
  • the interatomic distance in the indium oxide film was 0.364 nm in the in-plane direction and 0.252 nm in the thickness direction. While the thickness direction was comparable to that of an ideal indium oxide single crystal, the in-plane direction was larger. In other words, just as when the substrate surface was a (111) plane, compared to ideal indium oxide single crystal, the indium oxide film was distorted so that the interatomic distance increased in the in-plane direction, but there was almost no distortion in the thickness direction.
  • the buffer layer it is two atomic layers thick when the substrate surface is (111), but one atomic layer thick when the substrate surface is (100). This shows that the amount of stress applied to the indium oxide film to be formed varies depending on the crystal orientation of the substrate, and that this difference is related to the number of layers in the buffer layer.
  • a single-crystal oxide semiconductor film can be formed by epitaxially growing an oxide semiconductor film on a single-crystal substrate. It also confirmed that a low-density buffer layer can be formed between the single-crystal substrate and the single-crystal oxide semiconductor film. It was also found that the crystal structure of the single-crystal oxide semiconductor film is distorted to the same extent as the substrate in the in-plane direction to alleviate lattice mismatch with the substrate, but the distortion in the thickness direction is small.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Geometry (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Thin Film Transistor (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention provides a semiconductor device that uses a high-quality semiconductor film. The present invention provides a high-performance semiconductor device. The semiconductor device comprises first and second transistors, first and second insulation layers, and first and second single crystal substrates. In the first transistor, a channel is formed in a first single crystal semiconductor of the first single crystal substrate. The second transistor is positioned above the first transistor. In the second transistor, a channel is formed in a second single crystal semiconductor that contacts the first single crystal substrate. The second single crystal substrate is positioned above the second transistor. The first insulation layer is positioned between the first transistor and the second transistor. The second insulation layer is positioned between the first insulation layer and the second transistor and has a first joining surface that contacts the first insulation layer. The first single crystal semiconductor contains silicon, and the second single crystal semiconductor contains a metal oxide.

Description

半導体装置、及びその作製方法Semiconductor device and manufacturing method thereof

 本発明の一態様は、半導体装置、記憶装置、表示装置、及び電子機器に関する。 One aspect of the present invention relates to a semiconductor device, a memory device, a display device, and an electronic device.

 なお、本発明の一態様は、上記の技術分野に限定されない。本明細書等で開示する本発明の一態様の技術分野としては、半導体装置、表示装置、発光装置、蓄電装置、記憶装置、電子機器、照明装置、入力装置、入出力装置、それらの駆動方法、又はそれらの製造方法、を一例として挙げることができる。半導体装置は、半導体特性を利用することで機能しうる装置全般を指す。 Note that one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to the above technical field. Examples of technical fields of one embodiment of the present invention disclosed in this specification and the like include semiconductor devices, display devices, light-emitting devices, power storage devices, memory devices, electronic devices, lighting devices, input devices, input/output devices, driving methods thereof, and manufacturing methods thereof. A semiconductor device refers to any device that can function by utilizing semiconductor characteristics.

 近年、半導体装置の開発が進められ、LSI、CPU、メモリなどに主に半導体装置が用いられている。CPUは、半導体ウェハを加工し、チップ化された半導体集積回路(少なくともトランジスタ及びメモリ)を有し、接続端子である電極が形成された半導体素子の集合体である。 In recent years, semiconductor devices have been developed, and are now primarily used in LSIs, CPUs, and memory. A CPU is a collection of semiconductor elements processed from a semiconductor wafer and containing chipped semiconductor integrated circuits (at least transistors and memory), with electrodes serving as connection terminals.

 LSI、CPU、メモリなどの半導体回路(ICチップ)は、回路基板、例えばプリント配線基板に実装され、様々な電子機器の部品の一つとして用いられる。 Semiconductor circuits (IC chips) such as LSIs, CPUs, and memories are mounted on circuit boards, such as printed wiring boards, and are used as components in a variety of electronic devices.

 また、絶縁表面を有する基板上に形成された半導体薄膜を用いてトランジスタを構成する技術が注目されている。当該トランジスタは集積回路、画像表示装置(単に表示装置とも表記する)のような電子デバイスに広く応用されている。トランジスタに適用可能な半導体薄膜としてシリコン系半導体材料が広く知られているが、それ以外の材料として酸化物半導体が注目されている。 In addition, technology that constructs transistors using semiconductor thin films formed on substrates with insulating surfaces is attracting attention. Such transistors are widely used in electronic devices such as integrated circuits and image display devices (also simply referred to as display devices). Silicon-based semiconductor materials are widely known as semiconductor thin films that can be used in transistors, but oxide semiconductors are also attracting attention as other materials.

 酸化物半導体を用いたトランジスタは、非導通状態において極めてリーク電流が小さいことが知られている。例えば、特許文献1には、酸化物半導体を用いたトランジスタのリーク電流が小さいという特性を応用した低消費電力のCPUなどが開示されている。また、特許文献2には、酸化物半導体を用い、長期にわたり記憶内容を保持できる記憶装置などが開示されている。 Transistors using oxide semiconductors are known to have extremely low leakage current when they are off. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a low-power CPU that utilizes the low leakage current characteristic of transistors using oxide semiconductors. Furthermore, Patent Document 2 discloses a memory device that uses an oxide semiconductor and can retain stored data for a long period of time.

 また、非特許文献1では、高いホール(Hall)移動度を示す多結晶の酸化インジウム膜と、それを用いたトランジスタが報告されている。 Furthermore, Non-Patent Document 1 reports a polycrystalline indium oxide film that exhibits high hole mobility and a transistor using it.

特開2012−257187号公報JP 2012-257187 A 特開2011−151383号公報JP 2011-151383 A

Y.Magari et al.,”High−mobility hydrogenated polycrystalline In▲2▼O▲3▼(In▲2▼O▲3▼:H)thin−film transistors“,Nature Communications 13,1078,(2022).Y. Magari et al. ,”High-mobility hydrogenated polycrystalline In▲2▼O▲3▼(In▲2▼O▲3 ▼:H) thin-film transistors”, Nature Communications 13, 1078, (2022).

 本発明の一態様は、高品質な半導体膜を用いた半導体装置を提供することを課題の一とする。または、単結晶酸化物半導体膜を用いた半導体装置を提供することを課題の一とする。または、高性能な半導体装置を提供することを課題の一とする。または、良好な電気特性を有する半導体装置を提供することを課題の一とする。または、信頼性の高い半導体装置を提供することを課題の一とする。または、高集積化が容易な半導体装置を提供することを課題の一とする。または、低消費電力な半導体装置を提供することを課題の一とする。 An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a semiconductor device using a high-quality semiconductor film. Another object is to provide a semiconductor device using a single-crystal oxide semiconductor film. Another object is to provide a high-performance semiconductor device. Another object is to provide a semiconductor device with favorable electrical characteristics. Another object is to provide a highly reliable semiconductor device. Another object is to provide a semiconductor device that can be easily highly integrated. Another object is to provide a semiconductor device with low power consumption.

 本発明の一態様は、新規な構成を有する半導体装置を提供することを課題の一とする。本発明の一態様は、先行技術の問題点の少なくとも一を、少なくとも軽減することを課題の一とする。 An object of one aspect of the present invention is to provide a semiconductor device having a novel structure. An object of one aspect of the present invention is to alleviate at least one of the problems of the prior art.

 なお、これらの課題の記載は、他の課題の存在を妨げるものではない。なお、本発明の一態様は、これらの課題の全てを解決する必要はないものとする。なお、これら以外の課題は、明細書、図面、請求項などの記載から抽出することが可能である。 Note that the description of these problems does not preclude the existence of other problems. It is not necessary for one embodiment of the present invention to solve all of these problems. It is possible to extract problems other than these from the description in the specification, drawings, claims, etc.

 本発明の一態様は、第1のトランジスタと、第2のトランジスタと、第1の絶縁層と、第2の絶縁層と、第1の単結晶基板と、第2の単結晶基板と、を有する半導体装置である。第1のトランジスタは第1の単結晶基板が有する第1の単結晶半導体にチャネルが形成される。第2のトランジスタは第1のトランジスタの上方に位置し、且つ、第2の単結晶基板と接する第2の単結晶半導体にチャネルが形成される。第2の単結晶基板は第2のトランジスタの上方に位置する。第1の絶縁層は第1のトランジスタと第2のトランジスタとの間に位置する。第2の絶縁層は第1の絶縁層と第2のトランジスタとの間に位置し、且つ、第1の絶縁層と接する第1の接合面を有する。第1の単結晶半導体はシリコンを有する。第2の単結晶半導体は金属酸化物を有する。 One embodiment of the present invention is a semiconductor device including a first transistor, a second transistor, a first insulating layer, a second insulating layer, a first single crystal substrate, and a second single crystal substrate. The first transistor has a channel formed in a first single crystal semiconductor included in the first single crystal substrate. The second transistor is located above the first transistor and has a channel formed in a second single crystal semiconductor in contact with the second single crystal substrate. The second single crystal substrate is located above the second transistor. The first insulating layer is located between the first transistor and the second transistor. The second insulating layer is located between the first insulating layer and the second transistor and has a first junction surface in contact with the first insulating layer. The first single crystal semiconductor contains silicon. The second single crystal semiconductor contains metal oxide.

 また、上記において、第2の単結晶基板は立方晶系の結晶構造を有し、第2の単結晶半導体は立方晶系の結晶構造を有することが好ましい。 Furthermore, in the above, it is preferable that the second single crystal substrate has a cubic crystal structure, and the second single crystal semiconductor has a cubic crystal structure.

 また、上記において、第2の単結晶基板はイットリウム及びジルコニウムを含む酸化物を有し、第2の単結晶半導体は酸化インジウムを有することが好ましい。 Furthermore, in the above, it is preferable that the second single crystal substrate has an oxide containing yttrium and zirconium, and the second single crystal semiconductor has indium oxide.

 また、上記において、第2の単結晶半導体は第2の単結晶基板に対して、格子不整合度が−5%以上5%以下であることが好ましい。 Furthermore, in the above, it is preferable that the lattice mismatch of the second single crystal semiconductor with respect to the second single crystal substrate is between -5% and 5%.

 また、上記において、さらに第1の導電層と、第2の導電層と、を有することが好ましい。このとき、第1の導電層は第1のトランジスタのソース電極及びドレイン電極の一方と接続され、且つ、第1の絶縁層に埋め込まれていることが好ましい。また、第2の導電層は、第2のトランジスタのソース電極及びドレイン電極の一方と接続され、第2の絶縁層に埋め込まれており、且つ、第1の導電層と接する第2の接合面を有することが好ましい。 Furthermore, in the above, it is preferable that the semiconductor device further comprises a first conductive layer and a second conductive layer. In this case, it is preferable that the first conductive layer is connected to one of the source electrode and drain electrode of the first transistor and is embedded in the first insulating layer. Furthermore, it is preferable that the second conductive layer is connected to one of the source electrode and drain electrode of the second transistor, is embedded in the second insulating layer, and has a second junction surface in contact with the first conductive layer.

 また、本発明の他の一態様は、半導体装置の作製方法であって、第1のトランジスタと、第1のトランジスタ上に第1の絶縁層と、が設けられ、第1の単結晶半導体を含む第1の単結晶基板を準備する工程と、第2の単結晶基板を準備する工程と、第2の単結晶基板上に第2の単結晶半導体を含む半導体膜を形成する工程と、半導体膜を島状に加工して半導体層を形成する工程と、半導体層上にゲート絶縁層、ゲート電極、ソース電極及びドレイン電極を形成し、第2のトランジスタを作製する工程と、第2のトランジスタ上に第2の絶縁層を形成する工程と、第1の絶縁層の上面と第2の絶縁層の上面とを接合する工程と、を有する。 Another aspect of the present invention is a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device, which includes a first transistor and a first insulating layer over the first transistor, and includes the steps of: preparing a first single crystal substrate including a first single crystal semiconductor; preparing a second single crystal substrate; forming a semiconductor film including the second single crystal semiconductor over the second single crystal substrate; processing the semiconductor film into an island shape to form a semiconductor layer; forming a gate insulating layer, a gate electrode, a source electrode, and a drain electrode over the semiconductor layer to manufacture a second transistor; forming a second insulating layer over the second transistor; and bonding an upper surface of the first insulating layer to an upper surface of the second insulating layer.

 また、上記において、第1の単結晶半導体はシリコンを含み、第2の単結晶半導体は金属酸化物を含むことが好ましい。 Furthermore, in the above, it is preferable that the first single crystal semiconductor contains silicon and the second single crystal semiconductor contains metal oxide.

 また、上記において、第2の単結晶基板は立方晶系の結晶構造を有し、第2の単結晶半導体は立方晶系の結晶構造を有することが好ましい。 Furthermore, in the above, it is preferable that the second single crystal substrate has a cubic crystal structure, and the second single crystal semiconductor has a cubic crystal structure.

 また、上記において、第2の単結晶基板はイットリウム及びジルコニウムを含む酸化物を有し、第2の単結晶半導体は酸化インジウムを有することが好ましい。 Furthermore, in the above, it is preferable that the second single crystal substrate has an oxide containing yttrium and zirconium, and the second single crystal semiconductor has indium oxide.

 また、上記において、第2の単結晶半導体は、第2の単結晶基板に対して、格子不整合度が−5%以上5%以下であることが好ましい。 Furthermore, in the above, it is preferable that the lattice mismatch of the second single crystal semiconductor with respect to the second single crystal substrate is between -5% and 5%.

 本発明の一態様によれば、高品質な半導体膜を用いた半導体装置を提供できる。または、単結晶酸化物半導体膜を用いた半導体装置を提供できる。または、高性能な半導体装置を提供できる。または、良好な電気特性を有する半導体装置を提供できる。または、信頼性の高い半導体装置を提供できる。または、高集積化が容易な半導体装置を提供できる。または、低消費電力な半導体装置を提供できる。 According to one embodiment of the present invention, a semiconductor device using a high-quality semiconductor film can be provided. Alternatively, a semiconductor device using a single-crystal oxide semiconductor film can be provided. Alternatively, a high-performance semiconductor device can be provided. Alternatively, a semiconductor device having favorable electrical characteristics can be provided. Alternatively, a highly reliable semiconductor device can be provided. Alternatively, a semiconductor device that can be easily highly integrated can be provided. Alternatively, a low-power semiconductor device can be provided.

 本発明の一態様によれば、新規な構成を有する半導体装置を提供できる。本発明の一態様によれば、先行技術の問題点の少なくとも一を、少なくとも軽減できる。 According to one aspect of the present invention, a semiconductor device having a novel configuration can be provided. According to one aspect of the present invention, at least one of the problems of the prior art can be at least alleviated.

 なお、これらの効果の記載は、他の効果の存在を妨げるものではない。なお、本発明の一態様は、必ずしも、これらの効果の全てを有する必要はない。なお、これら以外の効果は、明細書、図面、請求項などの記載から抽出することが可能である。 Note that the description of these effects does not preclude the existence of other effects. One embodiment of the present invention does not necessarily have to have all of these effects. Note that other effects can be extracted from the description in the specification, drawings, claims, etc.

図1A乃至図1Iは、半導体装置の作製方法を説明する図である。
図2A乃至図2Dは、半導体装置の作製方法を説明する図である。
図3A及び図3Bは、接合面近傍を説明する模式図である。
図4A及び図4Bは、接合面近傍を説明する模式図である。
図5A乃至図5Eは、半導体装置の作製方法を説明する図である。
図6A乃至図6Dは、半導体装置の構成例である。
図7は、半導体装置の構成例である。
図8は、半導体装置の構成例である。
図9A乃至図9Dは、半導体装置の構成例である。
図10A乃至図10Dは、半導体装置の構成例である。
図11A1乃至図11D2は、半導体装置の作製方法を説明する図である。
図12A1乃至図12C2は、半導体装置の作製方法を説明する図である。
図13は、記憶装置の構成例である。
図14A及び図14Bは、記憶装置の構成例である。
図15A乃至図15Dは、記憶装置の構成例である。
図16は、記憶装置の構成例である。
図17A及び図17Bは、表示装置の構成例である。
図18は、表示装置の構成例である。
図19A乃至図19Cは、表示装置の構成例である。
図20A及び図20Bは、表示装置の構成例である。
図21A乃至図21Dは、電子機器の構成例である。
図22A乃至図22Fは、電子機器の構成例である。
図23A乃至図23Gは、電子機器の構成例である。
図24A及び図24Bは、電子部品の構成例である。
図25A乃至図25Cは、大型計算機の構成例である。
図26A及び図26Bは、実施例にかかる断面像である。
図27A及び図27Bは、実施例にかかる断面像である。
1A to 1I are diagrams illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device.
2A to 2D are diagrams illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device.
3A and 3B are schematic diagrams illustrating the vicinity of the bonding surface.
4A and 4B are schematic diagrams illustrating the vicinity of the bonding surface.
5A to 5E are diagrams illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device.
6A to 6D show examples of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
FIG. 8 shows an example of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
9A to 9D show examples of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
10A to 10D show examples of the configuration of a semiconductor device.
11A1 to 11D2 are diagrams illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device.
12A1 to 12C2 are diagrams illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device.
FIG. 13 shows an example of the configuration of a storage device.
14A and 14B show examples of the configuration of a storage device.
15A to 15D show examples of the configuration of a storage device.
FIG. 16 shows an example of the configuration of a storage device.
17A and 17B show examples of the configuration of a display device.
FIG. 18 shows an example of the configuration of a display device.
19A to 19C show examples of the configuration of a display device.
20A and 20B show examples of the configuration of a display device.
21A to 21D show configuration examples of electronic devices.
22A to 22F show configuration examples of electronic devices.
23A to 23G show configuration examples of electronic devices.
24A and 24B show examples of the configuration of electronic components.
25A to 25C show examples of the configuration of a mainframe computer.
26A and 26B are cross-sectional images according to an embodiment.
27A and 27B are cross-sectional images according to an embodiment.

 以下、実施の形態について図面を参照しながら説明する。ただし、実施の形態は多くの異なる態様で実施することが可能であり、趣旨及びその範囲から逸脱することなくその形態及び詳細を様々に変更し得ることは当業者であれば容易に理解される。従って、本発明は、以下の実施の形態の記載内容に限定して解釈されるものではない。 The following describes embodiments with reference to the drawings. However, those skilled in the art will readily understand that the embodiments can be implemented in many different ways, and that various changes in form and details can be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention. Therefore, the present invention should not be interpreted as being limited to the description of the following embodiments.

 なお、以下に説明する発明の構成において、同一部分又は同様な機能を有する部分には同一の符号を異なる図面間で共通して用い、その繰り返しの説明は省略する。また、同様の機能を指す場合には、ハッチングパターンを同じくし、特に符号を付さない場合がある。 In the configuration of the invention described below, the same parts or parts with similar functions will be denoted by the same reference numerals in different drawings, and repeated explanations will be omitted. Furthermore, when referring to similar functions, the same hatching pattern may be used and no particular reference numeral may be assigned.

 なお、本明細書で説明する各図において、各構成要素の大きさ、層の厚さ、または領域は、明瞭化のために誇張されている場合がある。よって、必ずしもそのスケールに限定されない。 Note that in the figures described in this specification, the size of each component, layer thickness, or area may be exaggerated for clarity. Therefore, they are not necessarily limited to that scale.

 なお、本明細書等における「第1」、「第2」等の序数詞は、構成要素の混同を避けるために付すものであり、数的に限定するものではない。 In addition, ordinal numbers such as "first" and "second" used in this specification are used to avoid confusion between components and do not imply any numerical limitation.

 トランジスタは半導体素子の一種であり、電流または電圧を増幅する機能、及び、導通または非導通を制御するスイッチング動作などを実現することができる。本明細書におけるトランジスタは、IGFET(Insulated Gate Field Effect Transistor)及び薄膜トランジスタ(TFT:Thin Film Transistor)を含む。 A transistor is a type of semiconductor element that can perform functions such as amplifying current or voltage, and switching to control conduction or non-conduction. In this specification, the term "transistor" includes IGFETs (Insulated Gate Field Effect Transistors) and thin film transistors (TFTs).

 また、「ソース」と「ドレイン」の機能は、異なる極性のトランジスタを採用する場合、または回路動作において電流の方向が変化する場合などには入れ替わることがある。このため、本明細書においては、「ソース」と「ドレイン」の用語は、入れ替えて用いることができるものとする。 Furthermore, the functions of "source" and "drain" may be interchangeable when transistors of different polarities are used, or when the direction of current changes during circuit operation. For this reason, in this specification, the terms "source" and "drain" may be used interchangeably.

 また、本明細書等において、「電気的に接続」には、「何らかの電気的作用を有するもの」を介して接続されている場合が含まれる。ここで、「何らかの電気的作用を有するもの」は、接続対象間での電気信号の授受を可能とするものであれば、特に制限を受けない。例えば、「何らかの電気的作用を有するもの」には、電極または配線をはじめ、トランジスタなどのスイッチング素子、抵抗素子、コイル、その他の各種機能を有する素子などが含まれる。 Furthermore, in this specification, "electrically connected" includes connection via "something that has some kind of electrical function." Here, "something that has some kind of electrical function" is not particularly limited as long as it allows for the exchange of electrical signals between the connected objects. For example, "something that has some kind of electrical function" includes electrodes or wiring, as well as switching elements such as transistors, resistive elements, coils, and other elements with various functions.

 なお本明細書等において、容量素子の誘電体、トランジスタのゲート絶縁膜、層間絶縁膜など、絶縁体を介して2つのノードが接続される場合は、「電気的接続」には含まないものとする。 In this specification, when two nodes are connected via an insulator, such as the dielectric of a capacitive element, the gate insulating film of a transistor, or an interlayer insulating film, this is not considered to be an "electrical connection."

 なお、本明細書等において「上面形状が概略一致」とは、積層した層と層との間で少なくとも輪郭の一部が重なることをいう。例えば、上層と下層とが、同一のマスクパターン、または一部が同一のマスクパターンにより加工された場合を含む。ただし、厳密には輪郭が重なり合わず、上層が下層の内側に位置すること、または上層が下層の外側に位置することもあり、この場合も「上面形状が概略一致」という場合がある。 In this specification, "top surface shapes that roughly match" means that at least a portion of the contours of stacked layers overlap. For example, this includes cases where the upper and lower layers are processed using the same mask pattern, or where only a portion of the mask pattern is the same. However, strictly speaking, the contours may not overlap, and the upper layer may be located inside the lower layer, or outside the lower layer; in these cases, the term "top surface shapes that roughly match" may also be used.

 なお、本明細書等において、ある構成要素の上面形状とは、その平面視における当該構成要素の輪郭形状のことを言う。また平面視とは、当該構成要素の被形成面、または当該構成要素が形成される支持体(例えば基板)の表面の法線方向から見ることを言う。 In this specification, the top surface shape of a certain component refers to the contour shape of that component when viewed from a plan view. Furthermore, a plan view refers to a view from the normal direction of the surface on which the component is formed, or the surface of the support (e.g., substrate) on which the component is formed.

 なお、以下では「上」、「下」などの向きを示す表現は、基本的には図面の向きと合わせて用いるものとする。しかしながら、説明を容易にするためなどの目的で、明細書中の「上」または「下」が意味する向きが、図面とは一致しない場合がある。一例としては、積層体等の積層順(または形成順)などを説明する場合に、図面において当該積層体が設けられる側の面(被形成面、支持面、接着面、平坦面など)が当該積層体よりも上側に位置していても、被形成面側を下、積層体側を上、などと表現する場合がある。 In the following, expressions indicating directions such as "up" and "down" will generally be used in accordance with the directions in the drawings. However, for purposes such as ease of explanation, the directions indicated by "up" or "down" in the specification may not match those in the drawings. For example, when explaining the stacking order (or formation order) of a laminate, etc., even if the surface on which the laminate is provided (formed surface, support surface, adhesive surface, flat surface, etc.) is located above the laminate in the drawings, the formed surface side may be expressed as "down" and the laminate side as "up."

 また、本明細書等において、「膜」という用語と、「層」という用語とは、互いに入れ替えることが可能である。例えば、「絶縁層」という用語は、「絶縁膜」という用語に相互に交換することが可能な場合がある。 Furthermore, in this specification, the terms "film" and "layer" are interchangeable. For example, the term "insulating layer" may be interchangeable with the term "insulating film."

 また、本明細書等において、特に断りがない場合、オフ電流とは、トランジスタがオフ状態(非導通状態、遮断状態、ともいう)にあるときのドレイン電流をいう。オフ状態とは、特に断りがない場合、nチャネル型トランジスタでは、ゲートとソースの間の電圧Vgsがしきい値電圧Vthよりも低い(pチャネル型トランジスタでは、Vthよりも高い)状態をいう。 Furthermore, in this specification, unless otherwise specified, off-state current refers to the drain current when a transistor is in an off state (also called a non-conducting state or cut-off state). Unless otherwise specified, the off state refers to a state in which the voltage Vgs between the gate and source of an n-channel transistor is lower than the threshold voltage Vth (higher than Vth for a p-channel transistor).

(実施の形態1)
 本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の半導体装置、及びその作製方法について説明する。
(Embodiment 1)
In this embodiment, a semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention and a manufacturing method thereof will be described.

 本発明の一態様は、第1の単結晶基板の一部にチャネルが形成される第1のトランジスタと、その上方に、単結晶の半導体膜にチャネルが形成される第2のトランジスタが積層された構成を有する。第2のトランジスタが有する半導体膜としては、金属酸化物を用いることが好ましい。 One embodiment of the present invention has a structure in which a first transistor whose channel is formed in part of a first single crystal substrate is stacked above the first transistor whose channel is formed in a single crystal semiconductor film. It is preferable to use a metal oxide for the semiconductor film of the second transistor.

 第2のトランジスタに用いる単結晶構造を有する半導体膜は、上記第1の単結晶基板とは別の第2の単結晶基板を母材としたエピタキシャル法により形成することで得ることが好ましい。第2の単結晶基板の結晶構造と、半導体膜の結晶構造とが同じ結晶系であると、これらの間の格子不整合度が小さくなるため、結晶性の良好な半導体膜を得ることができる。なお、両者の結晶構造が異なる場合であっても、エピタキシャル成長する場合にはこの限りではない。 The semiconductor film having a single crystal structure used in the second transistor is preferably obtained by forming it by an epitaxial method using a second single crystal substrate, separate from the first single crystal substrate, as the base material. If the crystal structure of the second single crystal substrate and the crystal structure of the semiconductor film are the same crystal system, the lattice mismatch between them is small, making it possible to obtain a semiconductor film with good crystallinity. Note that even if the crystal structures of the two are different, this does not apply if epitaxial growth is used.

 半導体膜に用いる金属酸化物としては、インジウム、亜鉛、錫などを含む酸化物を用いることが好ましい。特に、結晶化しやすい金属酸化物を用いることが好ましい。例えば、酸化インジウムは低温で結晶化しやすいため、結晶性の良好な単結晶膜を得ることができるため好ましい。また、単結晶または多結晶の酸化インジウムは、極めて高い信頼性を示すため、好ましい。特に、単結晶の酸化インジウム膜とすることが好ましい。例えば多結晶膜では結晶粒界に水素などの不純物が偏在する場合がある。当該水素により半導体膜中にキャリアが生成され、半導体膜中のキャリア濃度が上昇し、それがトランジスタのしきい値電圧の変動の要因となる場合がある。そのため、単結晶の酸化インジウム膜を半導体膜に用いることで、電気特性の極めて良好なトランジスタを実現できる。 As the metal oxide used for the semiconductor film, it is preferable to use an oxide containing indium, zinc, tin, etc. In particular, it is preferable to use a metal oxide that crystallizes easily. For example, indium oxide is preferable because it easily crystallizes at low temperatures and can produce a single-crystal film with good crystallinity. Single-crystal or polycrystalline indium oxide is also preferable because it exhibits extremely high reliability. In particular, a single-crystal indium oxide film is preferable. For example, in a polycrystalline film, impurities such as hydrogen may be unevenly distributed at the grain boundaries. This hydrogen generates carriers in the semiconductor film, increasing the carrier concentration in the semiconductor film, which may cause fluctuations in the threshold voltage of the transistor. Therefore, using a single-crystal indium oxide film for the semiconductor film makes it possible to achieve a transistor with extremely good electrical characteristics.

 例えば、半導体膜として酸化インジウムなどの立方晶系の酸化物膜を用いる場合には、第2の単結晶基板としては、同じ立方晶系の単結晶基板を用いることが好ましい。例えば、YSZ(イットリア安定化ジルコニア)基板、酸化ジルコニウム基板、シリコン基板などの立方晶系の単結晶基板を用いることが好ましい。または、正方晶系の単結晶基板を用いて立方晶系の単結晶構造を有する半導体膜を形成することもできる。なお、目的の半導体膜の結晶構造に応じて、第2の単結晶基板の材料及び結晶構造を適宜選択することができる。例えば、炭化シリコン、窒化ガリウム、酸化ガリウムなどの単結晶基板を用いることもできる。第2の単結晶基板と、目的の半導体膜との結晶構造が異なる場合であっても、これらの間の歪を緩和させるためのバッファ層を設けることにより、エピタキシャル成長させることができる場合もある。 For example, when a cubic oxide film such as indium oxide is used as the semiconductor film, it is preferable to use a single crystal substrate of the same cubic crystal system as the second single crystal substrate. For example, it is preferable to use a cubic single crystal substrate such as a YSZ (yttria-stabilized zirconia) substrate, a zirconium oxide substrate, or a silicon substrate. Alternatively, a semiconductor film having a cubic single crystal structure can be formed using a tetragonal single crystal substrate. The material and crystal structure of the second single crystal substrate can be selected appropriately depending on the crystal structure of the desired semiconductor film. For example, single crystal substrates such as silicon carbide, gallium nitride, and gallium oxide can also be used. Even when the crystal structures of the second single crystal substrate and the desired semiconductor film differ, epitaxial growth may be possible by providing a buffer layer to relieve strain between them.

 また、第2の単結晶基板と、半導体膜とは格子不整合度が小さいほど好ましい。ここで、格子不整合度は、基板上に薄膜をエピタキシャル成長させる場合に、基板の単位格子ベクトルの長さと、薄膜の単位格子ベクトルの長さとの差を、基板の単位格子ベクトルの長さで割った値に相当する。単位格子ベクトルに代えて、格子定数を用いることもできる。例えば基板と薄膜とで同じ結晶構造を有する場合には、格子不整合度として、2つの格子定数の差を基板の格子定数で割った値とすることができる。第2の単結晶基板と、半導体膜との格子不整合度は小さいほど好ましく、例えば−5%以上5%以下、好ましくは−4%以上4%以下、より好ましくは−3%以上3%以下、さらに好ましくは−2%以上2%以下であることが好ましい。ここで、格子不整合度は、薄膜の単位格子ベクトルが基板の単位格子ベクトルよりも大きい場合には正の値を、小さい場合には負の値をとる。なお、上記バッファ層を設ける場合には、当該バッファ層の厚さを厚くすることで、格子不整合度の大きな組み合わせでもエピタキシャル成長が可能な場合がある。その場合、格子不整合度が−5%未満または5%より大きくすることができる。例えば、第2の単結晶基板と半導体膜との間の格子不整合度が、−20%以上20%以下、−15%以上15%以下、または−10%以上10%以下であってもよい。 Furthermore, the smaller the lattice mismatch between the second single crystal substrate and the semiconductor film, the more preferable. Here, the lattice mismatch corresponds to the difference between the length of the unit lattice vector of the substrate and the length of the unit lattice vector of the thin film, divided by the length of the unit lattice vector of the substrate, when a thin film is epitaxially grown on the substrate. The lattice constant can also be used instead of the unit lattice vector. For example, when the substrate and the thin film have the same crystal structure, the lattice mismatch can be the difference between the two lattice constants divided by the lattice constant of the substrate. The smaller the lattice mismatch between the second single crystal substrate and the semiconductor film, the more preferable it is, for example, between -5% and 5%, preferably between -4% and 4%, more preferably between -3% and 3%, and even more preferably between -2% and 2%. Here, the lattice mismatch is positive when the unit lattice vector of the thin film is larger than that of the substrate, and negative when it is smaller. When the buffer layer is provided, increasing the thickness of the buffer layer may enable epitaxial growth even with a combination with a large lattice mismatch. In this case, the lattice mismatch can be less than -5% or greater than 5%. For example, the lattice mismatch between the second single crystal substrate and the semiconductor film may be -20% to 20%, -15% to 15%, or -10% to 10%.

 第1の単結晶基板には、半導体基板を用いることができる。代表的には、単結晶シリコン基板を用いることが好ましい。そのほか、単体元素よりなる半導体基板、化合物半導体基板、単結晶半導体薄膜が形成された絶縁基板を用いることができる。第1の単結晶基板には、当該第1の単結晶基板の一部にチャネルが形成される第1のトランジスタを設けることができる。また第1のトランジスタ上には、第2の単結晶基板との接合面を有する第1の絶縁層を設ける。 A semiconductor substrate can be used for the first single crystal substrate. Typically, a single crystal silicon substrate is preferably used. Alternatively, a semiconductor substrate made of a single element, a compound semiconductor substrate, or an insulating substrate on which a single crystal semiconductor thin film is formed can be used. A first transistor having a channel formed in a part of the first single crystal substrate can be provided on the first single crystal substrate. Furthermore, a first insulating layer having a bonding surface with the second single crystal substrate is provided on the first transistor.

 第2の単結晶基板上に単結晶の半導体膜を形成したのちに、当該半導体膜を島状に加工する。島状の半導体膜(以降、半導体層とも呼ぶ)上に、ゲート絶縁層、ゲート電極、ならびにソース電極及びドレイン電極をそれぞれ形成することで、第2の単結晶基板上に、単結晶半導体にチャネルが形成されるトランジスタを作製することができる。その後、トランジスタ上に、第1の単結晶基板との接合面を有する第2の絶縁層を形成する。 After forming a single-crystal semiconductor film on a second single-crystal substrate, the semiconductor film is processed into an island shape. By forming a gate insulating layer, a gate electrode, and source and drain electrodes on the island-shaped semiconductor film (hereinafter also referred to as a semiconductor layer), a transistor in which a channel is formed in the single-crystal semiconductor can be manufactured on the second single-crystal substrate. Then, a second insulating layer having a bonding surface with the first single-crystal substrate is formed on the transistor.

 続いて、第1の単結晶基板と、第2の単結晶基板とを貼り合わせる。このとき、第1の絶縁層の表面と、第2の絶縁層の表面とが接するように貼り合わせる。第1の絶縁層と第2の絶縁層とに、同じ材料を用いると、接合強度を高めることができるため好ましい。また、第1の絶縁層と第2の絶縁層とは、それぞれ表面が平坦であるほど好ましいため、あらかじめ平坦化処理を施すことが好ましい。接合後、第1の絶縁層の第2の絶縁層側の面、及び第2の絶縁層の第1の絶縁層側の面が、それぞれ接合面を成す。 Next, the first single crystal substrate and the second single crystal substrate are bonded together, so that the surfaces of the first insulating layer and the second insulating layer are in contact. Using the same material for the first insulating layer and the second insulating layer is preferable, as this increases the bonding strength. Furthermore, the flatter the surfaces of the first insulating layer and the second insulating layer, the better, so it is preferable to perform a planarization process beforehand. After bonding, the surface of the first insulating layer facing the second insulating layer and the surface of the second insulating layer facing the first insulating layer form the bonding surfaces, respectively.

 以上の工程により、第1の単結晶基板の一部にチャネルが形成される第1のトランジスタと、単結晶の半導体膜にチャネルが形成される第2のトランジスタとが積層された半導体装置を作製することができる。このとき、第1のトランジスタを含む積層構造と、第2のトランジスタを含む積層構造とは、上記接合面を境に上下が逆転した構成となる。 The above process allows for the manufacture of a semiconductor device in which a first transistor, whose channel is formed in a portion of a first single-crystal substrate, and a second transistor, whose channel is formed in a single-crystal semiconductor film, are stacked. In this case, the stacked structure including the first transistor and the stacked structure including the second transistor are upside down across the junction plane.

 第1の単結晶基板と、第2の単結晶基板とを貼り合わせたのち、第2の単結晶基板を除去してもよいし、第2の単結晶基板を研削すること(バックグラインド加工ともいう)などにより、薄型化してもよい。さらに第2の単結晶基板の裏面(第2のトランジスタとは反対側の面)上に、発光素子、受光素子、センサ素子、トランジスタなどの機能素子を作製してもよい。このとき、当該機能素子は、第2の単結晶基板に設けられたプラグを介して第2のトランジスタと接続してもよい。これにより、高機能な半導体装置を作製することができる。例えば機能素子に表示素子を用いた場合には、回路と表示素子とを積層することが可能であるため、チップ面積が小さく、極めて高精細で、高い表示品位を実現可能な表示装置を実現できる。 After bonding the first single crystal substrate and the second single crystal substrate, the second single crystal substrate may be removed, or the second single crystal substrate may be ground (also called back-grinding) to reduce its thickness. Furthermore, functional elements such as light-emitting elements, light-receiving elements, sensor elements, and transistors may be fabricated on the back surface of the second single crystal substrate (the surface opposite the second transistor). In this case, the functional elements may be connected to the second transistor via plugs provided in the second single crystal substrate. This makes it possible to fabricate a highly functional semiconductor device. For example, when a display element is used as the functional element, it is possible to stack the circuit and the display element, thereby realizing a display device with a small chip area, extremely high resolution, and high display quality.

 以下では、より具体的な例について図面を参照して説明する。 More specific examples will be explained below with reference to the drawings.

[半導体装置の作製方法例1]
 以下では、本発明の一態様の半導体装置の作製方法の一例について説明する。図1A乃至図2Dには、以下で例示する作製方法の各工程に対応する断面概略図を示している。
[Example 1 of manufacturing method of semiconductor device]
1A to 2D are schematic cross-sectional views illustrating steps of a manufacturing method of a semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention.

 まず、基板11を準備する(図1A)。基板11は、単結晶基板を用いることができる。例えばYSZ、酸化ジルコニウム、シリコン、炭化シリコン、窒化ガリウム、酸化ガリウムなどの単結晶基板を用いることができる。また、酸化イットリウム、酸化エルビウム、酸化ガドリニウム、酸化イッテルビウムなどの希土類の酸化物及びランタノイドの酸化物を用いることもできる。特に半導体膜21fに酸化インジウムを用いる場合には、酸化イットリウムまたは酸化エルビウムを用いることが好ましい。基板11としては、のちに形成する半導体膜21fと格子不整合度の小さい材料を用いることができる。また基板11を、のちに除去する場合には、絶縁性の基板に限られず、導電性の基板、及び半導体基板を用いることもできる。 First, the substrate 11 is prepared (Figure 1A). A single crystal substrate can be used for the substrate 11. For example, a single crystal substrate such as YSZ, zirconium oxide, silicon, silicon carbide, gallium nitride, or gallium oxide can be used. Rare earth oxides and lanthanide oxides such as yttrium oxide, erbium oxide, gadolinium oxide, and ytterbium oxide can also be used. In particular, when indium oxide is used for the semiconductor film 21f, it is preferable to use yttrium oxide or erbium oxide. A material with a small lattice mismatch with the semiconductor film 21f to be formed later can be used for the substrate 11. Furthermore, if the substrate 11 is to be removed later, it is not limited to an insulating substrate; conductive substrates and semiconductor substrates can also be used.

 続いて、基板11上に半導体膜21fを形成する(図1B)。半導体膜21fは、金属酸化物を用いることができる。特に、インジウム、錫、または亜鉛を主成分とした酸化物膜を用いることが好ましい。その中でも、単結晶の酸化インジウムは高い移動度と高い信頼性を兼ね備えるため、特に好ましい。 Next, a semiconductor film 21f is formed on the substrate 11 (Figure 1B). A metal oxide can be used for the semiconductor film 21f. In particular, it is preferable to use an oxide film whose main component is indium, tin, or zinc. Among these, single-crystal indium oxide is particularly preferable because it combines high mobility with high reliability.

 半導体膜21fは、原子層堆積(ALD:Atomic Layer Deposition)法、スパッタリング法、化学気相堆積(CVD:Chemical Vapor Deposition)法、パルスレーザ堆積(PLD:Pulsed Laser Deposition)法、分子線エピタキシー(MBE:Molecular Beam Epitaxy)法、湿式法などの方法により形成することができる。 Semiconductor film 21f can be formed by methods such as atomic layer deposition (ALD), sputtering, chemical vapor deposition (CVD), pulsed laser deposition (PLD), molecular beam epitaxy (MBE), and wet processes.

 半導体膜21fは、基板11を加熱した状態で成膜することが好ましい。これにより、欠陥の少ない単結晶膜を得ることができる。また、基板11の加熱温度が高いほど、基板11の表面を清浄化でき、且つ、格子欠陥を低減できるため好ましい。一方、成膜時の基板11の温度が高すぎると、膜中の酸素が脱離し、目的の組成の膜が得られない可能性もある。そのため、半導体膜21fの成膜時における基板11の温度を、室温以上1200度以下、好ましくは100度以上600度以下とすることができる。なお、成膜装置内において基板11をあらかじめ高温(1000度以上)で加熱したのちに、大気に曝すことなく基板11の表面温度を600度以下に下げて、半導体膜21fを成膜することもできる。 The semiconductor film 21f is preferably formed while the substrate 11 is heated. This allows for a single-crystal film with fewer defects. Furthermore, the higher the heating temperature of the substrate 11, the cleaner the surface of the substrate 11 can be and the fewer lattice defects there are, which is preferable. On the other hand, if the temperature of the substrate 11 during film formation is too high, oxygen in the film may be desorbed, potentially preventing the formation of a film with the desired composition. Therefore, the temperature of the substrate 11 during film formation can be set to between room temperature and 1200°C, preferably between 100°C and 600°C. It is also possible to first heat the substrate 11 to a high temperature (1000°C or higher) in a film formation apparatus, and then lower the surface temperature of the substrate 11 to 600°C or lower without exposing it to the atmosphere, and then form the semiconductor film 21f.

 半導体膜21fとしては、特に酸化インジウムを用いることが好ましい。金属酸化物に含まれるすべての金属元素の原子数の和に対するインジウムの原子数の割合が高いほど、トランジスタの電界効果移動度を高めることができる。また、単結晶構造を有する酸化インジウムをトランジスタのチャネル形成領域に用いることで、極めて信頼性の高いトランジスタを実現できる。また酸化インジウムのバンドギャップは、2.5eV以上3.7eV以下である。バンドギャップの大きい酸化インジウムをトランジスタのチャネル形成領域に用いることで、トランジスタのオフ電流を小さくでき、半導体装置の消費電力を十分に低減できる。 Indium oxide is particularly preferable for use as the semiconductor film 21f. The higher the ratio of the number of indium atoms to the sum of the numbers of atoms of all metal elements contained in the metal oxide, the higher the field-effect mobility of the transistor. Furthermore, by using indium oxide with a single crystal structure in the channel formation region of a transistor, a highly reliable transistor can be realized. Furthermore, the band gap of indium oxide is 2.5 eV or more and 3.7 eV or less. By using indium oxide with a wide band gap in the channel formation region of a transistor, the off-state current of the transistor can be reduced, and the power consumption of the semiconductor device can be significantly reduced.

 酸化インジウムなどの立方晶系の結晶構造を有する膜を半導体膜21fに用いる場合、基板11には、立方晶系の結晶構造を有する基板を用いることが好ましい。これにより、半導体膜21fをエピタキシャル成長させることができ、半導体膜21fの結晶性を高めることができる。例えば、基板11として、立方晶系である酸化ジルコニウム、又はイットリア安定化ジルコニア(YSZ)を用いることができる。なお、半導体膜21fと基板11とが同じ結晶構造である場合、基板11の表面の結晶方位は特に限定されない。例えば基板11の表面の結晶方位は[100]であってもよいし、[110]であってもよいし、[111]であってもよい。なお、基板11としてYSZ基板を用い、半導体膜21fとして酸化インジウム膜を用いる場合、後述する格子不整合の観点から、基板11として、表面の結晶方位が[100]または[111]であるYSZ基板を用いることが特に好ましい。また基板11として、表面が特定の結晶面から傾いた基板、いわゆるオフ角が0°以上である基板を用いてもよい。 When a film having a cubic crystal structure, such as indium oxide, is used for the semiconductor film 21f, it is preferable to use a substrate having a cubic crystal structure for the substrate 11. This allows the semiconductor film 21f to grow epitaxially, improving the crystallinity of the semiconductor film 21f. For example, zirconium oxide or yttria-stabilized zirconia (YSZ), which are cubic crystal structures, can be used for the substrate 11. Note that when the semiconductor film 21f and the substrate 11 have the same crystal structure, the crystal orientation of the surface of the substrate 11 is not particularly limited. For example, the crystal orientation of the surface of the substrate 11 may be [100], [110], or [111]. Note that when a YSZ substrate is used for the substrate 11 and an indium oxide film is used for the semiconductor film 21f, it is particularly preferable to use a YSZ substrate with a surface crystal orientation of [100] or [111] for the substrate 11, from the perspective of lattice mismatch, as described below. Substrate 11 may also be a substrate whose surface is tilted from a specific crystal plane, i.e., a substrate with an off-angle of 0° or more.

 また、半導体膜21fと、基板11との格子不整合は小さいことが好ましい。格子不整合が小さくなるように基板11に用いる材料を選択することで、半導体膜21fの結晶性を向上させることができる。 Furthermore, it is preferable that the lattice mismatch between the semiconductor film 21f and the substrate 11 is small. By selecting a material for the substrate 11 that minimizes the lattice mismatch, the crystallinity of the semiconductor film 21f can be improved.

 格子不整合の度合いを評価する方法の一つとして、以下に示す格子不整合度の値を用いる方法がある。被形成膜(例えば基板11)が有する結晶に対する、形成膜(例えば半導体膜21f)が有する結晶の格子不整合度Δa[%]は、Δa=((L−L)/L)×100で算出される。ここでLは形成膜が有する結晶の単位格子ベクトルの長さまたは格子定数であり、Lは被形成膜が有する結晶の単位格子ベクトルの長さまたは格子定数である。 One method for evaluating the degree of lattice mismatch is to use the lattice mismatch value shown below. The lattice mismatch Δa [%] of the crystals of the formed film (e.g., semiconductor film 21f) with respect to the crystals of the film to be formed (e.g., substrate 11) is calculated by Δa = (( L1 - L2 ) / L2) × 100 , where L1 is the length or lattice constant of the unit lattice vector of the crystals of the formed film, and L2 is the length or lattice constant of the unit lattice vector of the crystals of the film to be formed.

 基板11と、半導体膜21fとの格子不整合度Δaは、その絶対値が小さいほど好ましく、0であることが最も好ましい。例えばΔaは、−5%以上5%以下、好ましくは−4%以上4%以下、より好ましくは−3%以上3%以下、さらに好ましくは−2%以上2%以下であることが好ましい。格子不整合度Δaが小さいほど、半導体膜21fの歪みを小さくでき、ミスフィット転位に対する臨界膜厚が大きくなるため、半導体膜21fが厚い場合であっても、高い結晶性を有する膜とすることができる。 The smaller the absolute value of the lattice mismatch Δa between the substrate 11 and the semiconductor film 21f, the better, with 0 being most preferable. For example, Δa is preferably between -5% and 5%, preferably between -4% and 4%, more preferably between -3% and 3%, and even more preferably between -2% and 2%. The smaller the lattice mismatch Δa, the less strain can be in the semiconductor film 21f and the greater the critical film thickness for misfit dislocations, allowing for a film with high crystallinity even when the semiconductor film 21f is thick.

 例えば、立方晶構造(ビックスバイト型)の酸化インジウムは、格子定数が1.0117nmである(ICSD(Inorganic Crystal Structure Database)coll.code.14387を参照)。一方、立方晶構造(蛍石型)のYSZ(Zr0.90.11.95)は、格子定数が0.51481nmである(ICSD coll.code.248790を参照)。よって、YSZが有する結晶粒に対する、酸化インジウム膜が有する結晶粒の格子不整合度は、−1.74%である。ここで、YSZはイットリウムの含有量によって格子定数が変化するため、YSZに含まれるイットリウムの含有量は、2atomic%以上15atomic%以下、好ましくは5atomic%以上10atomic%以下とすることで、YSZと酸化インジウムの格子不整合度を小さくでき、欠陥の少ない単結晶の酸化インジウム膜を形成することができる。 For example, indium oxide with a cubic crystal structure (bixbyite type) has a lattice constant of 1.0117 nm (see ICSD ( Inorganic Crystal Structure Database) col.code.14387). On the other hand, YSZ ( Zr0.9Y0.1O1.95 ) with a cubic crystal structure (fluorite type) has a lattice constant of 0.51481 nm (see ICSD col.code.248790). Therefore, the lattice mismatch of the crystal grains of the indium oxide film with respect to the crystal grains of YSZ is -1.74%. Here, since the lattice constant of YSZ changes depending on the yttrium content, the yttrium content of YSZ is set to 2 atomic % or more and 15 atomic % or less, preferably 5 atomic % or more and 10 atomic % or less, thereby making it possible to reduce the lattice mismatch between YSZ and indium oxide and form a single-crystal indium oxide film with few defects.

 なお、基板11の結晶構造と、半導体膜21fの結晶構造とは、結晶方位が同一でなくてもよい場合がある。例えば、立方晶構造の結晶を有する酸化インジウムの下に、六方晶構造または三方晶構造の結晶を有する膜を用いることもできる。例えば、基板11の表面の結晶方位を[001]とし、半導体膜21fの下面の結晶方位を[111]とすることで、エピタキシャル成長に必要な結晶方位に関わる要件を満たすことができる。六方晶系または三方晶系の結晶として、例えば、ウルツ鉱型構造、YbFe型構造、YbFe型構造、およびこれらの変形型構造などがある。 The crystal orientation of the substrate 11 and the crystal orientation of the semiconductor film 21f may not necessarily be the same. For example, a film having hexagonal or trigonal crystals may be used under indium oxide having cubic crystals. For example, the crystal orientation of the surface of the substrate 11 may be [001], and the crystal orientation of the underside of the semiconductor film 21f may be [111] , thereby satisfying the requirements for the crystal orientation necessary for epitaxial growth. Examples of hexagonal or trigonal crystals include a wurtzite structure, a YbFe2O4 structure, a Yb2Fe3O7 structure, and modified structures thereof.

 なお、半導体膜21fとしては、酸化インジウムに限られず、インジウム、錫または亜鉛を主成分とする金属酸化物膜を用いることができる。ここで主成分とは、金属酸化物を構成する金属元素の原子数の和に対する、目的の原子の割合が0.1%以上であるものをいう。当該割合が0.1%未満の元素を、不純物と呼ぶ場合もある。 The semiconductor film 21f is not limited to indium oxide, and a metal oxide film containing indium, tin, or zinc as its main component can also be used. Here, "main component" refers to a metal oxide in which the ratio of the target atoms to the total number of atoms of the metal elements that make up the metal oxide is 0.1% or more. Elements with a ratio of less than 0.1% are sometimes called impurities.

 図3A、図3Bでは、基板11と半導体膜21fの界面近傍における断面を模式的に示している。図3Aは、基板11の結晶の格子定数よりも半導体膜21fの結晶の格子定数の方が小さい場合、すなわちΔa<0の場合に相当し、図3BはΔa>0の場合に相当する。 Figures 3A and 3B show schematic cross sections near the interface between substrate 11 and semiconductor film 21f. Figure 3A corresponds to the case where the lattice constant of the crystal of semiconductor film 21f is smaller than the lattice constant of the crystal of substrate 11, i.e., Δa<0, and Figure 3B corresponds to the case where Δa>0.

 基板11では、元素15sが周期的に配列しており、基板11上に形成された半導体膜21fでは、元素15fが周期的に配列している。基板11と半導体膜21fとの間で格子定数が異なるため、半導体膜21fの基板11近傍では、格子が歪むことにより界面の格子の連続性が保たれている。この半導体膜21fの格子が歪んだ領域の厚さが厚いほど、歪みを緩和しやすくなり、転位などが生じにくくなる。この領域の厚さは、薄い場合は1原子層、厚い場合では数μmにもなる場合がある。 Element 15s is periodically arranged in substrate 11, and element 15f is periodically arranged in semiconductor film 21f formed on substrate 11. Because the lattice constants differ between substrate 11 and semiconductor film 21f, the lattice is distorted in the vicinity of substrate 11 in semiconductor film 21f, maintaining the continuity of the lattice at the interface. The thicker the region where the lattice of semiconductor film 21f is distorted, the easier it is to relax the distortion, making it less likely for dislocations to occur. The thickness of this region can range from a single atomic layer if thin to several μm if thick.

 このとき、半導体膜21fの格子は、面内方向に広がるまたは縮むように歪む一方、膜厚方向にはほとんど歪まない場合がある。例えば一般的な応力と歪みの関係では、物体に外力を与えてある方向に伸びた場合、これに直交する方向には縮む(外力により縮む場合はその反対)ことが一般的であるが、半導体膜21fに関してはこれとは異なる傾向を示す場合がある。 At this time, the lattice of semiconductor film 21f may distort so as to expand or contract in the in-plane direction, but may show almost no distortion in the film thickness direction. For example, in the general relationship between stress and strain, when an external force is applied to an object and it expands in a certain direction, it generally contracts in the direction perpendicular to that (and the opposite is true when it contracts due to an external force), but semiconductor film 21f may show a different tendency.

 図4A、図4Bでは、基板11と半導体膜21fとの間に、中間層16が存在する場合の例を示している。中間層16は、基板11と半導体膜21fとの間の格子不整合に伴う応力を緩和するためのバッファ層として機能する。中間層16が存在することで、半導体膜21fに生じる歪みが緩和されるため、半導体膜21fを転位などの欠陥が少なく、結晶性が良好な膜とすることができる。中間層16は、原子が存在しないサイトが存在することにより、密度が低い領域である場合がある。また、中間層16に位置する元素15mとしては、半導体膜21fを構成する元素だけでなく、基板11を構成する元素が混在していてもよい。その場合、中間層16を混合層と呼ぶこともできる。 Figures 4A and 4B show an example in which an intermediate layer 16 exists between the substrate 11 and the semiconductor film 21f. The intermediate layer 16 functions as a buffer layer to relieve stress associated with lattice mismatch between the substrate 11 and the semiconductor film 21f. The presence of the intermediate layer 16 relieves strain in the semiconductor film 21f, making the semiconductor film 21f a film with few defects such as dislocations and good crystallinity. The intermediate layer 16 may be a low-density region due to the presence of sites where no atoms exist. Furthermore, the element 15m located in the intermediate layer 16 may be not only an element that constitutes the semiconductor film 21f, but also a mixture of elements that constitute the substrate 11. In this case, the intermediate layer 16 may also be called a mixed layer.

 中間層16は、例えば基板11と半導体膜21fとの界面近傍における断面の高角散乱環状暗視野走査透過電子顕微鏡法(HAADF−STEM:High−Angle Annular Dark Field Scanning Transmission Electron Microscopy)による観察像で確認できる。中間層16では、他の領域よりもコントラストの低い層として観察されうる。中間層16の厚さは基板11の結晶方位によって異なり、1原子層、2原子層、またはそれ以上存在する場合がある。 The intermediate layer 16 can be confirmed, for example, in an image of a cross section near the interface between the substrate 11 and the semiconductor film 21f observed using high-angle annular dark-field scanning transmission electron microscopy (HAADF-STEM). The intermediate layer 16 can be observed as a layer with lower contrast than other regions. The thickness of the intermediate layer 16 varies depending on the crystal orientation of the substrate 11, and may be one atomic layer, two atomic layers, or more.

 続いて、半導体膜21f上に、導電膜24fを形成する(図1C)。導電膜24fとしては、チタン、窒化チタン、タンタル、窒化タンタル、ルテニウム、酸化ルテニウムなどの酸素を拡散しにくい導電性材料を用いることができる。これにより、半導体膜21f等に含まれる酸素により酸化し、導電率が低下することを抑制できる。導電膜24fはスパッタリング法、ALD法、CVD法などにより成膜することができる。 Next, a conductive film 24f is formed on the semiconductor film 21f (Figure 1C). Conductive materials that do not easily diffuse oxygen, such as titanium, titanium nitride, tantalum, tantalum nitride, ruthenium, and ruthenium oxide, can be used for the conductive film 24f. This prevents oxidation by oxygen contained in the semiconductor film 21f, etc., and a decrease in conductivity. The conductive film 24f can be formed by a method such as sputtering, ALD, or CVD.

 続いて、導電膜24f上にレジストマスクを形成し、エッチングにより導電膜24f及び半導体膜21fの不要な部分を除去することで、島状の導電層24及び半導体層21を形成する(図1D)。その後レジストマスクを除去する。エッチングは、ドライエッチングまたはウェットエッチングを用いることができるが、ドライエッチングを用いると微細な加工が容易であるため好ましい。 Next, a resist mask is formed on the conductive film 24f, and unnecessary portions of the conductive film 24f and the semiconductor film 21f are removed by etching, forming island-shaped conductive layer 24 and semiconductor layer 21 (Figure 1D). The resist mask is then removed. Etching can be performed by dry etching or wet etching, but dry etching is preferred as it facilitates fine processing.

 続いて、導電層24及び半導体層21を覆って、バリア膜として機能する絶縁層32と、層間絶縁膜として機能する絶縁層33aと、を順に形成する(図1E)。絶縁層32及び絶縁層33aは、スパッタリング法、ALD法、CVD法などにより形成することができる。 Next, insulating layer 32, which functions as a barrier film, and insulating layer 33a, which functions as an interlayer insulating film, are formed in this order to cover conductive layer 24 and semiconductor layer 21 (Figure 1E). Insulating layer 32 and insulating layer 33a can be formed by sputtering, ALD, CVD, or the like.

 絶縁層32としては、窒化シリコン、酸化アルミニウム、酸化ハフニウム、アルミニウムとハフニウムを含む酸化物(ハフニウムアルミネート)などの絶縁材料を用いることが好ましい。これらは酸素、水素、及び水に対してバリア性を有するため、半導体層21にこれらの不純物が拡散することを防ぐことができる。 For the insulating layer 32, it is preferable to use an insulating material such as silicon nitride, aluminum oxide, hafnium oxide, or an oxide containing aluminum and hafnium (hafnium aluminate). These materials have barrier properties against oxygen, hydrogen, and water, and can prevent these impurities from diffusing into the semiconductor layer 21.

 絶縁層33aとしては、酸化シリコン、酸化窒化シリコン、窒化酸化シリコンなどの絶縁材料を用いることが好ましい。絶縁層33aとして誘電率の低い材料を用いることで、寄生容量を低減することができる。 It is preferable to use an insulating material such as silicon oxide, silicon oxynitride, or silicon nitride oxide for the insulating layer 33a. By using a material with a low dielectric constant for the insulating layer 33a, parasitic capacitance can be reduced.

 なお、本明細書等において、酸化窒化物とは、その組成として窒素原子よりも酸素原子の含有量が多い材料を指す。窒化酸化物とは、その組成として酸素原子よりも窒素原子の含有量が多い材料を指す。例えば、酸化窒化シリコンと記載した場合は、その組成として窒素原子よりも酸素原子の含有量が多い材料を指し、窒化酸化シリコンと記載した場合は、その組成として、酸素原子よりも窒素原子の含有量が多い材料を示す。 In this specification and elsewhere, an oxynitride refers to a material whose composition contains more oxygen atoms than nitrogen atoms. A nitride oxide refers to a material whose composition contains more nitrogen atoms than oxygen atoms. For example, silicon oxynitride refers to a material whose composition contains more oxygen atoms than nitrogen atoms, and silicon nitride oxide refers to a material whose composition contains more nitrogen atoms than oxygen atoms.

 続いて、絶縁層33a、絶縁層32、及び導電層24の一部をエッチングにより除去し、半導体層21及び基板11に達する溝を形成する(図1F)。このとき、導電層24は当該溝を境に2つに分断される。その後、当該溝に沿って絶縁膜22fを形成する(図1G)。続いて当該溝を埋めるように、絶縁膜22f上に導電層23となる導電膜を形成する。続いて、絶縁層33aが露出するまでCMP法により平坦化処理を行うことで、上記溝内に絶縁層22及び導電層23を形成する(図1H)。絶縁層22はゲート絶縁層として機能し、導電層23はゲート電極として機能する。また、半導体層21上で分断された一対の導電層24はそれぞれ、ソース電極、ドレイン電極として機能する。このようにして、トランジスタ10を作製することができる。 Next, insulating layer 33a, insulating layer 32, and a portion of conductive layer 24 are removed by etching to form a groove that reaches semiconductor layer 21 and substrate 11 (Figure 1F). At this time, conductive layer 24 is divided into two at the groove. After that, insulating film 22f is formed along the groove (Figure 1G). Next, a conductive film that becomes conductive layer 23 is formed on insulating film 22f so as to fill the groove. Next, planarization is performed by CMP until insulating layer 33a is exposed, thereby forming insulating layer 22 and conductive layer 23 in the groove (Figure 1H). Insulating layer 22 functions as a gate insulating layer, and conductive layer 23 functions as a gate electrode. Furthermore, the pair of conductive layers 24 divided on semiconductor layer 21 function as a source electrode and a drain electrode, respectively. In this manner, transistor 10 can be fabricated.

 絶縁層22としては、酸化シリコン、窒化シリコン、酸化アルミニウム、酸化ハフニウム、ハフニウムアルミネートなどの絶縁材料を単層で、または積層して用いることができる。絶縁層22の形成は、スパッタリング法、CVD法、ALD法などの成膜方法を用いることができるが、段差被覆性の高いALD法を用いることで、溝の内部であっても均一な厚さに形成することができるため、耐圧の観点で好ましい。 Insulating layer 22 can be made of insulating materials such as silicon oxide, silicon nitride, aluminum oxide, hafnium oxide, and hafnium aluminate, either in a single layer or in a laminated structure. The insulating layer 22 can be formed using film-forming methods such as sputtering, CVD, and ALD. However, ALD, which has excellent step coverage, is preferable from the standpoint of voltage resistance, as it allows the layer to be formed to a uniform thickness even inside the trench.

 導電層23としては、タングステン、モリブデン、銅、アルミニウムなどの低抵抗な導電性材料を用いることが好ましい。また導電層23を積層構造とし、絶縁層22と接する側に、導電層24に用いることのできる酸素を拡散しにくい導電性材料の膜を設けることが好ましい。これにより、絶縁層22などから拡散する酸素により導電層23が酸化して導電性が低下することを防ぐことができる。 Conductive layer 23 is preferably made of a low-resistance conductive material such as tungsten, molybdenum, copper, or aluminum. It is also preferable to form conductive layer 23 in a layered structure, with a film of a conductive material that does not easily diffuse oxygen, which can be used for conductive layer 24, provided on the side in contact with insulating layer 22. This prevents conductive layer 23 from being oxidized by oxygen diffusing from insulating layer 22 or the like, resulting in a decrease in conductivity.

 その後、トランジスタ10及び絶縁層33aを覆って絶縁層33bを形成する。絶縁層33bは層間絶縁膜として機能し、上記絶縁層33aと同様の方法により形成することができる。続いて、絶縁層33b、絶縁層33a、及び絶縁層32に、導電層24に達する開口を形成する。続いて、これら開口を埋めるように導電膜を形成したのち、絶縁層33bが露出するまでCMP法により平坦化処理を行うことで、導電層24と接続するプラグ61cを形成する。当該導電膜はCVD法により形成することが好ましい。 Then, insulating layer 33b is formed to cover transistor 10 and insulating layer 33a. Insulating layer 33b functions as an interlayer insulating film and can be formed using the same method as insulating layer 33a. Next, openings reaching conductive layer 24 are formed in insulating layers 33b, 33a, and 32. Next, a conductive film is formed to fill these openings, and then planarization is performed using CMP until insulating layer 33b is exposed, thereby forming plugs 61c that connect to conductive layer 24. The conductive film is preferably formed using CVD.

 続いて、導電膜を形成し、不要な部分をエッチングにより除去することで、導電層71cを形成する(図1I)。導電層71cは、プラグ61cを介して導電層24と接続する。 Next, a conductive film is formed and unnecessary portions are removed by etching to form conductive layer 71c (Figure 1I). Conductive layer 71c is connected to conductive layer 24 via plug 61c.

 続いて、絶縁層33b及び導電層71cを覆って、絶縁層33cを形成する。その後、絶縁層33cに導電層71cに達する開口と、当該開口内にプラグ61dを形成する。続いて、絶縁層33c上に導電層71dを形成する。その後、絶縁層33c及び導電層71dを覆って絶縁膜を形成し、導電層71dの上面が露出するまで平坦化処理を行うことで、絶縁層33dを形成する(図2A)。これにより、導電層71dは絶縁層33dに埋め込まれ、これらの上面は平坦化され、且つ高さが一致した構成とすることができる。 Next, insulating layer 33c is formed, covering insulating layer 33b and conductive layer 71c. After that, an opening reaching conductive layer 71c is formed in insulating layer 33c, and plug 61d is formed in the opening. Next, conductive layer 71d is formed on insulating layer 33c. After that, an insulating film is formed covering insulating layer 33c and conductive layer 71d, and a planarization process is performed until the top surface of conductive layer 71d is exposed, thereby forming insulating layer 33d (Figure 2A). As a result, conductive layer 71d is embedded in insulating layer 33d, and the top surfaces are planarized and at the same height.

 以上で、基板10側の工程が完了する。 This completes the process on the substrate 10 side.

 続いて、トランジスタ50が設けられた基板51を準備する(図2B)。 Next, a substrate 51 on which a transistor 50 is mounted is prepared (Figure 2B).

 基板51は、単結晶半導体基板であり、トランジスタ50が設けられている。トランジスタ50は、基板51の一部に形成される半導体領域51cを有する。基板51は、代表的には単結晶シリコンを用いることができる。そのほか、ゲルマニウムなどの単体元素よりなる半導体、または炭化シリコン、シリコンゲルマニウム、ヒ化ガリウム、リン化インジウム、酸化亜鉛、酸化ガリウム、窒化ガリウムなどからなる化合物半導体などを用いることができる。さらには、前述の半導体基板内部に絶縁体領域を有する半導体基板、例えば、SOI(Silicon On Insulator)基板などを用いることもできる。または、ガラス基板、石英基板、サファイア基板、YSZ基板、樹脂基板などの絶縁基板上に、薄膜の半導体膜が設けられた基板を用いてもよい。 Substrate 51 is a single-crystal semiconductor substrate, and has transistor 50 formed thereon. Transistor 50 has a semiconductor region 51c formed in part of substrate 51. Substrate 51 can typically be made of single-crystal silicon. Alternatively, semiconductors made of elemental elements such as germanium, or compound semiconductors made of silicon carbide, silicon germanium, gallium arsenide, indium phosphide, zinc oxide, gallium oxide, gallium nitride, etc. can be used. Furthermore, a semiconductor substrate having an insulator region within the aforementioned semiconductor substrate, such as an SOI (Silicon On Insulator) substrate, can also be used. Alternatively, a substrate having a thin-film semiconductor film provided on an insulating substrate such as a glass substrate, quartz substrate, sapphire substrate, YSZ substrate, or resin substrate can also be used.

 トランジスタ50は、基板51に設けられ、ゲートとして機能する導電層53と、ゲート絶縁層として機能する絶縁層52と、基板51の一部からなる半導体領域51cと、ソース領域及びドレイン領域として機能する一対の低抵抗領域54と、を有する。トランジスタ50は基板51の単結晶半導体にチャネルが形成される。トランジスタ50はpチャネル型またはnチャネル型のいずれでもよい。基板51には、隣接する2つのトランジスタ50の間に、素子分離層81が設けられている。 The transistor 50 is provided on a substrate 51 and has a conductive layer 53 that functions as a gate, an insulating layer 52 that functions as a gate insulating layer, a semiconductor region 51c that is part of the substrate 51, and a pair of low-resistance regions 54 that function as a source region and a drain region. The transistor 50 has a channel formed in the single-crystal semiconductor of the substrate 51. The transistor 50 may be either a p-channel type or an n-channel type. An element isolation layer 81 is provided on the substrate 51 between two adjacent transistors 50.

 トランジスタ50は、チャネルが形成される半導体領域51cが凸形状(フィン形状)を有する。また、図2Bには示されていないが、奥行き方向において、半導体領域51cの側面及び上面を、絶縁層52を介して導電層53が覆うように設けられている。このようなトランジスタ50は、FIN型トランジスタとも呼ばれる。 In the transistor 50, the semiconductor region 51c in which the channel is formed has a convex (fin-shaped) shape. Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 2B, a conductive layer 53 is provided to cover the side and top surfaces of the semiconductor region 51c in the depth direction, with an insulating layer 52 interposed between them. Such a transistor 50 is also called a FIN-type transistor.

 トランジスタ50の一部を覆って絶縁層82が設けられ、絶縁層82上に絶縁層83a乃至83dが順に設けられている。導電層71aは絶縁層83bに埋め込まれており、絶縁層83a及び絶縁層82を貫通するプラグ61aを介して低抵抗領域54と接続されている。また導電層71bは絶縁層83dに埋め込まれており、絶縁層83cを貫通するプラグ61bを介して導電層71aと接続されている。 An insulating layer 82 is provided covering a portion of the transistor 50, and insulating layers 83a to 83d are provided in this order on top of the insulating layer 82. The conductive layer 71a is embedded in the insulating layer 83b and is connected to the low-resistance region 54 via a plug 61a that penetrates the insulating layer 83a and the insulating layer 82. The conductive layer 71b is embedded in the insulating layer 83d and is connected to the conductive layer 71a via a plug 61b that penetrates the insulating layer 83c.

 絶縁層83dの上面は接合面となるため、CMP法により平坦化されていることが好ましい。これにより、絶縁層83dと導電層71bのそれぞれの上面は平坦化され、且つ高さが一致した構成とすることができる。 Since the upper surface of the insulating layer 83d will be the bonding surface, it is preferably planarized by CMP. This allows the upper surfaces of the insulating layer 83d and the conductive layer 71b to be planarized and to be configured to be the same height.

 続いて、基板51と基板11とを貼り合わせる(図2C)。 Substrate 51 and substrate 11 are then bonded together (Figure 2C).

 基板51と基板11との接合は、2つの基板を絶縁層33dと絶縁層83dとが向かい合うように重ね合わせて行う。またこのとき、導電層71dと導電層71bとが接するように、位置を調整することが重要である。 Bonding of substrate 51 and substrate 11 is performed by overlapping the two substrates so that insulating layer 33d and insulating layer 83d face each other. It is also important to adjust the positions so that conductive layer 71d and conductive layer 71b are in contact.

 絶縁層33dと絶縁層83dとは、接合が可能な組み合わせであることが好ましい。特に、これらが同じ材料であることが好ましい。中でも、それぞれに酸化シリコンを用いると、強固な接合が実現できるため好ましい。また、導電層71bと導電層71dとは、同じ材料であると、接触抵抗を下げることができるため好ましい。特に、それぞれに銅を用いると、接合が容易で、且つ、低い接触抵抗を実現できる。 It is preferable that insulating layer 33d and insulating layer 83d are a combination that allows bonding. It is particularly preferable that they are made of the same material. In particular, using silicon oxide for each layer is preferable, as this allows for a strong bond. It is also preferable that conductive layer 71b and conductive layer 71d are made of the same material, as this reduces contact resistance. In particular, using copper for each layer allows for easy bonding and low contact resistance.

 貼り合わせの際、基板51または基板11の一箇所を押圧することで、そこを起点に接合面全域にファン・デル・ワールス結合、水素結合などを広げることができる。接合面の一方または双方が親水表面を有する場合は、水酸基、水分子などが接着剤として働き、後に熱処理を行うことで水分子が拡散し、残留成分がシラノール基(Si−OH)を形成して水素結合により接合を形成する。さらにこの接合部は、水素が抜けることでシロキサン結合(O−Si−O)を形成して共有結合となり、より強固な接合となる。 When bonding, pressing one point on substrate 51 or substrate 11 can spread van der Waals bonds, hydrogen bonds, etc. from that point across the entire bonding surface. If one or both of the bonding surfaces have a hydrophilic surface, hydroxyl groups, water molecules, etc. act as an adhesive, and subsequent heat treatment causes the water molecules to diffuse, with the remaining components forming silanol groups (Si-OH), which form a bond through hydrogen bonds. Furthermore, as hydrogen is released from this bond, siloxane bonds (O-Si-O) are formed, which becomes a covalent bond, resulting in an even stronger bond.

 以上の工程により、半導体装置を作製することができる。 A semiconductor device can be manufactured using the above process.

 図2Dに示す半導体装置は、単結晶基板の一部にチャネルが形成されるトランジスタ50と、単結晶の酸化物半導体にチャネルが形成されるトランジスタ10と、が積層された構成を有する。 The semiconductor device shown in Figure 2D has a stacked structure of a transistor 50 whose channel is formed in part of a single-crystal substrate and a transistor 10 whose channel is formed in a single-crystal oxide semiconductor.

[半導体装置の作製方法例2]
 以下では、上記とは異なる半導体膜の形成方法を適用した、半導体装置の作製方法の一例について説明する。
[Example 2 of manufacturing method of semiconductor device]
An example of a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device using a method for forming a semiconductor film different from the above will be described below.

 まず、基板11aを準備する(図5A)。基板11aとしては、単結晶半導体基板を用いる。基板11aとしては、後に形成する下地膜12と格子不整合度の小さい基板を選択することが好ましい。ここでは、基板11aとしてシリコン基板を用いる場合について説明する。 First, the substrate 11a is prepared (Figure 5A). A single-crystal semiconductor substrate is used as the substrate 11a. It is preferable to select a substrate 11a that has a small degree of lattice mismatch with the base film 12 to be formed later. Here, we will explain the case where a silicon substrate is used as the substrate 11a.

 続いて、基板11a上に単結晶の下地膜12を形成する。下地膜12は、上記半導体膜21fと同様の成膜方法を用いて形成することができる。下地膜12は、基板11a上にエピタキシャル成長させることにより、高品質な単結晶膜を得ることができる。下地膜12は絶縁性を有する膜であることが好ましい。すなわち、下地膜12は、単結晶絶縁体を含む膜であることが好ましい。 Next, a single-crystal base film 12 is formed on the substrate 11a. The base film 12 can be formed using the same film formation method as the semiconductor film 21f described above. A high-quality single-crystal film can be obtained by epitaxially growing the base film 12 on the substrate 11a. The base film 12 is preferably an insulating film. In other words, the base film 12 is preferably a film containing a single-crystal insulator.

 下地膜12としては、代表的にはYSZ、酸化ジルコニウムなどの酸化物を用いることができる。また、酸化イットリウム、酸化エルビウム、酸化ガドリニウム、酸化イッテルビウムなどの希土類の酸化物及びランタノイドの酸化物を用いることもできる。特に半導体膜21fに酸化インジウムを用いる場合には、酸化イットリウムまたは酸化エルビウムを用いることが好ましい。 The base film 12 can typically be made of oxides such as YSZ and zirconium oxide. It is also possible to use rare earth oxides and lanthanide oxides such as yttrium oxide, erbium oxide, gadolinium oxide, and ytterbium oxide. In particular, when indium oxide is used for the semiconductor film 21f, it is preferable to use yttrium oxide or erbium oxide.

 例えば基板11aにシリコン基板を用い、下地膜12にYSZ膜を用いることができる。なおこれに限られず、下地膜12としては、絶縁膜、導電膜、または半導体膜のいずれを用いてもよい。下地膜12は、基板11a及び半導体膜21fの双方と格子不整合度の小さい膜を選択することが好ましい。例えば下地膜12は、基板11aと半導体膜21fの双方との格子不整合度Δaが、−20%以上20%以下、好ましくは−10%以上10%以下、より好ましくは−7%以上7%以下、さらに好ましくは−5%以上5%以下、さらに好ましくは−4%以上4%以下の範囲となるように、選択することが好ましい。また、基板11aと下地膜12との間、及び下地膜12と半導体膜21fとの間のうち、いずれか一方または双方に、歪を緩和させるためのバッファ層が設けられていてもよい。 For example, a silicon substrate can be used for the substrate 11a, and a YSZ film can be used for the base film 12. However, this is not a limitation, and the base film 12 can be any insulating film, conductive film, or semiconductor film. It is preferable to select a film that has a small lattice mismatch with both the substrate 11a and the semiconductor film 21f for the base film 12. For example, it is preferable to select the base film 12 so that the lattice mismatch Δa with both the substrate 11a and the semiconductor film 21f is in the range of -20% to 20%, preferably -10% to 10%, more preferably -7% to 7%, even more preferably -5% to 5%, and even more preferably -4% to 4%. A buffer layer for alleviating strain may be provided between the substrate 11a and the base film 12 and between the base film 12 and the semiconductor film 21f, or both.

 基板11aとしてシリコン基板を用いた場合には、基板11aの表面には自然酸化膜が形成される。そのため、下地膜12の成膜前に自然酸化膜を除去する工程を追加してもよい。自然酸化膜は、フッ酸などの酸を用いたウェットエッチングにより除去することができる。または、ドライエッチング法により除去することもできる。ドライエッチング法を用いる場合には、エッチング後に基板11aを大気に曝すことなく連続して下地膜12の成膜を行うことが好ましい。これにより、基板11aに再度、自然酸化膜が形成されることを抑制できる。 When a silicon substrate is used as the substrate 11a, a natural oxide film forms on the surface of the substrate 11a. Therefore, a process of removing the natural oxide film may be added before depositing the base film 12. The natural oxide film can be removed by wet etching using an acid such as hydrofluoric acid. Alternatively, it can be removed by dry etching. When using dry etching, it is preferable to deposit the base film 12 immediately after etching without exposing the substrate 11a to the atmosphere. This prevents a natural oxide film from forming again on the substrate 11a.

 また、基板11aの自然酸化膜を除去することなく、下地膜12を形成してもよい。自然酸化膜が設けられた場合であっても、基板11aの結晶性を反映した結晶構造を有する下地膜12を形成することができる場合がある。このとき、基板11aと下地膜12との間には、バッファ層として機能する層12aが形成されうる。層12aを基板11aと下地膜12との間に設けることで、基板11aと下地膜12との間の格子不整合に伴う下地膜12の格子歪みを緩和し、高品質な単結晶構造を有する下地膜12を形成することができる。 Alternatively, the base film 12 may be formed without removing the native oxide film of the substrate 11a. Even if a native oxide film is provided, it may be possible to form the base film 12 having a crystalline structure that reflects the crystallinity of the substrate 11a. In this case, a layer 12a that functions as a buffer layer may be formed between the substrate 11a and the base film 12. By providing the layer 12a between the substrate 11a and the base film 12, the lattice distortion of the base film 12 associated with the lattice mismatch between the substrate 11a and the base film 12 can be alleviated, allowing the formation of an base film 12 having a high-quality single-crystal structure.

 続いて、下地膜12上に、単結晶構造を有する半導体膜21fを形成する(図5B)。下地膜12が単結晶構造を有するため、半導体膜21fは上記と同様にエピタキシャル成長させることができ、高品質な単結晶構造を有する膜とすることができる。 Next, a semiconductor film 21f having a single crystal structure is formed on the base film 12 (Figure 5B). Because the base film 12 has a single crystal structure, the semiconductor film 21f can be epitaxially grown in the same manner as above, resulting in a film with a high-quality single crystal structure.

 その後、上記と同様に半導体層21、導電層24、絶縁層32、絶縁層33a、絶縁層22、導電層23を形成してトランジスタ10を作製する。さらに、上記と同様に、絶縁層33d及び導電層71dまで形成する(図5C)。 Thereafter, semiconductor layer 21, conductive layer 24, insulating layer 32, insulating layer 33a, insulating layer 22, and conductive layer 23 are formed in the same manner as above to fabricate transistor 10. Furthermore, insulating layer 33d and conductive layer 71d are formed in the same manner as above (Figure 5C).

 続いて、絶縁層33dと絶縁層83dとが接合するように、基板51と基板11aとを貼り合わせる(図5D)。 Substrate 51 and substrate 11a are then bonded together so that insulating layer 33d and insulating layer 83d are bonded together (Figure 5D).

 以上の工程により、半導体装置を作製することができる。ここで示した方法を用いることで、基板11aの材料の選択の幅が広がり、高価な材料を用いる必要がなくなるため、コストを削減することができる。例えば、基板11aに単結晶シリコン基板を用いることができる。 A semiconductor device can be manufactured through the above process. Using the method described here broadens the range of materials that can be used for the substrate 11a, eliminating the need to use expensive materials and reducing costs. For example, a single-crystal silicon substrate can be used for the substrate 11a.

 その後、図5Eに示すように、基板11aを除去してもよい。基板11aの除去は、例えば、基板11aの端に上側に力を加えることにより、密着性の最も劣る場所が剥離面となり、基板11aを剥がすことができる。このとき、基板11aと下地膜12との間で剥離することが好ましい。また、基板11aと下地膜12との間に層12aを有する場合、層12aの内部、層12aと基板11aとの界面、または層12aと下地膜12との界面で剥離が生じる場合がある。 Substrate 11a may then be removed, as shown in Figure 5E. Substrate 11a can be removed, for example, by applying upward force to the edge of substrate 11a, so that the area with the poorest adhesion becomes the peeling surface, allowing substrate 11a to be peeled off. In this case, peeling preferably occurs between substrate 11a and base film 12. Furthermore, if layer 12a is present between substrate 11a and base film 12, peeling may occur inside layer 12a, at the interface between layer 12a and substrate 11a, or at the interface between layer 12a and base film 12.

 また、他の方法としては、基板11aをエッチングなどの化学的な手法、研削、研磨、またはサンドブラスト法などの物理的な手法、またはこれらの組み合わせにより、除去することができる。また、基板11aと半導体膜21fとの界面に、水、アルコールなどの液体を浸入させることにより、これらの界面で剥離を生じさせてもよい。このとき、基板11aを当該液体に浸漬させてもよいし、基板11aと下地膜12の側面に液体を触れさせてもよい。また、導電性を有する液体(イオン液体、または二酸化炭素を含む水など)を用いることで、剥離の際の静電気の発生を抑制することができるため好ましい。 Alternatively, the substrate 11a can be removed by chemical methods such as etching, or physical methods such as grinding, polishing, or sandblasting, or a combination of these. Alternatively, peeling can be caused at the interface between the substrate 11a and the semiconductor film 21f by injecting a liquid such as water or alcohol into the interface. In this case, the substrate 11a may be immersed in the liquid, or the liquid may be brought into contact with the sides of the substrate 11a and the base film 12. Furthermore, using a conductive liquid (such as an ionic liquid or water containing carbon dioxide) is preferable, as this can suppress the generation of static electricity during peeling.

 基板11aの除去後、下地膜12上に層12aが残存している場合には、エッチング法、CMP法などにより除去することが好ましい。また、下地膜12の表面及びその近傍にダメージ層が形成されている場合がある。その場合には、下地膜12上部をエッチング法またはCMP法などにより除去することが好ましい。または、下地膜12を全部除去して半導体層21及び絶縁層32を露出させ、その表面に接して、新たに絶縁層を設けてもよい。 If layer 12a remains on base film 12 after removing substrate 11a, it is preferable to remove it by etching, CMP, or the like. Also, a damaged layer may be formed on the surface of base film 12 or in its vicinity. In such cases, it is preferable to remove the upper part of base film 12 by etching, CMP, or the like. Alternatively, base film 12 may be completely removed to expose semiconductor layer 21 and insulating layer 32, and a new insulating layer may be provided in contact with the surface.

 基板11aを除去したのちに、トランジスタ10の上方(図5Eにおける下地膜12よりも上方)に、発光素子、受光素子、センサ素子、トランジスタなどの機能素子を作製することもできる。 After removing the substrate 11a, functional elements such as light-emitting elements, light-receiving elements, sensor elements, and transistors can also be fabricated above the transistor 10 (above the base film 12 in Figure 5E).

 また、ここでは基板11aを除去したが、バックグラインド加工などにより基板11aを薄く研削してもよい。このとき、基板11aは、プラグを埋め込むためのビアを形成できる程度の厚さにまで薄くすることが好ましい。例えば基板11aの厚さを、1μm以上100μm以下、好ましくは1μm以上50μm以下、より好ましくは1μm以上20μm以下とすることができる。 In addition, although the substrate 11a was removed here, the substrate 11a may be thinned by back-grinding or other methods. In this case, it is preferable to thin the substrate 11a to a thickness that allows for the formation of vias for embedding plugs. For example, the thickness of the substrate 11a can be set to 1 μm or more and 100 μm or less, preferably 1 μm or more and 50 μm or less, and more preferably 1 μm or more and 20 μm or less.

 以上が、作製方法例についての説明である。 The above is an explanation of an example production method.

 本実施の形態は、少なくともその一部を本明細書中に記載する他の実施の形態と適宜組み合わせて実施することができる。 This embodiment can be implemented by appropriately combining at least a portion of it with other embodiments described in this specification.

(実施の形態2)
 本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の半導体装置に適用可能なトランジスタの構成例及び作製方法例について説明する。
(Embodiment 2)
In this embodiment, a structure example and a manufacturing method example of a transistor that can be used in a semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention will be described.

[半導体装置の構成例]
 図6A乃至図6Dは、トランジスタ200の上面図及び断面図である。図6Aは、トランジスタ200の上面図であり、図6B乃至図6Dは、それぞれ図6A中の切断線A1−A2、A3−A4、A5−A6に対応する断面概略図である。図6Bはトランジスタ200のチャネル長方向の断面に相当し、図6C、図6Dはそれぞれチャネル幅方向の断面に相当する。図7は、図6Bの拡大図である。なお、図6A等では、図7に示す一部の構成要素を省略している。
[Configuration example of semiconductor device]
6A to 6D are top views and cross-sectional views of the transistor 200. FIG. 6A is a top view of the transistor 200, and FIGS. 6B to 6D are schematic cross-sectional views corresponding to the cutting lines A1-A2, A3-A4, and A5-A6 in FIG. 6A, respectively. FIG. 6B corresponds to a cross section of the transistor 200 in the channel length direction, and FIGS. 6C and 6D correspond to cross sections in the channel width direction, respectively. FIG. 7 is an enlarged view of FIG. 6B. Note that some components shown in FIG. 7 are omitted in FIGS. 6A and the like.

 トランジスタ200は、基板(図示しない)上に設けられた絶縁層201上に設けられた半導体層230と、半導体層230上の導電層242a、242bと、半導体層230上の絶縁層250と、絶縁層250上の導電層260と、を有する。また半導体層230、導電層242a、及び導電層242bを覆って絶縁層275が設けられ、絶縁層275上に絶縁層280が設けられている。絶縁層280及び絶縁層275には半導体層230に達する溝が設けられ、当該溝を境に導電層242aと導電層242bとが分断されている。絶縁層250は、当該溝の内部において、絶縁層280、絶縁層275、導電層242a、導電層242b、及び半導体層230の表面に沿って設けられている。導電層260は、当該溝を埋めるように、絶縁層250上に設けられている。また絶縁層280、絶縁層250、及び導電層260を覆って絶縁層282、絶縁層283、絶縁層285が順に設けられている。 Transistor 200 has a semiconductor layer 230 provided on an insulating layer 201 provided on a substrate (not shown), conductive layers 242a and 242b on the semiconductor layer 230, an insulating layer 250 on the semiconductor layer 230, and a conductive layer 260 on the insulating layer 250. An insulating layer 275 is provided covering the semiconductor layer 230, the conductive layer 242a, and the conductive layer 242b, and an insulating layer 280 is provided on the insulating layer 275. A groove is provided in the insulating layer 280 and the insulating layer 275, reaching the semiconductor layer 230, and the conductive layer 242a and the conductive layer 242b are separated by the groove. The insulating layer 250 is provided inside the groove along the surfaces of the insulating layer 280, the insulating layer 275, the conductive layer 242a, the conductive layer 242b, and the semiconductor layer 230. The conductive layer 260 is provided on the insulating layer 250 so as to fill the groove. In addition, insulating layer 282, insulating layer 283, and insulating layer 285 are provided in this order to cover insulating layer 280, insulating layer 250, and conductive layer 260.

 半導体層230は、トランジスタ200のチャネル形成領域としての機能を有する。また、導電層260は、トランジスタ200のゲート電極としての機能を有する。絶縁層250は、トランジスタ200のゲート絶縁体としての機能を有する。 The semiconductor layer 230 functions as a channel formation region of the transistor 200. The conductive layer 260 functions as a gate electrode of the transistor 200. The insulating layer 250 functions as a gate insulator of the transistor 200.

 導電層242aは、トランジスタ200のソース電極またはドレイン電極の一方として機能し、導電層242bは、その他方として機能する。 The conductive layer 242a functions as one of the source and drain electrodes of the transistor 200, and the conductive layer 242b functions as the other.

 導電層242a及び導電層242bは、積層構造を有することが好ましい。半導体層230と接する側には、金属窒化物などの酸化されにくい導電体を用いることが好ましい。これにより、半導体層230に含まれる酸素によって、導電層242a及び導電層242bが過剰に酸化されることを防ぐことができる。また、半導体層230と接しない側には、半導体層230と接する層より導電性の高い金属または合金を用いることが好ましい。これにより、導電層242a及び導電層242bを、導電性が高い配線または電極として機能させることができる。 The conductive layers 242a and 242b preferably have a stacked structure. A conductor that is resistant to oxidation, such as a metal nitride, is preferably used on the side in contact with the semiconductor layer 230. This prevents the conductive layers 242a and 242b from being excessively oxidized by oxygen contained in the semiconductor layer 230. Furthermore, a metal or alloy that is more conductive than the layer in contact with the semiconductor layer 230 is preferably used on the side that is not in contact with the semiconductor layer 230. This allows the conductive layers 242a and 242b to function as wiring or electrodes with high conductivity.

 導電層242a、242bにおいて、半導体層230と接する側には、金属窒化物を用いることが好ましく、例えば、タンタルを含む窒化物、チタンを含む窒化物、モリブデンを含む窒化物、タングステンを含む窒化物、タンタル及びアルミニウムを含む窒化物、チタン及びアルミニウムを含む窒化物などを用いることが好ましい。また、例えば、ルテニウム、酸化ルテニウム、窒化ルテニウム、ストロンチウムとルテニウムを含む酸化物、ランタンとニッケルを含む酸化物などを用いてもよい。これらの材料は、酸化されにくい導電性材料、または、酸素を吸収しても導電性を維持する材料であるため、好ましい。 In the conductive layers 242a and 242b, it is preferable to use a metal nitride on the side in contact with the semiconductor layer 230. For example, it is preferable to use a nitride containing tantalum, a nitride containing titanium, a nitride containing molybdenum, a nitride containing tungsten, a nitride containing tantalum and aluminum, or a nitride containing titanium and aluminum. It is also possible to use, for example, ruthenium, ruthenium oxide, ruthenium nitride, an oxide containing strontium and ruthenium, or an oxide containing lanthanum and nickel. These materials are preferable because they are conductive materials that are resistant to oxidation or that maintain their conductivity even when they absorb oxygen.

 絶縁層201は半導体層230と接する層であり、単結晶構造を有する材料を用いることができる。例えばYSZ、酸化ジルコニウム、シリコン、炭化シリコン、窒化ガリウム、酸化ガリウムなどの単結晶材料を用いることができる。特に、酸化ジルコニウム、またはYSZなどの酸化物絶縁材料を用いることが好ましい。また、酸化イットリウム、酸化エルビウム、酸化ガドリニウム、酸化イッテルビウムなどの希土類の酸化物及びランタノイドの酸化物を用いることもできる。特に半導体層230に酸化インジウムを用いる場合には、酸化イットリウムまたは酸化エルビウムを用いることが好ましい。 The insulating layer 201 is a layer in contact with the semiconductor layer 230, and can be made of a material having a single crystal structure. For example, single crystal materials such as YSZ, zirconium oxide, silicon, silicon carbide, gallium nitride, and gallium oxide can be used. In particular, it is preferable to use oxide insulating materials such as zirconium oxide or YSZ. It is also possible to use rare earth oxides and lanthanide oxides such as yttrium oxide, erbium oxide, gadolinium oxide, and ytterbium oxide. In particular, when indium oxide is used for the semiconductor layer 230, it is preferable to use yttrium oxide or erbium oxide.

 トランジスタ200の電気特性を安定にするためには、半導体層230中の不純物濃度を低減することが有効である。また、半導体層230の不純物濃度を低減するためには、近接する膜中の不純物濃度も低減することが好ましい。不純物としては、水素、窒素、アルカリ金属、アルカリ土類金属、鉄、ニッケル、シリコン等がある。なお、半導体層230中の不純物とは、例えば、半導体層230を構成する主成分以外をいう。例えば、濃度が0.1原子%未満の元素は不純物といえる。 In order to stabilize the electrical characteristics of the transistor 200, it is effective to reduce the impurity concentration in the semiconductor layer 230. Furthermore, in order to reduce the impurity concentration in the semiconductor layer 230, it is preferable to also reduce the impurity concentration in adjacent films. Examples of impurities include hydrogen, nitrogen, alkali metals, alkaline earth metals, iron, nickel, and silicon. Note that impurities in the semiconductor layer 230 refer to, for example, anything other than the main component that constitutes the semiconductor layer 230. For example, an element with a concentration of less than 0.1 atomic % can be considered an impurity.

 半導体層230には、半導体として機能する金属酸化物(以下、酸化物半導体ともいう)を用いることが好ましい。 It is preferable to use a metal oxide (hereinafter also referred to as an oxide semiconductor) that functions as a semiconductor for the semiconductor layer 230.

 半導体として機能する金属酸化物のバンドギャップは、2eV以上が好ましく、2.5eV以上がより好ましい。バンドギャップの大きい金属酸化物を用いることで、トランジスタのオフ電流を低減できる。このように、チャネル形成領域に金属酸化物を有するトランジスタをOSトランジスタと呼ぶ。OSトランジスタは、オフ電流が小さいため、半導体装置の消費電力を十分に低減できる。また、OSトランジスタの周波数特性が高いため、半導体装置を高速に動作させることができる。 The band gap of a metal oxide that functions as a semiconductor is preferably 2 eV or more, and more preferably 2.5 eV or more. By using a metal oxide with a wide band gap, the off-state current of a transistor can be reduced. A transistor that has a metal oxide in its channel formation region is called an OS transistor. Because OS transistors have a low off-state current, the power consumption of a semiconductor device can be sufficiently reduced. Furthermore, because OS transistors have high frequency characteristics, the semiconductor device can operate at high speed.

 半導体層230としては、酸化インジウムを用いることが好ましい。特に、単結晶の酸化インジウム膜を用いることが好ましい。なお、半導体層230は結晶性を有する膜を用いることが好ましく、単結晶構造の酸化インジウムを用いることが特に好ましいが、多結晶構造または微結晶構造を有する酸化インジウムを用いることもできる。単結晶構造を有する酸化インジウムを用いることで、結晶粒界におけるキャリア散乱等を抑制することができ、高い電界効果移動度のトランジスタを実現できる。また、信頼性の高いトランジスタを実現できる。 For the semiconductor layer 230, it is preferable to use indium oxide. In particular, it is preferable to use a single-crystal indium oxide film. Note that it is preferable to use a crystalline film for the semiconductor layer 230, and it is particularly preferable to use indium oxide with a single-crystal structure, but indium oxide with a polycrystalline structure or microcrystalline structure can also be used. By using indium oxide with a single-crystal structure, carrier scattering at crystal grain boundaries can be suppressed, making it possible to realize a transistor with high field-effect mobility. It also makes it possible to realize a highly reliable transistor.

 多結晶構造を有する酸化インジウムを用いる場合、少なくともチャネル形成領域(導電層260と重畳する領域)には、結晶粒界が観測されないことが好ましい。これにより、多結晶構造を有する酸化インジウムであっても、単結晶構造を有する場合と同様の効果を奏することができる。 When using indium oxide having a polycrystalline structure, it is preferable that no grain boundaries are observed at least in the channel formation region (the region overlapping with the conductive layer 260). This allows indium oxide having a polycrystalline structure to achieve the same effects as indium oxide having a single-crystalline structure.

 半導体層230の膜厚は、2nm以上50nm以下であることがより好ましく、2.5nm以上30nm以下であることがより好ましく、2.5nm以上20nm以下であることがより好ましく、5nm以上20nm以下であることがより好ましく、5nm以上10nm以下であることがさらに好ましい。半導体層230の膜厚を上記範囲とすることで、半導体層230の結晶性を高めることができる。 The film thickness of the semiconductor layer 230 is preferably 2 nm or more and 50 nm or less, more preferably 2.5 nm or more and 30 nm or less, more preferably 2.5 nm or more and 20 nm or less, more preferably 5 nm or more and 20 nm or less, and even more preferably 5 nm or more and 10 nm or less. By setting the film thickness of the semiconductor layer 230 within the above range, the crystallinity of the semiconductor layer 230 can be improved.

 結晶性の高い酸化物半導体のなかでも、酸化インジウムは、例えばIGZO(In−Ga−Zn−O系酸化物)膜と比較して、水素及び酸素の一方又は双方が移動しやすい膜である。よって、酸化インジウムは、例えばIGZO膜と比較して、水素及び酸素の一方又は双方が供給されやすく、且つ排出されやすい膜であるといえる。これにより、半導体層230中にキャリアまたは固定電荷となりうる過剰な酸素、または過剰な水素が蓄積されにくいといえるため、電気特性および信頼性の良好なトランジスタをとすることができる。 Among highly crystalline oxide semiconductors, indium oxide is a film in which hydrogen and/or oxygen move more easily than, for example, an IGZO (In-Ga-Zn-O-based oxide) film. Therefore, indium oxide is a film in which hydrogen and/or oxygen are more easily supplied and discharged than, for example, an IGZO film. This means that excess oxygen or excess hydrogen, which can become carriers or fixed charges, is less likely to accumulate in the semiconductor layer 230, resulting in a transistor with good electrical characteristics and reliability.

 半導体層230は、結晶性を低下させる元素の濃度が低減されていることが好ましい。例えば、ホウ素、アルミニウムなどの元素の濃度が、1atomic%以下であることが好ましく、0.1atomic%以下であることがより好ましく、0.01atomic%(100ppm)以下であることがさらに好ましい。 It is preferable that the semiconductor layer 230 has a reduced concentration of elements that reduce crystallinity. For example, the concentration of elements such as boron and aluminum is preferably 1 atomic % or less, more preferably 0.1 atomic % or less, and even more preferably 0.01 atomic % (100 ppm) or less.

 また、ガリウムは過剰な酸素原子と結合しやすい性質があるため、ガリウムを多く含有する場合には、PBTS(Positive Bias Temperature Stress)試験におけるしきい値電圧の変動量が大きくなる場合がある。そのため、半導体層230中のガリウム濃度は1atomic%以下であることが好ましく、0.1atomic%以下であることがより好ましく、0.01atomic%(100ppm)以下であることがさらに好ましい。 Furthermore, because gallium has the property of easily bonding with excess oxygen atoms, if the gallium content is high, the threshold voltage may fluctuate greatly in PBTS (Positive Bias Temperature Stress) testing. Therefore, the gallium concentration in the semiconductor layer 230 is preferably 1 atomic % or less, more preferably 0.1 atomic % or less, and even more preferably 0.01 atomic % (100 ppm) or less.

 そのほか、半導体層230に用いることができる金属酸化物として、酸化スズ、酸化亜鉛、インジウム錫酸化物、インジウムチタン酸化物、インジウムガリウム酸化物、インジウムガリウムアルミニウム酸化物、インジウムガリウム錫酸化物、ガリウム亜鉛酸化物、アルミニウム亜鉛酸化物、インジウムアルミニウム亜鉛酸化物、インジウム錫亜鉛酸化物、インジウムチタン亜鉛酸化物、インジウムガリウム亜鉛酸化物、インジウムガリウム錫亜鉛酸化物、インジウムガリウムアルミニウム亜鉛酸化物などを用いることもできる。または、シリコンを含むインジウム錫酸化物、ガリウム錫酸化物、アルミニウム錫酸化物などを用いることもできる。これらを用いる場合には、少なくとも結晶性を有する膜であることが好ましく、単結晶構造を有することがより好ましい。 Other metal oxides that can be used for the semiconductor layer 230 include tin oxide, zinc oxide, indium tin oxide, indium titanium oxide, indium gallium oxide, indium gallium aluminum oxide, indium gallium tin oxide, gallium zinc oxide, aluminum zinc oxide, indium aluminum zinc oxide, indium tin zinc oxide, indium titanium zinc oxide, indium gallium zinc oxide, indium gallium tin zinc oxide, and indium gallium aluminum zinc oxide. Alternatively, silicon-containing indium tin oxide, gallium tin oxide, aluminum tin oxide, and the like can also be used. When using these, it is preferable that the film has at least some crystallinity, and more preferably has a single crystal structure.

 ゲート絶縁層として機能する絶縁層250は、水素を捕獲及び水素を固着する機能を有することが好ましい。これにより、半導体層230のチャネル形成領域中の水素濃度を低減できる。これによりチャネル形成領域をi型または実質的にi型とすることができる。 The insulating layer 250, which functions as a gate insulating layer, preferably has the function of capturing and fixing hydrogen. This reduces the hydrogen concentration in the channel formation region of the semiconductor layer 230. This allows the channel formation region to be i-type or substantially i-type.

 ここで、絶縁層250は、半導体層230に接する第1の層と、第1の層上の第2の層と、第2の層上の第3の層の積層構造とすることが好ましい。この場合、第1の層が水素を捕獲及び水素を固着する機能を有することが好ましい。 Here, it is preferable that the insulating layer 250 has a laminated structure of a first layer in contact with the semiconductor layer 230, a second layer on the first layer, and a third layer on the second layer. In this case, it is preferable that the first layer has the function of capturing and fixing hydrogen.

 水素を捕獲及び水素を固着する機能を有する絶縁体として、アモルファス構造を有する金属酸化物が挙げられる。第1の層として、例えば、酸化マグネシウム、もしくはアルミニウム及びハフニウムの一方または双方を含む酸化物などの金属酸化物を用いることが好ましい。このようなアモルファス構造を有する金属酸化物では、酸素原子がダングリングボンドを有しており、当該ダングリングボンドで水素を捕獲または固着する性質を有する場合がある。つまり、アモルファス構造を有する金属酸化物は、水素を捕獲または固着する能力が高いといえる。 An example of an insulator capable of capturing and fixing hydrogen is a metal oxide with an amorphous structure. For the first layer, it is preferable to use a metal oxide such as magnesium oxide or an oxide containing one or both of aluminum and hafnium. In such metal oxides with an amorphous structure, oxygen atoms have dangling bonds, and these dangling bonds may have the ability to capture or fix hydrogen. In other words, metal oxides with an amorphous structure have a high ability to capture or fix hydrogen.

 また、第1の層に、高誘電率(high−k)材料を用いることが好ましい。なお、high−k材料の一例として、アルミニウム及びハフニウムの一方または双方を含む酸化物がある。第1の層としてhigh−k材料を用いることで、ゲート絶縁体の物理膜厚を保持したまま、トランジスタ動作時に印加するゲート電位の低減化が可能となる。また、ゲート絶縁体として機能する絶縁体の等価酸化膜厚(EOT)の薄膜化が可能となる。 It is also preferable to use a high-dielectric constant (high-k) material for the first layer. An example of a high-k material is an oxide containing one or both of aluminum and hafnium. Using a high-k material for the first layer makes it possible to reduce the gate potential applied during transistor operation while maintaining the physical thickness of the gate insulator. It also makes it possible to reduce the equivalent oxide thickness (EOT) of the insulator that functions as the gate insulator.

 第1の層として、アルミニウム及びハフニウムの一方または双方を含む酸化物を用いることが好ましく、アモルファス構造を有し、アルミニウム及びハフニウムの一方または双方を含む酸化物を用いることがより好ましく、アモルファス構造を有する酸化アルミニウムを用いることがさらに好ましい。 For the first layer, it is preferable to use an oxide containing one or both of aluminum and hafnium, more preferably an oxide having an amorphous structure and containing one or both of aluminum and hafnium, and even more preferably aluminum oxide having an amorphous structure.

 次に、第2の層は、酸化シリコンまたは酸化窒化シリコンなどの、熱に対し安定な構造の絶縁体を用いることが好ましい。 Next, the second layer is preferably made of an insulator with a thermally stable structure, such as silicon oxide or silicon oxynitride.

 また、第2の層上に第4の層を設ける構造にしてもよい。この場合、第4の層としては、第1の層に用いることができる絶縁体を設けることができる。例えば、第4の層として、酸化ハフニウムを用いることができる。ここで、第3の層と第2の層の間に、第4の層を設けることにより、第2の層などに含まれる水素を、より効果的に捕獲及び固着させることができる。 Alternatively, a fourth layer may be provided on the second layer. In this case, the fourth layer may be an insulator that can be used for the first layer. For example, hafnium oxide may be used for the fourth layer. Here, by providing the fourth layer between the third and second layers, hydrogen contained in the second layer, etc., can be more effectively captured and fixed.

 第3の層は、酸素に対するバリア性を有することが好ましい。第3の層は半導体層230のチャネル形成領域と導電層260との間、及び絶縁層280と導電層260との間に設けられている。当該構成にすることで、半導体層230のチャネル形成領域に含まれる酸素が導電層260へ拡散し、半導体層230のチャネル形成領域に酸素欠損が形成されることを抑制できる。また、半導体層230に含まれる酸素及び絶縁層280に含まれる酸素が導電層260へ拡散し、導電層260が酸化することを抑制できる。第3の層は、少なくとも絶縁層280よりも酸素を透過しにくいことが好ましい。例えば、第3の層として、窒化シリコン膜を用いることが好ましい。この場合、第3の層は、少なくとも窒素と、シリコンと、を有する絶縁体となる。 The third layer preferably has barrier properties against oxygen. The third layer is provided between the channel formation region of the semiconductor layer 230 and the conductive layer 260, and between the insulating layer 280 and the conductive layer 260. This structure prevents oxygen contained in the channel formation region of the semiconductor layer 230 from diffusing into the conductive layer 260 and forming oxygen vacancies in the channel formation region of the semiconductor layer 230. It also prevents oxygen contained in the semiconductor layer 230 and oxygen contained in the insulating layer 280 from diffusing into the conductive layer 260 and oxidizing the conductive layer 260. The third layer preferably has a lower oxygen permeability than the insulating layer 280. For example, it is preferable to use a silicon nitride film as the third layer. In this case, the third layer is an insulator containing at least nitrogen and silicon.

 さらに、第3の層は、水素に対するバリア性を有することが好ましい。これにより、導電層260に含まれる水素などの不純物が、半導体層230に拡散することを防ぐことができる。 Furthermore, it is preferable that the third layer has barrier properties against hydrogen. This prevents impurities such as hydrogen contained in the conductive layer 260 from diffusing into the semiconductor layer 230.

 絶縁層275は、酸素に対するバリア性を有することが好ましい。絶縁層275は、絶縁層280と導電層242aとの間、及び、絶縁層280と導電層242bとの間に設けられている。当該構成にすることで、絶縁層280に含まれる酸素が導電層242a及び導電層242bに拡散することを抑制できる。したがって、絶縁層280に含まれる酸素によって、導電層242a及び導電層242bが酸化されて抵抗率が増大し、オン電流が低減することを抑制できる。絶縁層275は、少なくとも絶縁層280よりも酸素を透過しにくいことが好ましい。例えば、絶縁層275として、窒化シリコンを用いることが好ましい。この場合、絶縁層275は、少なくとも窒素と、シリコンと、を有する絶縁体となる。 The insulating layer 275 preferably has barrier properties against oxygen. The insulating layer 275 is provided between the insulating layer 280 and the conductive layer 242a, and between the insulating layer 280 and the conductive layer 242b. This configuration prevents oxygen contained in the insulating layer 280 from diffusing into the conductive layer 242a and the conductive layer 242b. This prevents the conductive layer 242a and the conductive layer 242b from being oxidized by the oxygen contained in the insulating layer 280, increasing their resistivity and reducing their on-current. The insulating layer 275 is preferably at least less permeable to oxygen than the insulating layer 280. For example, it is preferable to use silicon nitride as the insulating layer 275. In this case, the insulating layer 275 becomes an insulator containing at least nitrogen and silicon.

 また、本実施の形態では、半導体装置を、上記構成に加えて、水素がトランジスタ200等に混入することを抑制する構成とすることが好ましい。例えば、水素の拡散を抑制する機能を有する絶縁体を、トランジスタ200を覆うように設けることが好ましい。本実施の形態で説明する半導体装置において、当該絶縁体は、例えば、絶縁層282及び絶縁層283などである。また、トランジスタ200の下に同様の膜を設けてもよい。 Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to the above structure, the semiconductor device preferably has a structure that prevents hydrogen from being mixed into the transistor 200, etc. For example, it is preferable to provide an insulator that has the function of preventing hydrogen diffusion so as to cover the transistor 200. In the semiconductor device described in this embodiment, the insulator is, for example, insulating layer 282 or insulating layer 283. Furthermore, a similar film may be provided under the transistor 200.

 絶縁層282、及び絶縁層283のうち一つまたは複数は、水、水素などの不純物が、トランジスタ200等の上方からトランジスタ200等に拡散することを抑制するバリア絶縁体として機能することが好ましい。したがって、絶縁層282、及び絶縁層283のうち一つまたは複数は、水素原子、水素分子、水分子、窒素原子、窒素分子、酸化窒素分子(NO、NO、NOなど)、銅原子などの不純物の拡散を抑制する機能を有する(上記不純物が透過しにくい)絶縁性材料を有することが好ましい。または、酸素(例えば、酸素原子、及び酸素分子などの少なくとも一)の拡散を抑制する機能を有する(上記酸素が透過しにくい)絶縁性材料を有することが好ましい。 One or more of the insulating layers 282 and 283 preferably function as a barrier insulator that suppresses diffusion of impurities such as water and hydrogen from above the transistor 200 to the transistor 200. Therefore, one or more of the insulating layers 282 and 283 preferably include an insulating material that has a function of suppressing diffusion of impurities such as hydrogen atoms, hydrogen molecules, water molecules, nitrogen atoms, nitrogen molecules, nitrogen oxide molecules (such as N2O , NO, and NO2 ), and copper atoms (through which the impurities are less likely to permeate). Alternatively, it is preferable to include an insulating material that has a function of suppressing diffusion of oxygen (for example, at least one of oxygen atoms and oxygen molecules) (through which the oxygen is less likely to permeate).

 絶縁層282、及び絶縁層283は、それぞれ、水、水素などの不純物、及び酸素の拡散を抑制する機能を有する絶縁体を有することが好ましく、例えば、酸化アルミニウム、酸化マグネシウム、酸化ハフニウム、酸化ガリウム、窒化シリコン、または窒化酸化シリコンなどを用いることができる。例えば、絶縁層283として、より水素バリア性が高い、窒化シリコンなどを用いることが好ましい。また、例えば、絶縁層282は、それぞれ、水素を捕獲及び水素を固着する機能が高い、酸化アルミニウムまたは酸化マグネシウムなどを有することが好ましい。これにより、水、水素などの不純物が絶縁層283よりも外側に配置されている層間絶縁膜などから、トランジスタ200等に拡散することを抑制できる。また、絶縁層280などに含まれる酸素が、絶縁層282などを介してトランジスタ200等より上方に拡散することを抑制できる。また、トランジスタ200の下方にも、絶縁層282及び絶縁層283の一方または両方と同様の膜を設けることで、水、水素などの不純物が基板側からトランジスタ200等に拡散することを抑制できる。 The insulating layers 282 and 283 each preferably contain an insulator that suppresses the diffusion of impurities such as water and hydrogen, and oxygen. For example, aluminum oxide, magnesium oxide, hafnium oxide, gallium oxide, silicon nitride, or silicon nitride oxide can be used. For example, the insulating layer 283 is preferably made of silicon nitride, which has excellent hydrogen barrier properties. The insulating layer 282 also preferably contains aluminum oxide or magnesium oxide, which has excellent hydrogen capture and fixation properties. This can suppress the diffusion of impurities such as water and hydrogen from interlayer insulating films disposed outside the insulating layer 283 to the transistor 200, etc. The diffusion of oxygen contained in the insulating layer 280, etc., through the insulating layer 282, etc., above the transistor 200, etc., can be suppressed. Furthermore, providing a film similar to one or both of the insulating layers 282 and 283 below the transistor 200 can suppress the diffusion of impurities such as water and hydrogen from the substrate side to the transistor 200, etc.

 絶縁層271a及び絶縁層271bは、導電層242a及び導電層242bの加工時にエッチングストッパとして機能し、導電層242a及び導電層242bを保護する無機絶縁体である。また、絶縁層271aと絶縁層271bは、それぞれ導電層242a、導電層242bに接するため、導電層242a、242bを酸化させにくい、無機絶縁体であることが好ましい。例えば、絶縁層271a及び絶縁層271bを積層構造とし、導電層242a、242bと接する側に窒化シリコンを用い、それ以外に酸化シリコンを用いる構成とすることもできる。 Insulating layers 271a and 271b are inorganic insulators that function as etching stoppers when conductive layers 242a and 242b are processed, protecting conductive layers 242a and 242b. Furthermore, since insulating layers 271a and 271b are in contact with conductive layers 242a and 242b, respectively, they are preferably inorganic insulators that do not easily oxidize conductive layers 242a and 242b. For example, insulating layers 271a and 271b may have a stacked structure, with silicon nitride used on the side in contact with conductive layers 242a and 242b and silicon oxide used elsewhere.

 絶縁層285、絶縁層283、絶縁層282、絶縁層280、絶縁層275、及び絶縁層271aに導電層242aに達する開口が形成されており、当該開口内に導電層240a及び絶縁層241aが設けられている。当該開口の側壁に接して絶縁層241aが設けられており、絶縁層241aの内側に導電層240aが設けられている。また、絶縁層285、絶縁層283、絶縁層282、絶縁層280、絶縁層275、及び絶縁層271bに導電層242bに達する開口が形成されており、当該開口内に導電層240b及び絶縁層241bが設けられている。当該開口の側壁に接して絶縁層241bが設けられており、絶縁層241bの内側に導電層240bが設けられている。導電層240a及び導電層240bは、トランジスタ200上に設けられた配線等と、トランジスタ200のソースまたはドレインとを接続するビアとして機能する。 Openings reaching conductive layer 242a are formed in insulating layer 285, insulating layer 283, insulating layer 282, insulating layer 280, insulating layer 275, and insulating layer 271a, and conductive layer 240a and insulating layer 241a are provided within the openings. Insulating layer 241a is provided in contact with the sidewalls of the openings, and conductive layer 240a is provided inside insulating layer 241a. Furthermore, openings reaching conductive layer 242b are formed in insulating layer 285, insulating layer 283, insulating layer 282, insulating layer 280, insulating layer 275, and insulating layer 271b, and conductive layer 240b and insulating layer 241b are provided within the openings. Insulating layer 241b is provided in contact with the sidewalls of the openings, and conductive layer 240b is provided inside insulating layer 241b. The conductive layers 240a and 240b function as vias that connect wiring or the like provided on the transistor 200 to the source or drain of the transistor 200.

 導電層240a及び導電層240bは、例えば、タングステン、銅、またはアルミニウムを主成分とする導電性材料を用いることが好ましい。また、導電層240aおよび導電層240bは積層構造としてもよい。 Conductive layer 240a and conductive layer 240b are preferably made of a conductive material whose main component is, for example, tungsten, copper, or aluminum. Conductive layer 240a and conductive layer 240b may also have a layered structure.

 例えば、図7に示すように、導電層240a及び導電層240bを2層の積層構造にしてもよい。導電層240aは、開口に沿って形成された導電層240a1と、導電層240a1の内部に形成された導電層240a2を有する。また、導電層240bは、開口に沿って形成された導電層240b1と、導電層240b1の内部に形成された導電層240b2を有する。 For example, as shown in FIG. 7, conductive layer 240a and conductive layer 240b may have a two-layer laminated structure. Conductive layer 240a has conductive layer 240a1 formed along the opening and conductive layer 240a2 formed inside conductive layer 240a1. Conductive layer 240b has conductive layer 240b1 formed along the opening and conductive layer 240b2 formed inside conductive layer 240b1.

 導電層240a1及び導電層240b1には、水、水素などの不純物の透過を抑制する機能を有するタンタル、窒化タンタル、チタン、窒化チタン、ルテニウム、酸化ルテニウムなどの導電性材料を用いることが好ましい。また、水、水素などの不純物の透過を抑制する機能を有する導電性材料は、単層または積層で用いてもよい。導電層240a1及び導電層240b1を設けることで、水、水素などの不純物が、導電層240a2及び導電層240b2を通じて半導体層230に混入することを抑制することができる。なお、導電層240a2及び導電層240b2は、上記の導電層240a及び導電層240bに用いることが可能な導電性材料を用いればよい。 Conductive layers 240a1 and 240b1 are preferably made of a conductive material such as tantalum, tantalum nitride, titanium, titanium nitride, ruthenium, or ruthenium oxide, which has the function of suppressing the permeation of impurities such as water and hydrogen. Furthermore, conductive materials that have the function of suppressing the permeation of impurities such as water and hydrogen may be used in a single layer or a stacked layer. Providing conductive layers 240a1 and 240b1 can suppress impurities such as water and hydrogen from entering the semiconductor layer 230 through conductive layers 240a2 and 240b2. Note that conductive layers 240a2 and 240b2 may be made of the same conductive materials that can be used for the conductive layers 240a and 240b described above.

 また、図6Bに示すように、導電層240a及び導電層240bの上面は、絶縁層285の上面と、一致または略一致するように形成することができる。また、図7に示すように、導電層240aの下部が導電層242aに埋め込まれるように形成される場合がある。同様に、導電層240bの下部が導電層242bに埋め込まれるように形成される場合がある。 Also, as shown in FIG. 6B, the upper surfaces of conductive layer 240a and conductive layer 240b can be formed so that they coincide or nearly coincide with the upper surface of insulating layer 285. Also, as shown in FIG. 7, the lower part of conductive layer 240a may be formed so that it is embedded in conductive layer 242a. Similarly, the lower part of conductive layer 240b may be formed so that it is embedded in conductive layer 242b.

 絶縁層241a及び絶縁層241bとしては、絶縁層275などに用いることができるバリア絶縁体を用いればよい。例えば、絶縁層241a及び絶縁層241bとして、窒化シリコンを用いればよい。絶縁層241aと絶縁層241bは、それぞれ絶縁層285、絶縁層283、絶縁層282、及び絶縁層275、ならびに絶縁層271aまたは絶縁層271bに接して設けられている。これにより、絶縁層280などに含まれる水、水素などの不純物が、導電層240a及び導電層240bを通じて半導体層230に混入することを抑制することができる。特に、窒化シリコンは水素に対するブロッキング性が高いので好適である。また、絶縁層280に含まれる酸素が導電層240a及び導電層240bに吸収されるのを防ぐことができる。 The insulating layers 241a and 241b may be made of a barrier insulator that can be used for the insulating layer 275, etc. For example, silicon nitride may be used for the insulating layers 241a and 241b. The insulating layers 241a and 241b are provided in contact with the insulating layers 285, 283, 282, and 275, as well as the insulating layers 271a and 271b, respectively. This prevents impurities such as water and hydrogen contained in the insulating layer 280 from entering the semiconductor layer 230 through the conductive layers 240a and 240b. Silicon nitride is particularly suitable because it has high blocking properties against hydrogen. It also prevents oxygen contained in the insulating layer 280 from being absorbed by the conductive layers 240a and 240b.

 導電層260は、トランジスタ200のゲート電極として機能する。ここで、導電層260は、図6A、及び図6Cに示すように、チャネル幅方向に延在して設けられることが好ましい。このような構成にすることで、複数のトランジスタを設ける場合に、導電層260は配線として機能する。 The conductive layer 260 functions as the gate electrode of the transistor 200. Here, as shown in Figures 6A and 6C, the conductive layer 260 is preferably provided so as to extend in the channel width direction. With this configuration, when multiple transistors are provided, the conductive layer 260 functions as wiring.

 導電層260は積層構造を有していてもよい。図7には、導電層260が、絶縁層250と接する側に位置する導電層260aと、その上の導電層260bとを有する例を示している。このとき、導電層260aには、チタン、窒化チタン、タンタル、窒化タンタル、ルテニウム、酸化ルテニウムなどの酸化されにくい導電性材料、または、酸素の拡散を抑制する機能を有する導電性材料を用いることが好ましい。また導電層260bには、タングステン、銅、またはアルミニウムなどの低抵抗な導電性材料を用いることが好ましい。 The conductive layer 260 may have a layered structure. Figure 7 shows an example in which the conductive layer 260 has a conductive layer 260a located on the side in contact with the insulating layer 250 and a conductive layer 260b above it. In this case, it is preferable to use a conductive material that is resistant to oxidation, such as titanium, titanium nitride, tantalum, tantalum nitride, ruthenium, or ruthenium oxide, or a conductive material that has the function of suppressing oxygen diffusion, for the conductive layer 260a. It is also preferable to use a low-resistance conductive material such as tungsten, copper, or aluminum for the conductive layer 260b.

 絶縁層280は、比誘電率が低いことが好ましい。比誘電率が低い材料を層間膜とすることで、配線間に生じる寄生容量を低減できる。例えば、絶縁層280は、酸化シリコン、酸化窒化シリコン、フッ素を添加した酸化シリコン、炭素を添加した酸化シリコン、炭素及び窒素を添加した酸化シリコン、及び、空孔を有する酸化シリコンのうち一つまたは複数を有することが好ましい。酸化シリコン及び酸化窒化シリコンは、熱的に安定であるため好ましい。特に、酸化シリコン、酸化窒化シリコン、空孔を有する酸化シリコンなどの材料は、加熱により脱離する酸素を含む領域を容易に形成することができるため好ましい。 The insulating layer 280 preferably has a low dielectric constant. Using a material with a low dielectric constant as the interlayer film reduces the parasitic capacitance that occurs between wiring. For example, the insulating layer 280 preferably contains one or more of silicon oxide, silicon oxynitride, silicon oxide doped with fluorine, silicon oxide doped with carbon, silicon oxide doped with carbon and nitrogen, and silicon oxide with vacancies. Silicon oxide and silicon oxynitride are preferred because they are thermally stable. Materials such as silicon oxide, silicon oxynitride, and silicon oxide with vacancies are particularly preferred because they allow for the easy formation of regions containing oxygen that is released by heating.

[変形例]
 以下では、上記構成例とは一部の構成が異なる例について説明する。なお以下では、上記と重複する部分については説明を省略する。
[Modification]
The following describes an example in which the configuration is partially different from the above example, and the description of the same parts as above will be omitted.

〔変形例1〕
 図8には、バックゲートとして機能する導電層205を、トランジスタ200が有する例を示している。図8に示す構成は導電層205と、絶縁層202を有する。
[Variation 1]
8 illustrates an example in which the transistor 200 includes a conductive layer 205 that functions as a back gate. The structure illustrated in FIG. 8 includes the conductive layer 205 and the insulating layer 202.

 導電層205は絶縁層202に埋め込まれるように設けられている。絶縁層201は、絶縁層202及び導電層205を覆って設けられている。 The conductive layer 205 is embedded in the insulating layer 202. The insulating layer 201 is provided to cover the insulating layer 202 and the conductive layer 205.

 導電層205は、トランジスタ200の第2のゲート(バックゲート)として機能する。導電層205は、半導体層230を介して導電層260と重なる領域に設けられている。導電層205を設け、導電層205に適当な電位を与えることによりトランジスタ200のしきい値電圧を制御することができる。さらに半導体層230のバックチャネル側の電位を固定することができるため、トランジスタ200の電気特性のばらつきを減らすことができる。また、導電層205は、導電層242a、導電層242b、または導電層260のいずれか一つと同一の電位または信号が与えられてもよい。 The conductive layer 205 functions as a second gate (back gate) of the transistor 200. The conductive layer 205 is provided in a region that overlaps with the conductive layer 260 with the semiconductor layer 230 interposed therebetween. By providing the conductive layer 205 and applying an appropriate potential to the conductive layer 205, the threshold voltage of the transistor 200 can be controlled. Furthermore, since the potential on the back channel side of the semiconductor layer 230 can be fixed, variation in the electrical characteristics of the transistor 200 can be reduced. The conductive layer 205 may be applied with the same potential or signal as any one of the conductive layer 242a, the conductive layer 242b, and the conductive layer 260.

 導電層205は、導電層260に用いることのできる材料を適用することができる。また、導電層205は積層構造を有していてもよい。 The conductive layer 205 can be made of any material that can be used for the conductive layer 260. The conductive layer 205 may also have a layered structure.

 このとき、絶縁層201は第2のゲート絶縁層として機能する。 In this case, the insulating layer 201 functions as a second gate insulating layer.

 絶縁層202は酸化シリコン膜を用いることができる。なお、絶縁層202と導電層205との間に、酸素に対するバリア性を有する、窒化シリコン、酸化アルミニウムなどの絶縁膜を設けると、導電層205の酸化を抑制できるため好ましい。 A silicon oxide film can be used for the insulating layer 202. Note that it is preferable to provide an insulating film, such as silicon nitride or aluminum oxide, that has barrier properties against oxygen between the insulating layer 202 and the conductive layer 205, because this can prevent oxidation of the conductive layer 205.

〔変形例2〕
 図9A乃至図9Dには、上記と一部の構成の異なるトランジスタ200の構成例を示している。図9Aは上面図であり、図9B乃至図9Dはそれぞれ断面図である。図9A乃至図9Dに示す構成は、絶縁層255を有する点で、主に上記構成と相違している。また、絶縁層250は、絶縁層255の側面に接する。
[Variation 2]
9A to 9D show examples of a transistor 200 that is partially different from the above-described structure. FIG. 9A is a top view, and FIGS. 9B to 9D are cross-sectional views, respectively. The structures shown in FIGS. 9A to 9D differ from the above-described structure mainly in that an insulating layer 255 is included. Furthermore, the insulating layer 250 is in contact with a side surface of the insulating layer 255.

 なお、ここでは、導電層242a及び導電層242bのそれぞれを2層構造で示す。導電層242aは、導電層242a1と、導電層242a1上の導電層242a2との積層構造を有する。導電層242bは、導電層242b1と、導電層242b1上の導電層242b2との積層構造を有する。 Note that here, each of the conductive layers 242a and 242b is shown as having a two-layer structure. The conductive layer 242a has a stacked structure of a conductive layer 242a1 and a conductive layer 242a2 on the conductive layer 242a1. The conductive layer 242b has a stacked structure of a conductive layer 242b1 and a conductive layer 242b2 on the conductive layer 242b1.

 絶縁層255は、絶縁層280等に形成された開口部の内部に配置され、当該開口部における、絶縁層280の側面、導電層242a2の側面、導電層242b2の側面、導電層242a1の上面、導電層242b1の上面、及び絶縁層201の上面に接する。言い換えると、絶縁層255は、絶縁層280等に形成された開口部の側壁に接してサイドウォール状に形成されているということもできる。ここで、開口部の側壁とは、例えば、当該開口部における絶縁層280等の側面に対応する。 Insulating layer 255 is disposed inside an opening formed in insulating layer 280 or the like, and contacts the side of insulating layer 280, the side of conductive layer 242a2, the side of conductive layer 242b2, the top surface of conductive layer 242a1, the top surface of conductive layer 242b1, and the top surface of insulating layer 201 in the opening. In other words, insulating layer 255 can be said to be formed in the shape of a sidewall, contacting the side wall of the opening formed in insulating layer 280 or the like. Here, the side wall of the opening corresponds, for example, to the side of insulating layer 280 or the like in the opening.

 絶縁層255は、酸素に対するバリア性を有することが好ましい。絶縁層255が酸素に対するバリア性を有することで、導電層242a及び導電層242bの側面が酸化され、当該側面に酸化膜が形成されることを抑制できる。これにより、トランジスタ200のオン電流の低下、または電界効果移動度の低下を起こすことを抑制できる。絶縁層255としては、絶縁層275などに用いることができるバリア絶縁体を用いることができる。例えば、絶縁層255として、窒化シリコンを用いればよい。 The insulating layer 255 preferably has a barrier property against oxygen. The insulating layer 255 having a barrier property against oxygen can prevent the side surfaces of the conductive layer 242a and the conductive layer 242b from being oxidized and an oxide film from being formed on the side surfaces. This can prevent a decrease in the on-state current or the field-effect mobility of the transistor 200. The insulating layer 255 can be made of a barrier insulator that can be used for the insulating layer 275, for example. For example, silicon nitride can be used for the insulating layer 255.

 絶縁層280に設けられた開口部は、導電層242a2と導電層242b2の間の領域と重なる。上面視において、上記開口部における、絶縁層280の側面は、導電層242a2の側面、及び導電層242b2の側面と一致または略一致する。また、導電層242a1及び導電層242b1の一部は、上記開口部の内側に突出するように形成されている。別言すると、導電層242a1において、上面に絶縁層255が形成された部分(以下、導電層242a1の突出部と呼ぶ場合がある。)は、導電層242a2より、導電層260側に突出して形成される。同様に、導電層242b1において、上面に絶縁層255が形成された部分(以下、導電層242b1の突出部と呼ぶ場合がある。)は、導電層242b2より、導電層260側に突出して形成される。 The opening in insulating layer 280 overlaps the region between conductive layer 242a2 and conductive layer 242b2. In a top view, the side surfaces of insulating layer 280 at the opening coincide or substantially coincide with the side surfaces of conductive layer 242a2 and conductive layer 242b2. Furthermore, portions of conductive layer 242a1 and conductive layer 242b1 are formed to protrude into the opening. In other words, the portion of conductive layer 242a1 on which insulating layer 255 is formed (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the protruding portion of conductive layer 242a1) protrudes toward conductive layer 260 beyond conductive layer 242a2. Similarly, the portion of conductive layer 242b1 on which insulating layer 255 is formed (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the protruding portion of conductive layer 242b1) protrudes toward conductive layer 260 beyond conductive layer 242b2.

 ここで、導電層242a1の上面の一部が、導電層242a2に接し、導電層242b1の上面の一部が、導電層242b2に接する。よって、絶縁層255は、上記開口部の内側で、導電層242a1の上面の他の一部、導電層242b1の上面の他の一部、導電層242a2の側面、及び導電層242b2の側面に接する。また、絶縁層250は、半導体層230の上面、導電層242a1の側面、導電層242b1の側面、及び絶縁層255の側面に接する。 Here, a portion of the upper surface of conductive layer 242a1 contacts conductive layer 242a2, and a portion of the upper surface of conductive layer 242b1 contacts conductive layer 242b2. Therefore, inside the opening, insulating layer 255 contacts another portion of the upper surface of conductive layer 242a1, another portion of the upper surface of conductive layer 242b1, the side surface of conductive layer 242a2, and the side surface of conductive layer 242b2. Furthermore, insulating layer 250 contacts the upper surface of semiconductor layer 230, the side surface of conductive layer 242a1, the side surface of conductive layer 242b1, and the side surface of insulating layer 255.

 絶縁層255は異方性エッチングを用いて、絶縁層280に設けられた開口部の側壁に接して、サイドウォール状に形成される。絶縁層255は、導電層242a2の側面、及び導電層242b2の側面に接して形成されており、導電層242a2、及び導電層242b2を保護する機能を有する。 The insulating layer 255 is formed in a sidewall shape by anisotropic etching, in contact with the sidewall of the opening provided in the insulating layer 280. The insulating layer 255 is formed in contact with the side surface of the conductive layer 242a2 and the side surface of the conductive layer 242b2, and functions to protect the conductive layer 242a2 and the conductive layer 242b2.

〔変形例3〕
 図10A乃至図10Dに、以下で例示するトランジスタ200の構成例を示している。図10A乃至図10Dに示す構成は、絶縁層255を有さない点で、主に上記変形例2と相違している。
[Variation 3]
10A to 10D show examples of the structure of a transistor 200. The structure shown in FIG. 10A to 10D differs from the second modification mainly in that the insulating layer 255 is not provided.

 絶縁層255を設けない構成にする場合、導電層242a1の突出部、及び導電層242b1の突出部に重なって、絶縁層250の一部が配置される。また、導電層242a1の突出部、及び導電層242b1の突出部に重なって、導電層260の一部が配置される場合もある。ここで、導電層242a1の突出部、及び導電層242b1の突出部は、絶縁層250に接する。また、絶縁層250の側面が絶縁層280の側面、導電層242a2の側面、及び導電層242b2の側面に接する。 In a configuration in which insulating layer 255 is not provided, a portion of insulating layer 250 is arranged overlapping the protruding portions of conductive layer 242a1 and conductive layer 242b1. Also, a portion of conductive layer 260 may be arranged overlapping the protruding portions of conductive layer 242a1 and conductive layer 242b1. Here, the protruding portions of conductive layer 242a1 and conductive layer 242b1 contact insulating layer 250. Furthermore, the side of insulating layer 250 contacts the side of insulating layer 280, the side of conductive layer 242a2, and the side of conductive layer 242b2.

 絶縁層250の、絶縁層280に設けられた開口部に配置される部分は、当該開口部の形状を反映して形成される。よって、絶縁層250は、当該開口部内に突出した導電層242a1及び導電層242b1の形状を反映して形成される。 The portion of insulating layer 250 that is placed in the opening provided in insulating layer 280 is formed to reflect the shape of the opening. Therefore, insulating layer 250 is formed to reflect the shapes of conductive layer 242a1 and conductive layer 242b1 that protrude into the opening.

 図10Bに示すように、トランジスタ200のチャネル長方向の断面視において、導電層242a1と導電層242b1の間の距離は、導電層242a2と導電層242b2の間の距離より小さい。このような構成にすることで、ソースとドレインの間の距離をより短くし、それに応じてチャネル長を短くすることが可能になる。よって、トランジスタ200の周波数特性を向上させることができる。このように、半導体装置の微細化を図ることで、動作速度の向上した半導体装置を提供できる。 As shown in Figure 10B, in a cross-sectional view of transistor 200 in the channel length direction, the distance between conductive layer 242a1 and conductive layer 242b1 is smaller than the distance between conductive layer 242a2 and conductive layer 242b2. This configuration makes it possible to shorten the distance between the source and drain, and accordingly shorten the channel length. This improves the frequency characteristics of transistor 200. In this way, miniaturization of semiconductor devices can provide semiconductor devices with improved operating speeds.

[作製方法例]
 以下では、本発明の一態様のトランジスタの作製方法の一例について説明する。ここでは、上記「半導体装置の構成例」及び図6等で例示したトランジスタ200を例に挙げて説明する。
[Example of manufacturing method]
An example of a method for manufacturing a transistor of one embodiment of the present invention will be described below, taking the transistor 200 illustrated in the above "Structure example of a semiconductor device" and in FIGS.

 図11A1、図11B1、図11C1、図11D1、図12A1、図12B1、及び図12C1は、以下で例示する作製方法例の各段階における断面概略図であり、図11A2、図11B2、図11C2、図11D2、図12A2、図12B2、及び図12C2は、斜視図である。なお、斜視図については一部を切り欠いて示している。また斜視図には、一部の構成要素(絶縁層など)については、輪郭のみ破線で示している。 11A1, 11B1, 11C1, 11D1, 12A1, 12B1, and 12C1 are schematic cross-sectional views at each stage of the exemplary fabrication method illustrated below, while 11A2, 11B2, 11C2, 11D2, 12A2, 12B2, and 12C2 are perspective views. Note that the perspective views are partially cut away. Also, in the perspective views, only the outlines of some components (such as insulating layers) are shown with dashed lines.

 まず、絶縁層201上に半導体膜230fが形成された構成を準備する。絶縁層201は、実施の形態1における基板11または下地膜12に対応する。また半導体膜230fは、実施の形態1における半導体膜21fに対応し、その作製方法を参照することができる。なおこの時点は、実施の形態1における図1Bの段階に対応する。 First, a structure is prepared in which semiconductor film 230f is formed on insulating layer 201. Insulating layer 201 corresponds to substrate 11 or base film 12 in embodiment 1. Semiconductor film 230f corresponds to semiconductor film 21f in embodiment 1, and its fabrication method can be referenced. Note that this point corresponds to the stage shown in Figure 1B in embodiment 1.

 半導体膜230fに対して、加熱処理を行うことが好ましい。例えば、加熱処理として、窒素ガスと酸素ガスの流量比を4:1として、450℃の温度で1時間の処理を行うことができる。加熱処理を行うことで、半導体膜230fの結晶性を向上させることができる。また、加熱処理を行うことで、半導体膜230f中に酸素を供給し、半導体膜230f中の酸素欠損を低減させることができる。これにより、トランジスタ200の信頼性向上を図ることができる。また加熱処理により、半導体膜230f中の水素を脱離させることができる。 It is preferable to perform heat treatment on the semiconductor film 230f. For example, the heat treatment can be performed at a temperature of 450°C for one hour with a nitrogen gas to oxygen gas flow ratio of 4:1. Heat treatment can improve the crystallinity of the semiconductor film 230f. Furthermore, heat treatment can supply oxygen into the semiconductor film 230f and reduce oxygen vacancies in the semiconductor film 230f. This can improve the reliability of the transistor 200. Heat treatment can also remove hydrogen from the semiconductor film 230f.

 次に、半導体膜230f上に、導電膜242fを成膜する(図11A1、図11A2)。半導体膜230fの成膜後に、エッチング工程などを挟まずに、半導体膜230f上に接して導電膜242fを成膜することで、半導体膜230fの上面を、導電膜242fで保護することができる。これにより、トランジスタを構成する半導体層230に不純物が拡散することを抑制でき、半導体装置の電気特性及び信頼性の向上を図ることができる。 Next, conductive film 242f is formed on semiconductor film 230f (Figures 11A1 and 11A2). After the formation of semiconductor film 230f, conductive film 242f is formed on and in contact with semiconductor film 230f without an etching process or the like, thereby protecting the top surface of semiconductor film 230f with conductive film 242f. This makes it possible to prevent impurities from diffusing into semiconductor layer 230, which constitutes the transistor, and improves the electrical characteristics and reliability of the semiconductor device.

 導電膜242fは、スパッタリング法、CVD法、MBE法、PLD法、またはALD法を用いて成膜することができる。 The conductive film 242f can be formed using sputtering, CVD, MBE, PLD, or ALD.

 本実施の形態では、スパッタリング法を用いて、導電膜242fとして窒化タンタルを成膜する。なお、導電膜242fの成膜前に、加熱処理を行ってもよい。当該加熱処理は、減圧下で行い、大気に暴露することなく、連続して導電膜242fを成膜してもよい。このような処理を行うことによって、半導体膜230fの表面に吸着している水分及び水素を除去し、さらに半導体膜230f中の水分濃度及び水素濃度を低減させることができる。加熱処理の温度は、100℃以上400℃以下が好ましい。 In this embodiment, tantalum nitride is deposited as the conductive film 242f by sputtering. Note that heat treatment may be performed before the deposition of the conductive film 242f. The heat treatment may be performed under reduced pressure, and the conductive film 242f may be deposited successively without exposure to the atmosphere. By performing such treatment, moisture and hydrogen adsorbed on the surface of the semiconductor film 230f can be removed, and the moisture and hydrogen concentrations in the semiconductor film 230f can be further reduced. The temperature of the heat treatment is preferably 100°C or higher and 400°C or lower.

 次に、リソグラフィ法を用いて、半導体膜230f、及び導電膜242fを島状に加工して、半導体層230、及び導電層242を形成する(図11B1、図11B2)。 Next, the semiconductor film 230f and the conductive film 242f are processed into island shapes using lithography to form the semiconductor layer 230 and the conductive layer 242 (Figures 11B1 and 11B2).

 上記加工には、ドライエッチング法またはウェットエッチング法を用いることができる。ドライエッチング法による加工は微細加工に適している。また、半導体膜230fと導電膜242fの加工は、それぞれ異なる条件で行ってもよい。 The above processing can be performed using dry etching or wet etching. Dry etching is suitable for fine processing. Furthermore, the semiconductor film 230f and the conductive film 242f may be processed under different conditions.

 また、導電膜242f上にハードマスクとして機能する層を形成してもよい。ハードマスクを用いることで加工性を向上させ、目的の形状に加工しやすくなるため好ましい。 Alternatively, a layer that functions as a hard mask may be formed on the conductive film 242f. Using a hard mask is preferable because it improves processability and makes it easier to process into the desired shape.

 ここで、半導体層230と導電層242を一括で島状に加工することが好ましい。このとき、導電層242の側端部は、半導体層230の側端部と一致または略一致することが好ましい。このような構成にすることで、本発明の一態様に係る半導体装置の工程数を削減することができる。よって、生産性の良好な半導体装置の作製方法を提供することができる。 Here, it is preferable to process the semiconductor layer 230 and the conductive layer 242 together into an island shape. In this case, it is preferable that the side edge of the conductive layer 242 coincides or substantially coincides with the side edge of the semiconductor layer 230. With such a structure, the number of steps required for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention can be reduced. Therefore, a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device with high productivity can be provided.

 図11B1に示すように、半導体層230及び導電層242の側面がテーパ形状になっていてもよい。半導体層230及び導電層242の側面のテーパ角は、例えば、60°以上90°未満とすることができる。このように側面をテーパ形状にすることで、これより後の工程において、絶縁層275などの被覆性が向上し、鬆などの欠陥を低減できる。 As shown in FIG. 11B1, the side surfaces of the semiconductor layer 230 and the conductive layer 242 may be tapered. The taper angle of the side surfaces of the semiconductor layer 230 and the conductive layer 242 may be, for example, greater than or equal to 60° and less than 90°. By tapering the side surfaces in this way, the coverage of the insulating layer 275 and the like can be improved in subsequent processes, and defects such as voids can be reduced.

 なお、リソグラフィ法では、まず、マスクを介してレジストを露光する。次に、露光された領域を、現像液を用いて除去または残存させてレジストマスクを形成する。次に、当該レジストマスクを介してエッチング処理することで、導電体、半導体、または絶縁体などを所望の形状に加工することができる。例えば、KrFエキシマレーザ光、ArFエキシマレーザ光、EUV(Extreme Ultraviolet)光などを用いて、レジストを露光することでレジストマスクを形成することができる。また、基板と投影レンズとの間に液体(例えば水)を満たして露光する、液浸技術を用いてもよい。また、前述した光に代えて、電子ビームまたはイオンビームを用いてもよい。なお、電子ビームまたはイオンビームを用いる場合には、マスクを用いなくてもよい場合がある。 In lithography, the resist is first exposed through a mask. The exposed areas are then removed or left using a developer to form a resist mask. Next, etching is performed through the resist mask to process conductors, semiconductors, insulators, etc. into the desired shape. For example, a resist mask can be formed by exposing the resist using KrF excimer laser light, ArF excimer laser light, or EUV (Extreme Ultraviolet) light. Immersion technology can also be used, in which a liquid (e.g., water) is filled between the substrate and the projection lens before exposure. An electron beam or ion beam can also be used instead of the light mentioned above. When using an electron beam or ion beam, a mask may not be required.

 なお、加工後に不要になったレジストマスクは、酸素プラズマを用いたアッシング(以下、酸素プラズマ処理と呼ぶ場合がある。)などのドライエッチング処理を行う、ウェットエッチング処理を行う、ドライエッチング処理後にウェットエッチング処理を行う、またはウェットエッチング処理後にドライエッチング処理を行うことで、除去することができる。 In addition, resist masks that are no longer needed after processing can be removed by performing a dry etching process such as ashing using oxygen plasma (hereinafter sometimes referred to as oxygen plasma treatment), a wet etching process, a dry etching process followed by a wet etching process, or a wet etching process followed by a dry etching process.

 さらに、レジストマスクの下に絶縁体または導電体からなるハードマスクを用いてもよい。ハードマスクを用いる場合、導電膜242f上にハードマスク材料となる絶縁膜または導電膜を形成し、その上にレジストマスクを形成し、ハードマスク材料をエッチングすることで所望の形状のハードマスクを形成することができる。例えば、ハードマスク材料としてタングステンを用いてもよい。導電膜242fなどのエッチングは、レジストマスクを除去してから行ってもよいし、レジストマスクを残したまま行ってもよい。後者の場合、エッチング中にレジストマスクが消失することがある。半導体膜230fなどのエッチング後にハードマスクをエッチングにより除去してもよい。一方、ハードマスクの材料が後工程に影響が無い、あるいは後工程で利用できる場合、必ずしもハードマスクを除去する必要は無い。 Furthermore, a hard mask made of an insulator or conductor may be used under the resist mask. When using a hard mask, an insulating or conductive film that will serve as the hard mask material is formed on the conductive film 242f, a resist mask is formed thereon, and the hard mask material is etched to form a hard mask of the desired shape. For example, tungsten may be used as the hard mask material. Etching of the conductive film 242f, etc. may be performed after removing the resist mask, or may be performed while leaving the resist mask in place. In the latter case, the resist mask may be lost during etching. The hard mask may be removed by etching after etching the semiconductor film 230f, etc. On the other hand, if the hard mask material does not affect subsequent processes or can be used in subsequent processes, it is not necessarily necessary to remove the hard mask.

 また、被加工物とレジストマスクの間に、SOC(Spin On Carbon)膜、及びSOG(Spin On Glass)膜を成膜する構成にしてもよい。SOC膜及びSOG膜をマスクとして用いることで、レジストマスクとの密着性を向上させ、マスクパターンの耐久性を向上させることができる。例えば、被加工物の上に、SOC膜、SOG膜、レジストマスクの順に成膜してリソグラフィ法を行うことができる。 Alternatively, an SOC (Spin On Carbon) film and an SOG (Spin On Glass) film may be formed between the workpiece and the resist mask. Using an SOC film and an SOG film as a mask improves adhesion with the resist mask and increases the durability of the mask pattern. For example, an SOC film, an SOG film, and a resist mask may be formed in this order on the workpiece, and then lithography may be performed.

 次に、半導体層230及び導電層242を覆って、絶縁層275を成膜し、さらに絶縁層275上に絶縁層280を成膜する(図11C1、図11C2)。 Next, an insulating layer 275 is formed to cover the semiconductor layer 230 and the conductive layer 242, and an insulating layer 280 is then formed on the insulating layer 275 (Figures 11C1 and 11C2).

 絶縁層280としては、絶縁層280となる絶縁膜を形成し、当該絶縁膜にCMP処理を行うことで、上面が平坦な絶縁体を形成することが好ましい。なお、絶縁層280上に、例えば、スパッタリング法によって窒化シリコンを成膜し、該窒化シリコンを絶縁層280に達するまで、CMP処理を行ってもよい。 For the insulating layer 280, it is preferable to form an insulating film that will become the insulating layer 280 and then perform CMP processing on the insulating film to form an insulator with a flat upper surface. Alternatively, a silicon nitride film may be formed on the insulating layer 280 by, for example, sputtering, and then CMP processing may be performed on the silicon nitride until it reaches the insulating layer 280.

 絶縁層275及び絶縁層280は、それぞれ、例えば、スパッタリング法、CVD法、MBE法、PLD法、またはALD法を用いて成膜することができる。 Insulating layer 275 and insulating layer 280 can each be formed using, for example, sputtering, CVD, MBE, PLD, or ALD.

 絶縁層275には、酸素の透過を抑制する機能を有する絶縁体を用いることが好ましい。例えば、絶縁層275として、PEALD法を用いて窒化シリコンを成膜することが好ましい。または、絶縁層275として、スパッタリング法を用いて、酸化アルミニウムを成膜し、その上にPEALD法を用いて窒化シリコンを成膜する構成にしてもよい。絶縁層275を上記のような構造とすることで、水、水素などの不純物、及び酸素の拡散を抑制する機能の向上を図ることができる。 For the insulating layer 275, it is preferable to use an insulator that has the function of suppressing oxygen permeation. For example, it is preferable to form a silicon nitride film as the insulating layer 275 using the PEALD method. Alternatively, the insulating layer 275 may be formed by forming an aluminum oxide film using the sputtering method and then forming a silicon nitride film thereon using the PEALD method. By forming the insulating layer 275 in the above structure, it is possible to improve the function of suppressing the diffusion of impurities such as water and hydrogen, and oxygen.

 また、絶縁層280として、スパッタリング法を用いて酸化シリコンを成膜することが好ましい。絶縁層280となる絶縁膜を、酸素を含む雰囲気で、スパッタリング法で成膜することで、過剰酸素を含む絶縁層280を形成することができる。また、成膜ガスに水素を含む分子を用いなくてもよいスパッタリング法を用いることで、絶縁層280中の水素濃度を低減できる。なお、当該絶縁膜の成膜前に、加熱処理を行ってもよい。加熱処理は、減圧下で行い、大気に暴露することなく、連続して当該絶縁膜を成膜してもよい。このような処理を行うことによって、絶縁層275の表面などに吸着している水分及び水素を除去できる。当該加熱処理には、上述した加熱処理条件を用いることができる。 It is also preferable to form the insulating layer 280 using silicon oxide by sputtering. By forming the insulating film that will become the insulating layer 280 by sputtering in an oxygen-containing atmosphere, the insulating layer 280 can be formed to contain excess oxygen. Furthermore, by using a sputtering method that does not require the use of hydrogen-containing molecules in the deposition gas, the hydrogen concentration in the insulating layer 280 can be reduced. Heat treatment may be performed before the deposition of the insulating film. The heat treatment may be performed under reduced pressure, and the insulating film may be deposited successively without exposure to the atmosphere. By performing such treatment, moisture and hydrogen adsorbed on the surface of the insulating layer 275, etc., can be removed. The heat treatment conditions described above can be used for the heat treatment.

 次に、リソグラフィ法を用いて、導電層242、絶縁層275、及び絶縁層280を加工して、半導体層230及び絶縁層201に達する開口(溝ともいう)を形成する(図11D1、図11D2)。ここで、導電層242が分断されて、導電層242a及び導電層242bが形成される。絶縁層280及び絶縁層275に形成される開口は、半導体層230と重なる。 Next, the conductive layer 242, insulating layer 275, and insulating layer 280 are processed using lithography to form openings (also called grooves) that reach the semiconductor layer 230 and insulating layer 201 (Figures 11D1 and 11D2). Here, the conductive layer 242 is divided to form conductive layers 242a and 242b. The openings formed in the insulating layer 280 and insulating layer 275 overlap with the semiconductor layer 230.

 次に、絶縁層280などに形成された開口を覆うように、絶縁層250を成膜する。ここで、当該絶縁層250は、絶縁層280の開口に沿って成膜される。また絶縁層250は、絶縁層280、導電層242a、導電層242b、絶縁層201、及び半導体層230に接する。 Next, insulating layer 250 is formed so as to cover the openings formed in insulating layer 280, etc. Here, insulating layer 250 is formed along the openings in insulating layer 280. In addition, insulating layer 250 contacts insulating layer 280, conductive layer 242a, conductive layer 242b, insulating layer 201, and semiconductor layer 230.

 絶縁層250は、スパッタリング法、CVD法、MBE法、PLD法、または、ALD法を用いて成膜することができる。絶縁層250は薄い膜厚で形成することが好ましいため、被覆性に優れ、膜厚制御が容易なALD法を用いて成膜することが好ましい。 The insulating layer 250 can be formed using sputtering, CVD, MBE, PLD, or ALD. Since it is preferable to form the insulating layer 250 with a thin film thickness, it is preferable to form it using the ALD method, which has excellent coverage and easy film thickness control.

 また、絶縁層250をALD法で成膜する場合、酸化剤として、オゾン(O)、酸素(O)、水(HO)などを用いることができる。水素を含まない、オゾン(O)、酸素(O)などを酸化剤として用いることで、半導体層230に拡散する水素を低減できる。 When the insulating layer 250 is formed by the ALD method, ozone ( O3 ), oxygen ( O2 ), water ( H2O ), or the like can be used as an oxidizing agent. By using ozone ( O3 ), oxygen ( O2 ), or the like that does not contain hydrogen as an oxidizing agent, the amount of hydrogen that diffuses into the semiconductor layer 230 can be reduced.

 また、絶縁層250の成膜前、成膜後、または成膜中にマイクロ波処理を行うことが好ましい。 It is also preferable to perform microwave treatment before, after, or during the formation of the insulating layer 250.

 より具体的には、酸素を含む雰囲気でマイクロ波処理を行うことが好ましい。ここで、マイクロ波処理とは、例えばマイクロ波を用いて高密度プラズマを発生させる電源を有する装置を用いた処理のことを指す。また、本明細書などにおいて、マイクロ波とは、300MHz以上300GHz以下の周波数を有する電磁波を指すものとする。 More specifically, it is preferable to perform microwave treatment in an atmosphere containing oxygen. Here, microwave treatment refers to treatment using, for example, a device equipped with a power source that generates high-density plasma using microwaves. Furthermore, in this specification and elsewhere, microwaves refer to electromagnetic waves with a frequency of 300 MHz or higher and 300 GHz or lower.

 マイクロ波処理では、例えばマイクロ波を用いた高密度プラズマを発生させる電源を有する、マイクロ波処理装置を用いることが好ましい。マイクロ波処理装置の周波数は、代表的には2.45GHzにすることができる。高密度プラズマを用いることより、高密度の酸素ラジカルを生成することができる。また、マイクロ波処理装置のマイクロ波を印加する電源の電力は、1000W以上10000W以下が好ましく、2000W以上5000W以下が好ましい。また、マイクロ波処理装置は基板側にRFを印加する電源を有してもよい。また、基板側にRFを印加することで、高密度プラズマによって生成された酸素イオンを、効率よく半導体層230中に導くことができる。 For microwave processing, it is preferable to use a microwave processing device having a power supply that generates high-density plasma using microwaves. The frequency of the microwave processing device can typically be 2.45 GHz. By using high-density plasma, high-density oxygen radicals can be generated. Furthermore, the power of the power supply that applies microwaves in the microwave processing device is preferably 1000 W or more and 10,000 W or less, and preferably 2000 W or more and 5,000 W or less. The microwave processing device may also have a power supply that applies RF to the substrate side. Furthermore, by applying RF to the substrate side, oxygen ions generated by high-density plasma can be efficiently guided into the semiconductor layer 230.

 また、上記マイクロ波処理は、減圧下で行うことが好ましく、圧力は、10Pa以上1000Pa以下が好ましく、300Pa以上700Pa以下がより好ましい。また、処理温度は、750℃以下が好ましく、500℃以下がより好ましく、例えば250℃程度とすることができる。また、酸素プラズマ処理を行った後に、外気に曝すことなく、連続して加熱処理を行ってもよい。加熱処理の温度は、例えば、100℃以上750℃以下が好ましく、300℃以上500℃以下がより好ましい。 Furthermore, the microwave treatment is preferably carried out under reduced pressure, with the pressure preferably being 10 Pa or higher and 1000 Pa or lower, and more preferably being 300 Pa or higher and 700 Pa or lower. The treatment temperature is preferably 750°C or lower, more preferably 500°C or lower, and can be, for example, about 250°C. After the oxygen plasma treatment, a heat treatment may be carried out consecutively without exposure to the outside air. The heat treatment temperature is, for example, preferably 100°C or higher and 750°C or lower, and more preferably 300°C or higher and 500°C or lower.

 次に、導電層260となる導電膜を成膜する。当該導電膜は、スパッタリング法、CVD法、MBE法、PLD法、メッキ法または、ALD法を用いて成膜することができる。例えば、CVD法を用いて、窒化チタン膜とタングステン膜を積層して成膜すればよい。 Next, a conductive film that will become the conductive layer 260 is formed. This conductive film can be formed using sputtering, CVD, MBE, PLD, plating, or ALD. For example, a titanium nitride film and a tungsten film can be stacked and formed using CVD.

 次に、CMP処理によって、絶縁層250及び導電層260となる導電膜を、絶縁層280が露出するまで研磨する。つまり、絶縁層250及び当該導電膜の上記開口から露出した部分を除去する。これによって、半導体層230に達する開口の中に、絶縁層250、及び導電層260を形成する(図12A1、図12A2)。 Next, the conductive film that will become insulating layer 250 and conductive layer 260 is polished by CMP until insulating layer 280 is exposed. In other words, the insulating layer 250 and the portions of the conductive film exposed through the opening are removed. This forms insulating layer 250 and conductive layer 260 in the opening that reaches semiconductor layer 230 (Figures 12A1 and 12A2).

 これにより、絶縁層250は、上記開口内で、導電層242a、導電層242b、半導体層230、及び絶縁層201に接して設けられる。また、導電層260は、絶縁層250を介して、上記開口を埋め込むように配置される。このようにして、トランジスタ200が形成される。 As a result, the insulating layer 250 is provided in the opening in contact with the conductive layer 242a, the conductive layer 242b, the semiconductor layer 230, and the insulating layer 201. Furthermore, the conductive layer 260 is disposed so as to fill the opening via the insulating layer 250. In this manner, the transistor 200 is formed.

 次に、絶縁層250上、導電層260上、及び絶縁層280上に、絶縁層282を成膜する。絶縁層282は、例えば、スパッタリング法、CVD法、MBE法、PLD法、またはALD法を用いて成膜することができる。絶縁層282の成膜は、スパッタリング法を用いて行うことが好ましい。成膜ガスに水素を含む分子を用いなくてもよいスパッタリング法を用いることで、絶縁層282中の水素濃度を低減できる。 Next, insulating layer 282 is formed on insulating layer 250, conductive layer 260, and insulating layer 280. Insulating layer 282 can be formed using, for example, sputtering, CVD, MBE, PLD, or ALD. Sputtering is preferably used to form insulating layer 282. By using sputtering, which does not require the use of hydrogen-containing molecules in the deposition gas, the hydrogen concentration in insulating layer 282 can be reduced.

 ここで、スパッタリング法を用いて、酸素を含む雰囲気で絶縁層282の成膜を行うことで、成膜しながら、絶縁層280に酸素を添加できる。これにより、絶縁層280に、過剰酸素を含ませることができる。 Here, by using a sputtering method to deposit the insulating layer 282 in an oxygen-containing atmosphere, oxygen can be added to the insulating layer 280 while the layer is being deposited. This allows the insulating layer 280 to contain excess oxygen.

 次に、絶縁層282上に、絶縁層285を形成する(図12B1、図12B2)。絶縁層285は、スパッタリング法、CVD法、MBE法、PLD法、またはALD法を用いて成膜することができる。絶縁層285の成膜は、スパッタリング法を用いて行うことが好ましい。成膜ガスに水素を含む分子を用いなくてもよいスパッタリング法を用いることで、絶縁層285中の水素濃度を低減できる。 Next, insulating layer 285 is formed on insulating layer 282 (Figures 12B1 and 12B2). Insulating layer 285 can be formed using sputtering, CVD, MBE, PLD, or ALD. Sputtering is preferably used to form insulating layer 285. By using sputtering, which does not require the use of hydrogen-containing molecules in the deposition gas, the hydrogen concentration in insulating layer 285 can be reduced.

 次に、絶縁層275、絶縁層280、絶縁層282、及び絶縁層285に、それぞれ導電層242a、242bに達する開口を形成する。当該開口の形成は、リソグラフィ法を用いて行えばよい。当該開口の形成では、ドライエッチング法を用いて被加工物の加工を行うことが好ましい。なお、上面視における当該開口の形状は、円形状、楕円などの略円形状、四角形などの多角形状、四角形等の多角形の角部を丸めた形状などにすることができる。 Next, openings are formed in insulating layer 275, insulating layer 280, insulating layer 282, and insulating layer 285, reaching conductive layers 242a and 242b, respectively. The openings may be formed using lithography. When forming the openings, it is preferable to process the workpiece using dry etching. Note that the shape of the openings when viewed from above can be a circle, an approximately circular shape such as an ellipse, a polygonal shape such as a square, or a polygonal shape with rounded corners such as a square.

 次に、上記開口の形成後に、加熱処理を行うこともできる。加熱処理の温度は、100℃以上600℃以下、好ましくは250℃以上550℃以下、より好ましくは350℃以上450℃以下にすればよい。なお、加熱処理は、窒素ガスもしくは不活性ガスの雰囲気で行うことが好ましい。また、当該加熱処理は、導電層242a及び導電層242bが露出された状態でおこなうため、酸化性のガス及び酸素ガスを含まない雰囲気で行うことが好ましい。例えば、窒素ガス雰囲気で、400℃の温度で1時間の加熱処理を行うことが好ましい。なお、上記加熱処理は減圧状態で行ってもよい。上記加熱処理によって、絶縁層280に含まれる酸素を、絶縁層250を介して、半導体層230に供給することができる。また、絶縁層280に開口が設けられた段階で加熱処理を行うことにより、絶縁層280に含まれる酸素の一部を放出させ、絶縁層280に含まれる酸素の量を調整することができる。これにより、過剰な酸素により信頼性を損なうことを防ぐことができる。 Next, after the openings are formed, heat treatment can be performed. The temperature for the heat treatment is 100°C to 600°C, preferably 250°C to 550°C, and more preferably 350°C to 450°C. The heat treatment is preferably performed in a nitrogen gas or inert gas atmosphere. Furthermore, since the conductive layers 242a and 242b are exposed, the heat treatment is preferably performed in an atmosphere that does not contain oxidizing gas or oxygen gas. For example, the heat treatment is preferably performed in a nitrogen gas atmosphere at 400°C for one hour. The heat treatment may be performed under reduced pressure. The heat treatment allows oxygen contained in the insulating layer 280 to be supplied to the semiconductor layer 230 through the insulating layer 250. Furthermore, by performing the heat treatment after the openings are formed in the insulating layer 280, some of the oxygen contained in the insulating layer 280 can be released, thereby adjusting the amount of oxygen contained in the insulating layer 280. This prevents reliability from being impaired by excess oxygen.

 次に、上記開口の形状に沿って、絶縁層241a及び絶縁層241bとなる絶縁膜を成膜する。当該絶縁膜の成膜は、スパッタリング法、CVD法、MBE法、PLD法、またはALD法などを用いて行うことができる。絶縁層241a及び絶縁層241bとなる絶縁膜は、アスペクト比が大きい開口の中に成膜されるため、ALD法を用いて成膜することが好ましい。また、絶縁層241a及び絶縁層241bとなる絶縁膜としては、酸素の透過を抑制する機能を有する絶縁膜を用いることが好ましい。例えば、PEALD法を用いて、窒化シリコンを成膜することが好ましい。窒化シリコンは水素に対するブロッキング性が高いので好ましい。 Next, insulating films that will become insulating layers 241a and 241b are formed according to the shape of the openings. These insulating films can be formed using a sputtering method, a CVD method, an MBE method, a PLD method, an ALD method, or the like. Because the insulating films that will become insulating layers 241a and 241b are formed in openings with a large aspect ratio, they are preferably formed using an ALD method. Furthermore, it is preferable to use an insulating film that has the function of suppressing oxygen permeation as the insulating film that will become insulating layers 241a and 241b. For example, it is preferable to form a silicon nitride film using a PEALD method. Silicon nitride is preferable because it has high blocking properties against hydrogen.

 次に、上記絶縁膜を異方性エッチングして絶縁層241a及び絶縁層241bを形成する。ここで、絶縁層241aは導電層242a上の開口の側壁を覆うように形成され、絶縁層241bは導電層242b上の開口の側壁を覆うように形成される。絶縁層241a及び絶縁層241bとなる絶縁膜の異方性エッチングとしては、ドライエッチング法などを用いればよい。例えば、反応性イオンエッチングを行うことが好ましい。開口の側壁部に絶縁層241a及び絶縁層241bを設けることで、外方からの酸素の透過を抑制し、次に形成する導電層240a及び導電層240bの酸化を防止することができる。また、導電層240a及び導電層240bに、絶縁層280などに含まれる、水、水素などの不純物が拡散することを防ぐことができる。なお、当該異方性エッチングにより、導電層242a及び導電層242bの上面の一部に凹部が形成される場合がある。 Next, the insulating film is anisotropically etched to form insulating layers 241a and 241b. Here, insulating layer 241a is formed to cover the sidewalls of the openings on conductive layer 242a, and insulating layer 241b is formed to cover the sidewalls of the openings on conductive layer 242b. Dry etching or the like can be used for anisotropically etching the insulating films that will become insulating layers 241a and 241b. For example, reactive ion etching is preferably used. By providing insulating layers 241a and 241b on the sidewalls of the openings, oxygen penetration from the outside can be suppressed, preventing oxidation of conductive layers 240a and 240b, which will be formed next. Furthermore, impurities such as water and hydrogen contained in insulating layer 280 can be prevented from diffusing into conductive layers 240a and 240b. Note that this anisotropic etching may form recesses in parts of the top surfaces of conductive layers 242a and 242b.

 次に、導電層240a及び導電層240bとなる導電膜を成膜する。当該導電膜は、水、水素など不純物の透過を抑制する機能を有する導電体を含む積層構造とすることが望ましい。例えば、窒化タンタル、窒化チタンなどと、タングステン、モリブデン、銅など、と、の積層とすることができる。導電層240a及び導電層240bとなる導電膜の成膜は、スパッタリング法、CVD法、MBE法、PLD法またはALD法などを用いて行うことができる。 Next, a conductive film that will become conductive layer 240a and conductive layer 240b is formed. It is desirable that the conductive film have a layered structure that includes a conductor that has the function of suppressing the permeation of impurities such as water and hydrogen. For example, it can be a layered structure of tantalum nitride, titanium nitride, or the like, and tungsten, molybdenum, copper, or the like. The conductive film that will become conductive layer 240a and conductive layer 240b can be formed by a sputtering method, a CVD method, an MBE method, a PLD method, an ALD method, or the like.

 次に、CMP処理を行うことで、導電層240a及び導電層240bとなる導電膜の一部を除去し、絶縁層285の上面を露出させる(図12C1、図12C2)。その結果、開口のみに、当該導電膜が残存することで上面が平坦な導電層240a及び導電層240bを形成することができる。なお、当該CMP処理により、絶縁層285の上面の一部が除去される場合がある。 Next, CMP processing is performed to remove portions of the conductive film that will become conductive layers 240a and 240b, exposing the upper surface of insulating layer 285 (Figures 12C1 and 12C2). As a result, the conductive film remains only in the openings, allowing conductive layers 240a and 240b to be formed with flat upper surfaces. Note that the CMP processing may remove portions of the upper surface of insulating layer 285.

 また、導電層240a及び導電層240bを形成した後でさらに加熱処理を行ってもよい。当該加熱処理は、上記加熱処理と同様の条件を用いることができる。当該加熱処理を行うことで、半導体層230に供給する酸素量を調整することができる。これにより、トランジスタ200の電気特性及び信頼性の向上を図ることができる。 Furthermore, heat treatment may be performed after the conductive layers 240a and 240b are formed. The heat treatment can be performed under the same conditions as the above-described heat treatment. By performing the heat treatment, the amount of oxygen supplied to the semiconductor layer 230 can be adjusted. This can improve the electrical characteristics and reliability of the transistor 200.

 以上により、図6A乃至図6Dに示すトランジスタ200を作製できる。 In this manner, the transistor 200 shown in Figures 6A to 6D can be fabricated.

 本実施の形態で例示したトランジスタ200は、実施の形態1で例示したトランジスタ10に置き換えることができる。これにより、単結晶基板にチャネルが形成されるトランジスタと、酸化物半導体膜にチャネルが形成されるトランジスタとを積層した半導体装置を実現することができる。 The transistor 200 described in this embodiment can be replaced with the transistor 10 described in Embodiment 1. This makes it possible to realize a semiconductor device in which a transistor whose channel is formed in a single crystal substrate and a transistor whose channel is formed in an oxide semiconductor film are stacked.

 本実施の形態は、少なくともその一部を本明細書中に記載する他の実施の形態と適宜組み合わせて実施することができる。 This embodiment can be implemented by appropriately combining at least a portion of it with other embodiments described in this specification.

(実施の形態3)
 本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の記憶装置について図13乃至図16を用いて説明する。本実施の形態では、センスアンプを含む駆動回路が設けられる層上に、メモリセルを有する層が積層して設けられた記憶装置の構成例について説明する。
(Embodiment 3)
In this embodiment, a memory device of one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16. In this embodiment, a configuration example of a memory device in which a layer having memory cells is stacked over a layer in which a driver circuit including a sense amplifier is provided will be described.

 以下で例示するセンスアンプを含む駆動回路が有するトランジスタに、実施の形態1で例示した、単結晶基板にチャネルが形成されるトランジスタ(Siトランジスタと表記する)を適用することができる。またメモリセルが有するトランジスタに、実施の形態1で例示した、単結晶の酸化物半導体にチャネルが形成されるトランジスタ(OSトランジスタと表記する)を適用できる。 The transistor in which a channel is formed in a single crystal substrate (referred to as a Si transistor), as exemplified in Embodiment 1, can be used as a transistor included in a driver circuit including a sense amplifier, as exemplified below. The transistor in which a channel is formed in a single crystal oxide semiconductor (referred to as an OS transistor), as exemplified in Embodiment 1, can be used as a transistor included in a memory cell.

<記憶装置の構成例>
 図13に、本発明の一態様に係る記憶装置480の構成例を示すブロック図を示す。図13に示す記憶装置480は、層420と、積層された層470と、を有する。
<Configuration example of storage device>
13 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of a memory device 480 according to one embodiment of the present invention. The memory device 480 illustrated in FIG. 13 includes a layer 420 and a stacked layer 470.

 層420は、Siトランジスタを有する層である。層470では、素子層430[1]乃至430[m](mは2以上の整数。)が積層して設けられる。素子層430[1]乃至430[m]は、OSトランジスタを有する層である。OSトランジスタを有する層が積層して設けられる層470は、層420上に積層して設けることができる。 Layer 420 is a layer including a Si transistor. In layer 470, element layers 430[1] to 430[m] (m is an integer of 2 or more) are stacked. Element layers 430[1] to 430[m] are layers including an OS transistor. Layer 470, which includes a stack of layers including an OS transistor, can be stacked on layer 420.

 素子層430[1]乃至430[m]が有するOSトランジスタ及び容量素子といった素子は、メモリセルを構成する。図13では、素子層430[1]乃至430[m]において、m行n列(nは2以上の整数)のマトリクス状に配置された複数のメモリセル432を有する例を示している。 Elements such as OS transistors and capacitors included in the element layers 430[1] to 430[m] constitute memory cells. Figure 13 shows an example in which the element layers 430[1] to 430[m] have multiple memory cells 432 arranged in a matrix of m rows and n columns (n is an integer greater than or equal to 2).

 図13では、1行1列目のメモリセル432をメモリセル432[1,1]と示し、m行n列目のメモリセル432をメモリセル432[m,n]と示している。また、本実施の形態などでは、任意の行を示す場合にi行と記す場合がある。また、任意の列を示す場合にj列と記す場合がある。よって、iは1以上m以下の整数であり、jは1以上n以下の整数である。また、本実施の形態などでは、i行j列目のメモリセル432をメモリセル432[i,j]と示している。なお、本実施の形態などにおいて、「i+α」(αは正または負の整数)と示す場合は、「i+α」は1を下回らず、mを超えない。同様に、「j+α」と示す場合は、「j+α」は1を下回らず、nを超えない。 In FIG. 13, memory cell 432 in the first row and first column is indicated as memory cell 432[1,1], and memory cell 432 in the mth row and nth column is indicated as memory cell 432[m,n]. Furthermore, in this embodiment and the like, an arbitrary row may be referred to as row i. Furthermore, an arbitrary column may be referred to as column j. Therefore, i is an integer between 1 and m, and j is an integer between 1 and n. Furthermore, in this embodiment and the like, memory cell 432 in the ith row and jth column is indicated as memory cell 432[i,j]. Furthermore, in this embodiment and the like, when it is indicated as "i+α" (α is a positive or negative integer), "i+α" is not less than 1 or more than m. Similarly, when it is indicated as "j+α", "j+α" is not less than 1 or more than n.

 また図13では、一例として、行方向に延在するm本の配線WLと、行方向に延在するm本の配線PLと、列方向に延在するn本の配線BLと、を図示している。本実施の形態などでは、1本目(1行目)に設けられた配線WLを配線WL[1]と示し、m本目(m行目)に設けられた配線WLを配線WL[m]と示す。同様に、1本目(1行目)に設けられた配線PLを配線PL[1]と示し、m本目(m行目)に設けられた配線PLを配線PL[m]と示す。同様に、1本目(1列目)に設けられた配線BLを配線BL[1]と示し、n本目(n列目)に設けられた配線BLを配線BL[n]と示す。なお素子層430[1]乃至430[m]の層数と、配線WL(及び配線PL)の本数は、同じでなくてもよい。 13 illustrates, as an example, m wirings WL extending in the row direction, m wirings PL extending in the row direction, and n wirings BL extending in the column direction. In this embodiment and the like, the first wiring WL (first row) is referred to as wiring WL[1], and the mth wiring WL (mth row) is referred to as wiring WL[m]. Similarly, the first wiring PL (first row) is referred to as wiring PL[1], and the mth wiring PL (mth row) is referred to as wiring PL[m]. Similarly, the first wiring BL (first column) is referred to as wiring BL[1], and the nth wiring BL (nth column) is referred to as wiring BL[n]. Note that the number of element layers 430[1] to 430[m] and the number of wirings WL (and wirings PL) do not have to be the same.

 i行目に設けられた複数のメモリセル432は、i行目の配線WL(配線WL[i])とi行目の配線PL(配線PL[i])に電気的に接続される。j列目に設けられた複数のメモリセル432は、j列目の配線BL(配線BL[j])と電気的に接続される。 The multiple memory cells 432 provided in the i-th row are electrically connected to the i-th row wiring WL (wiring WL[i]) and the i-th row wiring PL (wiring PL[i]). The multiple memory cells 432 provided in the j-th column are electrically connected to the j-th column wiring BL (wiring BL[j]).

 配線BLは、データの書き込み及び読み出しを行うためのビット線として機能する。配線WLは、スイッチとして機能するアクセストランジスタのオンまたはオフ(導通状態または非導通状態)を制御するためのワード線として機能する。配線PLは、キャパシタに接続される定電位線としての機能を有する。なおバックゲート電位を伝える配線を別途設けることができる。 The wiring BL functions as a bit line for writing and reading data. The wiring WL functions as a word line for controlling the on/off (conducting or non-conducting) of an access transistor that functions as a switch. The wiring PL functions as a constant potential line connected to a capacitor. Note that a separate wiring can be provided to transmit the back gate potential.

 素子層430[1]乃至430[m]がそれぞれ有するメモリセル432は、配線BLを介してセンスアンプ446(Sense Amplifier)に接続される。配線BLは、層420が設けられる基板表面の平行方向及び垂直方向に配置することができる。素子層430[1]乃至430[m]が有するメモリセル432から延びて設けられる配線BLを、基板表面の水平方向に配置される配線に加え、垂直方向に配置される配線で構成することで、素子層430とセンスアンプ446との間の配線の長さを短くできる。メモリセルとセンスアンプとの間の信号伝搬距離を短くでき、ビット線の抵抗及び寄生容量が大幅に削減されるため、消費電力及び信号遅延の低減が実現できる。そのため、記憶装置480の消費電力及び信号遅延の低減が実現できる。またメモリセル432が有するキャパシタの容量を小さくしても動作させることが可能となる。そのため、記憶装置480の小型化が実現できる。 The memory cells 432 included in each of the element layers 430[1] to 430[m] are connected to a sense amplifier 446 via wiring BL. The wiring BL can be arranged parallel to or perpendicular to the substrate surface on which the layer 420 is provided. By configuring the wiring BL extending from the memory cells 432 included in the element layers 430[1] to 430[m] with wiring arranged vertically in addition to wiring arranged horizontally on the substrate surface, the length of the wiring between the element layer 430 and the sense amplifier 446 can be shortened. The signal propagation distance between the memory cell and the sense amplifier can be shortened, and the resistance and parasitic capacitance of the bit line are significantly reduced, thereby achieving reduced power consumption and signal delay. This reduces the power consumption and signal delay of the memory device 480. Furthermore, it is possible to operate even if the capacitance of the capacitor included in the memory cell 432 is reduced. This allows the memory device 480 to be made smaller.

 層420は、PSW471(パワースイッチ)、PSW472、及び周辺回路422を有する。周辺回路422は、駆動回路440、コントロール回路473(Control Circuit)、及び電圧生成回路474を有する。なお層420が有する各回路は、Siトランジスタを有する回路である。 Layer 420 has PSW 471 (power switch), PSW 472, and peripheral circuit 422. Peripheral circuit 422 has drive circuit 440, control circuit 473, and voltage generation circuit 474. Each circuit in layer 420 has a Si transistor.

 記憶装置480において、各回路、各信号及び各電圧は、必要に応じて、適宜取捨することができる。あるいは、他の回路または他の信号を追加してもよい。信号BW、信号CE、信号GW、信号CLK、信号WAKE、信号ADDR、信号WDA、信号PON1、信号PON2は外部からの入力信号であり、信号RDAは外部への出力信号である。信号CLKはクロック信号である。 In the memory device 480, each circuit, signal, and voltage can be selected or removed as needed. Alternatively, other circuits or signals may be added. Signals BW, CE, GW, CLK, WAKE, ADDR, WDA, PON1, and PON2 are input signals from the outside, and signal RDA is an output signal to the outside. Signal CLK is a clock signal.

 また、信号BW、信号CE、及び信号GWは制御信号である。信号CEはチップイネーブル信号であり、信号GWはグローバル書き込みイネーブル信号であり、信号BWはバイト書き込みイネーブル信号である。信号ADDRはアドレス信号である。信号WDAは書き込みデータ信号であり、信号RDAは読み出しデータ信号である。信号PON1、信号PON2は、パワーゲーティング制御用信号である。なお、信号PON1、信号PON2は、コントロール回路473で生成してもよい。 Furthermore, signals BW, CE, and GW are control signals. Signal CE is a chip enable signal, signal GW is a global write enable signal, and signal BW is a byte write enable signal. Signal ADDR is an address signal. Signal WDA is a write data signal, and signal RDA is a read data signal. Signals PON1 and PON2 are power gating control signals. Note that signals PON1 and PON2 may be generated by control circuit 473.

 コントロール回路473は、記憶装置480の動作全般を制御する機能を有するロジック回路である。例えば、コントロール回路は、信号CE、信号GW及び信号BWを論理演算して、記憶装置480の動作モード(例えば、書き込み動作、読み出し動作)を決定する。または、コントロール回路473は、この動作モードが実行されるように、駆動回路440の制御信号を生成する。 The control circuit 473 is a logic circuit that has the function of controlling the overall operation of the memory device 480. For example, the control circuit performs a logical operation on the signals CE, GW, and BW to determine the operating mode (e.g., write operation, read operation) of the memory device 480. Alternatively, the control circuit 473 generates a control signal for the drive circuit 440 so that this operating mode is executed.

 電圧生成回路474は負電圧を生成する機能を有する。信号WAKEは、信号CLKの電圧生成回路474への入力を制御する機能を有する。例えば、信号WAKEにHレベルの信号が与えられると、信号CLKが電圧生成回路474へ入力され、電圧生成回路474は負電圧を生成する。 Voltage generation circuit 474 has the function of generating a negative voltage. Signal WAKE has the function of controlling the input of signal CLK to voltage generation circuit 474. For example, when a high-level signal is applied to signal WAKE, signal CLK is input to voltage generation circuit 474, causing voltage generation circuit 474 to generate a negative voltage.

 駆動回路440は、メモリセル432に対するデータの書き込み及び読み出しをするための回路である。駆動回路440は、行デコーダ442(Row Decoder)、列デコーダ444(Column Decoder)、行ドライバ443(Row Driver)、列ドライバ445(Column Driver)、入力回路447(Input Cir.)、出力回路448(Output Cir.)に加え、前述したセンスアンプ446を有する。 The drive circuit 440 is a circuit for writing and reading data to and from the memory cells 432. The drive circuit 440 includes a row decoder 442, a column decoder 444, a row driver 443, a column driver 445, an input circuit 447, an output circuit 448, and the aforementioned sense amplifier 446.

 行デコーダ442及び列デコーダ444は、信号ADDRをデコードする機能を有する。行デコーダ442は、アクセスする行を指定するための回路であり、列デコーダ444は、アクセスする列を指定するための回路である。行ドライバ443は、行デコーダ442が指定する配線WLを選択する機能を有する。列ドライバ445は、データをメモリセル432に書き込む機能、メモリセル432からデータを読み出す機能、読み出したデータを保持する機能等を有する。 The row decoder 442 and column decoder 444 have the function of decoding the signal ADDR. The row decoder 442 is a circuit for specifying the row to access, and the column decoder 444 is a circuit for specifying the column to access. The row driver 443 has the function of selecting the wiring WL specified by the row decoder 442. The column driver 445 has the function of writing data to the memory cell 432, reading data from the memory cell 432, and retaining the read data.

 入力回路447は、信号WDAを保持する機能を有する。入力回路447が保持するデータは、列ドライバ445に出力される。入力回路447の出力データが、メモリセル432に書き込むデータ(Din)である。列ドライバ445がメモリセル432から読み出したデータ(Dout)は、出力回路448に出力される。出力回路448は、Doutを保持する機能を有する。また、出力回路448は、Doutを記憶装置480の外部に出力する機能を有する。出力回路448から出力されるデータが信号RDAである。 The input circuit 447 has the function of holding the signal WDA. The data held by the input circuit 447 is output to the column driver 445. The output data of the input circuit 447 is the data (Din) to be written to the memory cell 432. The data (Dout) read from the memory cell 432 by the column driver 445 is output to the output circuit 448. The output circuit 448 has the function of holding Dout. The output circuit 448 also has the function of outputting Dout to the outside of the memory device 480. The data output from the output circuit 448 is the signal RDA.

 PSW471は周辺回路422へのVDDの供給を制御する機能を有する。PSW472は、行ドライバ443へのVHMの供給を制御する機能を有する。ここでは、記憶装置480の高電源電位がVDDであり、低電源電位はGND(接地電位)である。また、VHMは、ワード線を高レベルにするために用いられる高電源電位であり、VDDよりも高い。信号PON1によってPSW471のオン・オフが制御され、信号PON2によってPSW472のオン・オフが制御される。図13では、周辺回路422において、VDDが供給される電源ドメインの数を1としているが、複数にすることもできる。この場合、各電源ドメインに対してパワースイッチを設ければよい。 PSW471 has the function of controlling the supply of VDD to the peripheral circuit 422. PSW472 has the function of controlling the supply of VHM to the row driver 443. Here, the high power supply potential of the memory device 480 is VDD, and the low power supply potential is GND (ground potential). VHM is a high power supply potential used to set the word line to a high level, and is higher than VDD. The on/off of PSW471 is controlled by signal PON1, and the on/off of PSW472 is controlled by signal PON2. In Figure 13, the number of power domains to which VDD is supplied in the peripheral circuit 422 is one, but there can be multiple. In this case, a power switch can be provided for each power domain.

 素子層430[1]乃至430[m]は、層420上に重ねて設けることができる。図14Aに、層420上に5層(m=5)の素子層430[1]乃至430[5]を重ねて設けられる様子を示す記憶装置480の斜視図を示している。 Element layers 430[1] to 430[m] can be stacked on layer 420. Figure 14A shows a perspective view of a memory device 480 in which five (m = 5) element layers 430[1] to 430[5] are stacked on layer 420.

 図14Aでは、1層目に設けられた素子層430を素子層430[1]と示し、2層目に設けられた素子層430を素子層430[2]と示し、5層目に設けられた素子層430を素子層430[5]と示している。また図14Aにおいて、X方向に延びて設けられる配線WL、及び配線PLと、Y方向及びZ方向(駆動回路が設けられる基板表面に垂直な方向)に延びて設けられる配線BL及び配線BLBと、を図示している。配線BLBは、反転ビット線である。なお、図面を見やすくするため、素子層430それぞれが有する配線WL及び配線PLの記載を一部省略している。 In Figure 14A, the element layer 430 provided in the first layer is shown as element layer 430[1], the element layer 430 provided in the second layer is shown as element layer 430[2], and the element layer 430 provided in the fifth layer is shown as element layer 430[5]. Also shown in Figure 14A are wiring WL and wiring PL extending in the X direction, and wiring BL and wiring BLB extending in the Y direction and Z direction (directions perpendicular to the substrate surface on which the driver circuit is provided). Wiring BLB is an inverted bit line. Note that to make the drawing easier to understand, the wiring WL and wiring PL of each element layer 430 have been partially omitted.

 図14Bに、図14Aで図示した配線BL及び配線BLBに接続されたセンスアンプ446、及び配線BL及び配線BLBに接続された素子層430[1]乃至430[5]が有するメモリセル432の構成例を説明する模式図を示す。なお、1つの配線BL及び配線BLBに複数のメモリセル(メモリセル432)が電気的に接続される構成を「メモリストリング」ともいう。 Figure 14B is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration example of the sense amplifier 446 connected to the wiring BL and wiring BLB shown in Figure 14A, and the memory cells 432 included in the element layers 430[1] to 430[5] connected to the wiring BL and wiring BLB. Note that a configuration in which multiple memory cells (memory cells 432) are electrically connected to one wiring BL and wiring BLB is also referred to as a "memory string."

 図14Bでは、配線BLBに接続されるメモリセル432の回路構成の一例を図示している。メモリセル432は、トランジスタ437及び容量素子438を有する。トランジスタ437、容量素子438、及び各配線(BL、及びWLなど)についても、例えば配線BL[1]及び配線WL[1]を配線BL及び配線WLなどのようにいう場合がある。 Figure 14B shows an example of the circuit configuration of a memory cell 432 connected to wiring BLB. The memory cell 432 includes a transistor 437 and a capacitor 438. The transistor 437, the capacitor 438, and each wiring (BL, WL, etc.) may also be referred to as wiring BL and wiring WL, for example, instead of wiring BL[1] and wiring WL[1].

 メモリセル432において、トランジスタ437のソースまたはドレインの一方は配線BLに接続される。トランジスタ437のソースまたはドレインの他方は容量素子438の一方の電極に接続される。容量素子438の他方の電極は、配線PLに接続される。トランジスタ437のゲートは配線WLに接続される。 In the memory cell 432, one of the source and drain of the transistor 437 is connected to the wiring BL. The other of the source and drain of the transistor 437 is connected to one electrode of the capacitor 438. The other electrode of the capacitor 438 is connected to the wiring PL. The gate of the transistor 437 is connected to the wiring WL.

 配線PLは、容量素子438の電位を保持するための定電位を与える配線である。複数の配線PL同士を接続して1つの配線として用いることで配線数を削減することができる。 The wiring PL is a wiring that provides a constant potential to maintain the potential of the capacitor 438. By connecting multiple wirings PL together and using them as a single wiring, the number of wirings can be reduced.

 本発明の一態様では、OSトランジスタは積層して設けるとともに、ビット線として機能する配線を、層420が設けられる基板表面の垂直方向に配置する。加えて、メモリセル432が有するトランジスタ437及び容量素子438を、層420が設けられる基板表面の垂直方向に並べて配置する。各素子及び各配線を基板表面の垂直方向に設けることで、素子層間の配線の長さを短くできるとともに、単位面積当たりに設けられる素子の密度を高めることができる。そのため、記憶容量及び消費電力の低減に優れた記憶装置とすることができる。 In one embodiment of the present invention, OS transistors are stacked, and wirings that function as bit lines are arranged perpendicular to the surface of the substrate on which the layer 420 is provided. In addition, the transistor 437 and capacitor 438 included in the memory cell 432 are arranged side by side in the perpendicular direction to the surface of the substrate on which the layer 420 is provided. By arranging each element and each wiring perpendicular to the surface of the substrate, the length of the wiring between element layers can be shortened and the density of elements arranged per unit area can be increased. Therefore, a memory device with excellent storage capacity and reduced power consumption can be obtained.

[メモリセル432、センスアンプ446の構成例]
 図15A及び図15Bには、上述したメモリセル432に対応する回路図、及び当該回路図に対応する回路ブロック図を示す。図15A及び図15Bに図示するように、メモリセル432は図面等においてブロックとして表す場合がある。なお図15A及び図15Bに図示する配線BLは、配線BLBに置き換えた場合も同様に表すことができる。
[Configuration example of memory cell 432 and sense amplifier 446]
15A and 15B show a circuit diagram corresponding to the memory cell 432 described above and a circuit block diagram corresponding to the circuit diagram. As shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, the memory cell 432 may be represented as a block in the drawings. Note that the wiring BL shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B can be represented in the same manner even when replaced with a wiring BLB.

 また、図15C及び図15Dには、上述したセンスアンプ446に対応する回路図、及び当該回路図に対応する回路ブロック図を示す。センスアンプ446は、スイッチ回路482、プリチャージ回路483、プリチャージ回路484、増幅回路485を図示している。また、配線BL、配線BLBの他、読み出される信号を出力する配線SA_OUT、配線SA_OUTBを図示している。 FIGS. 15C and 15D show a circuit diagram corresponding to the sense amplifier 446 described above, and a circuit block diagram corresponding to the circuit diagram. The sense amplifier 446 includes a switch circuit 482, a precharge circuit 483, a precharge circuit 484, and an amplifier circuit 485. Also shown are wirings BL and BLB, as well as wirings SA_OUT and SA_OUTB that output signals to be read out.

 スイッチ回路482は、図15Cに図示するように、例えばN型のトランジスタ482_1、482_2を有する。トランジスタ482_1、482_2は、信号CSELに応じて、配線SA_OUT、配線SA_OUTBの配線対と、配線BL、配線BLBの配線対と、の導通状態を切り替える。 As shown in FIG. 15C, the switch circuit 482 includes, for example, N-type transistors 482_1 and 482_2. The transistors 482_1 and 482_2 switch the conduction state between the wiring pair of the wiring SA_OUT and the wiring SA_OUTB and the wiring pair of the wiring BL and the wiring BLB in response to the signal CSEL.

 プリチャージ回路483は、図15Cに図示するように、N型のトランジスタ483_1乃至483_3で構成される。プリチャージ回路483は、信号EQに応じて、配線BL及び配線BLBを電位VDD/2に相当する中間電位VPREにプリチャージするための回路である。 As shown in FIG. 15C, the precharge circuit 483 is composed of N-type transistors 483_1 to 483_3. The precharge circuit 483 is a circuit for precharging the wiring BL and wiring BLB to an intermediate potential VPRE corresponding to a potential VDD/2 in response to a signal EQ.

 プリチャージ回路484は、図15Cに図示するように、P型のトランジスタ484_1乃至484_3で構成される。プリチャージ回路484は、信号EQBに応じて、配線BL及び配線BLBを電位VDD/2に相当する中間電位VPREにプリチャージするための回路である。 As shown in FIG. 15C, the precharge circuit 484 is composed of P-type transistors 484_1 to 484_3. The precharge circuit 484 is a circuit for precharging the wiring BL and wiring BLB to an intermediate potential VPRE corresponding to a potential VDD/2 in response to a signal EQB.

 増幅回路485は、図15Cに図示するように、配線SAPまたは配線SANに接続された、P型のトランジスタ485_1、485_2及びN型のトランジスタ485_3、485_4で構成される。配線SAPまたは配線SANは、VDDまたはVSSを与える機能を有する配線である。トランジスタ485_1乃至485_4は、インバータループを構成するトランジスタである。 As shown in Figure 15C, the amplifier circuit 485 is composed of P-type transistors 485_1 and 485_2 and N-type transistors 485_3 and 485_4 connected to wiring SAP or wiring SAN. The wiring SAP or wiring SAN is a wiring that provides VDD or VSS. The transistors 485_1 to 485_4 are transistors that form an inverter loop.

 また、図15Dには図15C等で説明したセンスアンプ446に対応する回路ブロック図を示す。図15Dに図示するように、センスアンプ446は図面等においてブロックとして表す場合がある。 Furthermore, Figure 15D shows a circuit block diagram corresponding to the sense amplifier 446 described in Figure 15C etc. As shown in Figure 15D, the sense amplifier 446 may be represented as a block in drawings etc.

 図16は、図13の記憶装置480の回路図である。図16では、図15A乃至図15Dで説明した回路ブロックを用いて図示している。 Figure 16 is a circuit diagram of the memory device 480 in Figure 13. Figure 16 illustrates the circuit blocks described in Figures 15A to 15D.

 図16に図示するように素子層430[m]を含む層470は、メモリセル432を有する。図16に図示するメモリセル432は、一例として、対になる配線BL[1]及び配線BLB[1]、または配線BL[2]及び配線BLB[2]に接続される。配線BLに接続されるメモリセル432は、データの書き込みまたは読み出しがされるメモリセルである。 As shown in FIG. 16, the layer 470 including the element layer 430[m] has a memory cell 432. The memory cell 432 shown in FIG. 16 is connected to a pair of wirings BL[1] and BLB[1], or wirings BL[2] and BLB[2], for example. The memory cell 432 connected to wiring BL is a memory cell to which data is written or read.

 配線BL[1]及び配線BLB[1]は、センスアンプ446[1]に接続され、配線BL[2]及び配線BLB[2]は、センスアンプ446[2]に接続される。センスアンプ446[1]及びセンスアンプ446[2]は、図15Cで説明した各種信号に応じてデータの読み出しを行うことができる。 Wiring BL[1] and wiring BLB[1] are connected to sense amplifier 446[1], and wiring BL[2] and wiring BLB[2] are connected to sense amplifier 446[2]. Sense amplifier 446[1] and sense amplifier 446[2] can read data in response to the various signals described in Figure 15C.

 本実施の形態は、少なくともその一部を本明細書中に記載する他の実施の形態と適宜組み合わせて実施することができる。 This embodiment can be implemented by appropriately combining at least a portion of it with other embodiments described in this specification.

(実施の形態4)
 本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様のトランジスタを適用することのできる表示装置の構成例について説明する。
(Embodiment 4)
In this embodiment, a structural example of a display device to which a transistor of one embodiment of the present invention can be applied will be described.

 本発明の一態様のトランジスタは、極めて微細なものとすることができるため、本発明の一態様のトランジスタを適用する表示装置は、極めて高精細な表示装置とすることができる。例えば、本発明の一態様の表示装置は、腕時計型、及び、ブレスレット型などの情報端末機(ウェアラブル機器)の表示部、並びに、ヘッドマウントディスプレイなどのVR向け機器、及び、メガネ型のAR向け機器などの頭部に装着可能な機器(HMD:Head Mounted Display)の表示部に用いることができる。 Since the transistor of one embodiment of the present invention can be made extremely small, a display device to which the transistor of one embodiment of the present invention is applied can be a display device with extremely high resolution. For example, the display device of one embodiment of the present invention can be used in the display portion of information terminals (wearable devices) such as wristwatches and bracelets, as well as in the display portion of head-mounted displays (HMDs), VR devices such as head-mounted displays, and glasses-type AR devices.

 本発明の一態様の表示装置は、駆動回路と画素回路とを重ねて設けることができる。このとき、駆動回路を構成するトランジスタに、実施の形態1で例示した単結晶基板にチャネルが形成されるトランジスタを適用し、画素を構成するトランジスタに、単結晶の酸化物半導体にチャネルが形成されるトランジスタを適用することができる。 In a display device according to one embodiment of the present invention, a driver circuit and a pixel circuit can be provided so as to overlap each other. In this case, the transistor in which a channel is formed in a single crystal substrate, as exemplified in Embodiment 1, can be used as a transistor constituting the driver circuit, and the transistor in which a channel is formed in a single crystal oxide semiconductor can be used as a transistor constituting the pixel.

[表示モジュール]
 図17Aに、表示モジュール580の斜視図を示す。表示モジュール580は、表示装置500Aと、FPC590と、を有する。
[Display module]
17A shows a perspective view of the display module 580. The display module 580 includes a display device 500A and an FPC 590.

 表示モジュール580は、基板591及び基板592を有する。表示モジュール580は、表示部581を有する。表示部581は、画像を表示する領域である。 Display module 580 has substrate 591 and substrate 592. Display module 580 has display unit 581. Display unit 581 is an area that displays images.

 図17Bに、基板591側の構成を模式的に示した斜視図を示している。基板591上には、回路部582と、回路部582上の画素回路部583と、画素回路部583上の画素部584と、が積層されている。また、基板591上の画素部584と重ならない部分に、FPC590と接続するための端子部585が設けられている。端子部585と回路部582とは、複数の配線により構成される配線部586により電気的に接続されている。 Figure 17B shows a perspective view that schematically illustrates the configuration on the substrate 591 side. Stacked on the substrate 591 are a circuit section 582, a pixel circuit section 583 on the circuit section 582, and a pixel section 584 on the pixel circuit section 583. A terminal section 585 for connecting to the FPC 590 is provided in a portion of the substrate 591 that does not overlap with the pixel section 584. The terminal section 585 and the circuit section 582 are electrically connected by a wiring section 586 that is composed of multiple wirings.

 画素部584は、周期的に配列した複数の画素584aを有する。図17Bの右側に、1つの画素584aの拡大図を示している。画素584aは、赤色の光を発する発光素子110R、緑色の光を発する発光素子110G、及び、青色の光を発する発光素子110Bを有する。 The pixel section 584 has a plurality of periodically arranged pixels 584a. An enlarged view of one pixel 584a is shown on the right side of Figure 17B. The pixel 584a has a light-emitting element 110R that emits red light, a light-emitting element 110G that emits green light, and a light-emitting element 110B that emits blue light.

 画素回路部583は、周期的に配列した複数の画素回路583aを有する。1つの画素回路583aは、1つの画素584aが有する3つの発光デバイスの発光を制御する回路である。1つの画素回路583aには、1つの発光デバイスの発光を制御する回路が3つ設けられる構成としてもよい。例えば、画素回路583aは、1つの発光デバイスにつき、1つの選択トランジスタと、1つの電流制御用トランジスタ(駆動トランジスタ)と、容量素子と、を少なくとも有する構成とすることができる。このとき、選択トランジスタのゲートにはゲート信号が、ソースにはソース信号が、それぞれ入力される。これにより、アクティブマトリクス型の表示パネルが実現されている。 The pixel circuit section 583 has a plurality of pixel circuits 583a arranged periodically. Each pixel circuit 583a is a circuit that controls the light emission of three light-emitting devices in one pixel 584a. One pixel circuit 583a may be configured to have three circuits that control the light emission of one light-emitting device. For example, the pixel circuit 583a may be configured to have at least one selection transistor, one current control transistor (drive transistor), and a capacitance element per light-emitting device. In this case, a gate signal is input to the gate of the selection transistor, and a source signal is input to the source. This realizes an active matrix display panel.

 回路部582は、画素回路部583の各画素回路583aを駆動する回路を有する。例えば、ゲート線駆動回路、及び、ソース線駆動回路の一方または双方を有することが好ましい。このほか、演算回路、メモリ回路、及び電源回路等の少なくとも一つを有していてもよい。また、回路部582に設けられるトランジスタが画素回路583aの一部を構成してもよい。すなわち、画素回路583aが、画素回路部583が有するトランジスタと、回路部582が有するトランジスタと、により構成されていてもよい。 The circuit portion 582 has a circuit that drives each pixel circuit 583a in the pixel circuit portion 583. For example, it preferably has one or both of a gate line driver circuit and a source line driver circuit. In addition, it may have at least one of an arithmetic circuit, a memory circuit, a power supply circuit, etc. Furthermore, a transistor provided in the circuit portion 582 may constitute part of the pixel circuit 583a. In other words, the pixel circuit 583a may be composed of a transistor included in the pixel circuit portion 583 and a transistor included in the circuit portion 582.

 FPC590は、外部から回路部582にビデオ信号及び電源電位等を供給するための配線として機能する。また、FPC590上にICが実装されていてもよい。 The FPC 590 functions as wiring for supplying video signals, power supply potential, etc. from the outside to the circuit section 582. An IC may also be mounted on the FPC 590.

 表示モジュール580は、画素部584の下側に画素回路部583及び回路部582の一方または双方が重ねて設けられた構成とすることができるため、表示部581の開口率(有効表示面積比)を極めて高くすることができる。例えば表示部581の開口率は、40%以上100%未満、好ましくは50%以上95%以下、より好ましくは60%以上95%以下とすることができる。また、画素584aを極めて高密度に配置することが可能で、表示部581の精細度を極めて高くすることができる。例えば、表示部581には、2000ppi以上、好ましくは3000ppi以上、より好ましくは5000ppi以上、さらに好ましくは6000ppi以上であって、20000ppi以下、または30000ppi以下の精細度で、画素584aが配置されることが好ましい。 The display module 580 can be configured such that one or both of the pixel circuit unit 583 and the circuit unit 582 are overlapped below the pixel unit 584, thereby enabling the aperture ratio (effective display area ratio) of the display unit 581 to be extremely high. For example, the aperture ratio of the display unit 581 can be 40% or more and less than 100%, preferably 50% or more and 95% or less, and more preferably 60% or more and 95% or less. Furthermore, the pixels 584a can be arranged at an extremely high density, enabling the resolution of the display unit 581 to be extremely high. For example, it is preferable that the pixels 584a be arranged in the display unit 581 at a resolution of 2000 ppi or more, preferably 3000 ppi or more, more preferably 5000 ppi or more, and even more preferably 6000 ppi or more, and 20,000 ppi or less, or 30,000 ppi or less.

 このような表示モジュール580は、極めて高精細であることから、ヘッドマウントディスプレイなどのVR向け機器、またはメガネ型のAR向け機器に好適に用いることができる。例えば、レンズを通して表示モジュール580の表示部を視認する構成の場合であっても、表示モジュール580は極めて高精細な表示部581を有するためにレンズで表示部を拡大しても画素が視認されず、没入感の高い表示を行うことができる。また、表示モジュール580はこれに限られず、比較的小型の表示部を有する電子機器に好適に用いることができる。例えば腕時計などの装着型の電子機器の表示部に好適に用いることができる。 Because such a display module 580 has extremely high resolution, it can be suitably used in VR devices such as head-mounted displays, or in glasses-type AR devices. For example, even in a configuration in which the display section of the display module 580 is viewed through lenses, the display module 580 has an extremely high-resolution display section 581, so even if the display section is enlarged with lenses, the pixels are not visible, allowing for a highly immersive display. Furthermore, the display module 580 is not limited to this, and can be suitably used in electronic devices with relatively small displays. For example, it can be suitably used in the display section of wearable electronic devices such as wristwatches.

[表示装置500A]
 図18に示す表示装置500Aは、基板301、発光素子110R、発光素子110G、発光素子110B、容量540、トランジスタ310、及びトランジスタ320を有する。
[Display device 500A]
The display device 500A shown in FIG. 18 includes a substrate 301, a light emitting element 110R, a light emitting element 110G, a light emitting element 110B, a capacitor 540, a transistor 310, and a transistor 320.

 トランジスタ310は、実施の形態1で例示した、単結晶基板にチャネルが形成されるトランジスタ50に対応する。またトランジスタ320は、実施の形態1及び実施の形態2で例示した、単結晶の酸化物半導体にチャネルが形成されるトランジスタ10またはトランジスタ200に対応する。トランジスタ320には、実施の形態2で例示した各種トランジスタを適用できる。 Transistor 310 corresponds to transistor 50, which is illustrated in embodiment 1 and has a channel formed in a single crystal substrate. Transistor 320 corresponds to transistor 10 or transistor 200, which is illustrated in embodiment 1 and embodiment 2 and has a channel formed in a single crystal oxide semiconductor. Any of the various transistors illustrated in embodiment 2 can be used as transistor 320.

 トランジスタ310は、基板301にチャネル形成領域を有するトランジスタである。基板301としては、例えば単結晶シリコン基板などの半導体基板を用いることができる。トランジスタ310は、基板301の一部、導電層311、低抵抗領域312、絶縁層313、及び、絶縁層314を有する。導電層311は、ゲート電極として機能する。絶縁層313は、基板301と導電層311の間に位置し、ゲート絶縁層として機能する。低抵抗領域312は、基板301に不純物がドープされた領域であり、ソースまたはドレインの一方として機能する。絶縁層314は、導電層311の側面を覆って設けられる。 Transistor 310 is a transistor that has a channel formation region in substrate 301. Substrate 301 can be, for example, a semiconductor substrate such as a single crystal silicon substrate. Transistor 310 has a part of substrate 301, conductive layer 311, low-resistance region 312, insulating layer 313, and insulating layer 314. Conductive layer 311 functions as a gate electrode. Insulating layer 313 is located between substrate 301 and conductive layer 311 and functions as a gate insulating layer. Low-resistance region 312 is a region in which impurities are doped into substrate 301, and functions as either a source or a drain. Insulating layer 314 is provided to cover the side surface of conductive layer 311.

 また、基板301に埋め込まれるように、隣接する2つのトランジスタ310の間に素子分離層315が設けられている。 In addition, an element isolation layer 315 is provided between two adjacent transistors 310 so as to be embedded in the substrate 301.

 トランジスタ320は、半導体層351、絶縁層353、導電層354、一対の導電層355、絶縁層360、及び、導電層357を有する。 The transistor 320 has a semiconductor layer 351, an insulating layer 353, a conductive layer 354, a pair of conductive layers 355, an insulating layer 360, and a conductive layer 357.

 トランジスタ310が設けられる層と、トランジスタ320が設けられる層との間には、配線層371と、配線層361が設けられる。配線層371は少なくとも、最も上部に絶縁層372と、絶縁層372に埋め込まれた導電層373を有する。配線層361は少なくとも、最も下部に絶縁層362と、絶縁層362に埋め込まれた導電層363を有する。表示装置500Aは、配線層361と配線層371との間で接合することにより作製される。すなわち、絶縁層372、導電層373、絶縁層362、及び導電層363は、それぞれ接合面有する。導電層363と導電層373とが接続されることにより、トランジスタ310とトランジスタ320とを、各種配線を介して電気的に接続することができる。 Wiring layer 371 and wiring layer 361 are provided between the layer in which transistor 310 is provided and the layer in which transistor 320 is provided. Wiring layer 371 has at least an insulating layer 372 at the top and a conductive layer 373 embedded in insulating layer 372. Wiring layer 361 has at least an insulating layer 362 at the bottom and a conductive layer 363 embedded in insulating layer 362. Display device 500A is manufactured by bonding between wiring layer 361 and wiring layer 371. That is, insulating layer 372, conductive layer 373, insulating layer 362, and conductive layer 363 each have a bonding surface. By connecting conductive layer 363 and conductive layer 373, transistor 310 and transistor 320 can be electrically connected via various wirings.

 絶縁層360から配線層361までの積層構造は、絶縁層360側から順に形成され、その後、配線層361の表面を接合面として、基板301と貼りあわされている。そのため、絶縁層360から配線層361までの積層構造は、トランジスタ310等と上下関係が逆転している。 The layered structure from insulating layer 360 to wiring layer 361 is formed in order from the insulating layer 360 side, and then the surface of wiring layer 361 is used as the bonding surface and bonded to substrate 301. Therefore, the layered structure from insulating layer 360 to wiring layer 361 is upside down relative to transistor 310, etc.

 トランジスタ320は、絶縁層352と、絶縁層359とに挟持されている。絶縁層352及び絶縁層359は、それぞれ水素および酸素に対してバリア性を有することが好ましい。これにより、不純物がトランジスタ320に拡散すること、及び半導体層351から酸素が脱離することを防ぐことができる。絶縁層352及び絶縁層359としては、例えば酸化アルミニウム膜、酸化ハフニウム膜、窒化シリコン膜などの、酸化シリコン膜よりも水素または酸素が拡散しにくい膜を用いることができる。 Transistor 320 is sandwiched between insulating layers 352 and 359. Insulating layers 352 and 359 preferably have barrier properties against hydrogen and oxygen, respectively. This prevents impurities from diffusing into transistor 320 and oxygen from being released from semiconductor layer 351. For insulating layers 352 and 359, films that are less susceptible to hydrogen or oxygen diffusion than silicon oxide films, such as aluminum oxide films, hafnium oxide films, and silicon nitride films, can be used.

 絶縁層352より基板301側に絶縁層356と、絶縁層356に埋め込まれた導電層357が設けられている。また導電層357と半導体層351との間には、絶縁層360が設けられている。導電層357は、トランジスタ320の第2のゲート電極として機能し、絶縁層360の一部は、第2のゲート絶縁層として機能する。 An insulating layer 356 and a conductive layer 357 embedded in the insulating layer 356 are provided closer to the substrate 301 than the insulating layer 352. An insulating layer 360 is provided between the conductive layer 357 and the semiconductor layer 351. The conductive layer 357 functions as the second gate electrode of the transistor 320, and part of the insulating layer 360 functions as the second gate insulating layer.

 絶縁層360は半導体層351に接する。絶縁層360は、基板11または下地膜12に対応することができる。または、基板11及び下地膜12とは別の絶縁膜であってもよい。なお、絶縁層360に基板11を用い、厚さを薄くすることが困難である場合などで、バックゲートを設けない構成としてもよい。 The insulating layer 360 contacts the semiconductor layer 351. The insulating layer 360 can correspond to the substrate 11 or the base film 12. Alternatively, the insulating layer 360 may be an insulating film separate from the substrate 11 and the base film 12. Note that if the substrate 11 is used for the insulating layer 360 and it is difficult to reduce its thickness, a configuration without a back gate may be used.

 半導体層351は、絶縁層360の基板301側に設けられる。半導体層351は、半導体特性を示す金属酸化物(酸化物半導体ともいう)膜を有することが好ましい。一対の導電層355は、半導体層351に接して設けられ、ソース電極及びドレイン電極として機能する。 The semiconductor layer 351 is provided on the substrate 301 side of the insulating layer 360. The semiconductor layer 351 preferably includes a metal oxide (also referred to as an oxide semiconductor) film that exhibits semiconductor characteristics. A pair of conductive layers 355 is provided in contact with the semiconductor layer 351 and functions as a source electrode and a drain electrode.

 一対の導電層355及び半導体層351等を覆って、絶縁層358及び絶縁層350が設けられている。絶縁層358は、半導体層351に水または水素などの不純物が拡散すること、及び半導体層351から酸素が脱離することを防ぐバリア層として機能する。絶縁層358としては、上記絶縁層352と同様の絶縁膜を用いることができる。また、絶縁層350は層間絶縁層として機能する。 Insulating layers 358 and 350 are provided to cover the pair of conductive layers 355 and the semiconductor layer 351. The insulating layer 358 functions as a barrier layer that prevents impurities such as water or hydrogen from diffusing into the semiconductor layer 351 and prevents oxygen from being released from the semiconductor layer 351. The insulating layer 358 can be made of an insulating film similar to the insulating layer 352. The insulating layer 350 functions as an interlayer insulating layer.

 絶縁層358及び絶縁層350に、半導体層351に達する開口が設けられている。当該開口の内部に、半導体層351の上面に接する絶縁層353と、導電層354とが埋め込まれている。導電層354は、第1のゲート電極として機能し、絶縁層353は第1のゲート絶縁層として機能する。 Openings are provided in insulating layer 358 and insulating layer 350, reaching semiconductor layer 351. An insulating layer 353 in contact with the top surface of semiconductor layer 351 and a conductive layer 354 are buried inside the openings. The conductive layer 354 functions as a first gate electrode, and the insulating layer 353 functions as a first gate insulating layer.

 導電層354、絶縁層353、及び絶縁層350のそれぞれの上面(基板301側の面)は、それぞれ高さが一致または概略一致するように平坦化処理され、これらを覆って絶縁層359が設けられている。絶縁層359は、トランジスタ320に水または水素などの不純物が拡散することを防ぐバリア層として機能する。絶縁層359としては、上記絶縁層352と同様の絶縁膜を用いることができる。 The top surfaces (surfaces facing the substrate 301) of the conductive layer 354, the insulating layer 353, and the insulating layer 350 are planarized so that they are at the same or approximately the same height, and an insulating layer 359 is provided to cover them. The insulating layer 359 functions as a barrier layer that prevents impurities such as water or hydrogen from diffusing into the transistor 320. The insulating layer 359 can be made of an insulating film similar to the insulating layer 352 described above.

 トランジスタ320には、チャネルが形成される半導体層を2つのゲートで挟持する構成が適用されている。2つのゲートを接続し、これらに同一の信号を供給することによりトランジスタを駆動してもよい。または、2つのゲートのうち、一方に閾値電圧を制御するための電位を与え、他方に駆動のための電位を与えることで、トランジスタの閾値電圧を制御してもよい。 Transistor 320 has a configuration in which a semiconductor layer in which a channel is formed is sandwiched between two gates. The two gates may be connected and the transistor may be driven by supplying the same signal to them. Alternatively, the threshold voltage of the transistor may be controlled by applying a potential to one of the two gates for controlling the threshold voltage and a potential to the other for driving.

 絶縁層359を覆って絶縁層565が設けられている。絶縁層565は、層間絶縁層として機能する。 Insulating layer 565 is provided covering insulating layer 359. Insulating layer 565 functions as an interlayer insulating layer.

 導電層355の一方と電気的に接続するプラグ575は、絶縁層565、絶縁層359、絶縁層350及び絶縁層358に埋め込まれるように設けられている。ここで、プラグ575は、絶縁層565等の開口の側面、及び導電層355の一部を覆う導電層575aと、導電層575aに接する導電層575bとを有することが好ましい。このとき、導電層575aとして、酸素が拡散しにくい導電材料を用いることが好ましい。 A plug 575 electrically connected to one side of the conductive layer 355 is provided so as to be embedded in the insulating layer 565, the insulating layer 359, the insulating layer 350, and the insulating layer 358. Here, the plug 575 preferably has a conductive layer 575a that covers the side surfaces of the opening in the insulating layer 565, etc., and a portion of the conductive layer 355, and a conductive layer 575b that contacts the conductive layer 575a. In this case, it is preferable to use a conductive material that is difficult for oxygen to diffuse into as the conductive layer 575a.

 絶縁層565の基板301側には導電層364が設けられている。プラグ575は、導電層355と導電層364とを接続している。 A conductive layer 364 is provided on the substrate 301 side of the insulating layer 565. A plug 575 connects the conductive layer 355 and the conductive layer 364.

 また、絶縁層564上に容量540が設けられている。容量540は、導電層541と、導電層545と、これらの間に位置する絶縁層543を有する。導電層541は、容量540の一方の電極として機能し、導電層545は、容量540の他方の電極として機能し、絶縁層543は、容量540の誘電体として機能する。 Furthermore, capacitor 540 is provided on insulating layer 564. Capacitor 540 has conductive layer 541, conductive layer 545, and insulating layer 543 located between them. Conductive layer 541 functions as one electrode of capacitor 540, conductive layer 545 functions as the other electrode of capacitor 540, and insulating layer 543 functions as a dielectric of capacitor 540.

 導電層541は絶縁層564上に設けられた絶縁層554に埋め込まれている。導電層541は、プラグ574によって導電層364と電気的に接続されている。絶縁層543は導電層541を覆って設けられる。導電層545は、絶縁層543を介して導電層541と重なる領域に設けられている。導電層541は、プラグ574、導電層364及びプラグ575を介してトランジスタ320の導電層355と接続されている。 The conductive layer 541 is embedded in an insulating layer 554 provided on the insulating layer 564. The conductive layer 541 is electrically connected to the conductive layer 364 via a plug 574. The insulating layer 543 is provided to cover the conductive layer 541. The conductive layer 545 is provided in a region that overlaps with the conductive layer 541 via the insulating layer 543. The conductive layer 541 is connected to the conductive layer 355 of the transistor 320 via the plug 574, the conductive layer 364, and the plug 575.

 プラグ574は、絶縁層564、絶縁層352、絶縁層356、絶縁層358、絶縁層350、絶縁層359、及び絶縁層565に埋め込まれるように設けられ、導電層574aと、導電層574bとを有する。導電層574aは、酸素が拡散しにくい導電材料を用いることが好ましい。 Plug 574 is embedded in insulating layer 564, insulating layer 352, insulating layer 356, insulating layer 358, insulating layer 350, insulating layer 359, and insulating layer 565, and includes conductive layer 574a and conductive layer 574b. Conductive layer 574a is preferably made of a conductive material that is resistant to oxygen diffusion.

 容量540を覆って、絶縁層555aが設けられ、絶縁層555a上に絶縁層555bが設けられ、絶縁層555b上に絶縁層555cが設けられている。 An insulating layer 555a is provided covering the capacitor 540, an insulating layer 555b is provided on the insulating layer 555a, and an insulating layer 555c is provided on the insulating layer 555b.

 絶縁層555a、絶縁層555b、及び絶縁層555cには、それぞれ無機絶縁膜を好適に用いることができる。例えば、絶縁層555a及び絶縁層555cに酸化シリコン膜を用い、絶縁層555bに窒化シリコン膜を用いることが好ましい。これにより、絶縁層555bは、エッチング保護膜として機能させることができる。本実施の形態では、絶縁層555cの一部がエッチングされ、凹部が形成されている例を示すが、絶縁層555cに凹部が設けられていなくてもよい。 Insulating layers 555a, 555b, and 555c can each preferably be made of an inorganic insulating film. For example, it is preferable to use silicon oxide films for insulating layers 555a and 555c, and a silicon nitride film for insulating layer 555b. This allows insulating layer 555b to function as an etching protection film. This embodiment shows an example in which part of insulating layer 555c is etched to form a recess, but insulating layer 555c does not necessarily have to have a recess.

 絶縁層555c上に発光素子110R、発光素子110G、及び、発光素子110Bが設けられている。 Light-emitting elements 110R, 110G, and 110B are provided on insulating layer 555c.

 発光素子110Rは、画素電極111R、有機層112R、共通層114、及び共通電極113を有する。発光素子110Gは、画素電極111G、有機層112G、共通層114、及び共通電極113を有する。発光素子110Bは、画素電極111B、有機層112B、共通層114、及び共通電極113を有する。共通層114と共通電極113は、発光素子110R、発光素子110G、及び発光素子110Bに共通に設けられる。 Light-emitting element 110R has pixel electrode 111R, organic layer 112R, common layer 114, and common electrode 113. Light-emitting element 110G has pixel electrode 111G, organic layer 112G, common layer 114, and common electrode 113. Light-emitting element 110B has pixel electrode 111B, organic layer 112B, common layer 114, and common electrode 113. Common layer 114 and common electrode 113 are provided in common to light-emitting element 110R, light-emitting element 110G, and light-emitting element 110B.

 発光素子110Rが有する有機層112Rは、少なくとも赤色の光を発する発光性の有機化合物を有する。発光素子110Gが有する有機層112Gは、少なくとも緑色の光を発する発光性の有機化合物を有する。発光素子110Bが有する有機層112Bは、少なくとも青色の光を発する発光性の有機化合物を有する。有機層112R、有機層112G、及び有機層112Bは、それぞれEL層とも呼ぶことができ、少なくとも発光性の有機化合物を含む層(発光層)を有する。 Organic layer 112R of light-emitting element 110R contains a light-emitting organic compound that emits at least red light. Organic layer 112G of light-emitting element 110G contains a light-emitting organic compound that emits at least green light. Organic layer 112B of light-emitting element 110B contains a light-emitting organic compound that emits at least blue light. Organic layer 112R, organic layer 112G, and organic layer 112B can each be referred to as an EL layer, and each contains at least a layer (light-emitting layer) that contains a light-emitting organic compound.

 表示装置500Aは、発光色ごとに、発光デバイスを作り分けているため、低輝度での発光と高輝度での発光で色度の変化が小さい。また、有機層112R、112G、112Bがそれぞれ離隔しているため、高精細な表示パネルであっても、隣接する副画素間におけるクロストークの発生を抑制することができる。したがって、高精細であり、かつ、表示品位の高い表示パネルを実現することができる。 In display device 500A, a separate light-emitting device is created for each emitted color, resulting in little change in chromaticity between light emitted at low and high brightness. Furthermore, because organic layers 112R, 112G, and 112B are spaced apart from each other, crosstalk between adjacent subpixels can be suppressed even in high-resolution display panels. This makes it possible to achieve a display panel that is both high-resolution and has high display quality.

 隣り合う発光素子の間の領域には、絶縁層125、樹脂層126、及び層128が設けられる。 Insulating layer 125, resin layer 126, and layer 128 are provided in the area between adjacent light-emitting elements.

 発光素子の画素電極111R、画素電極111G、及び、画素電極111Bは、絶縁層555a、絶縁層555b、及び、絶縁層555cに埋め込まれたプラグ556、絶縁層554に埋め込まれた導電層541、及びプラグ574によってトランジスタ320の導電層355と電気的に接続されている。絶縁層555cの上面の高さと、プラグ556の上面の高さは、一致または概略一致している。プラグには各種導電材料を用いることができる。 Pixel electrodes 111R, 111G, and 111B of the light-emitting element are electrically connected to conductive layer 355 of transistor 320 via plug 556 embedded in insulating layers 555a, 555b, and 555c, conductive layer 541 embedded in insulating layer 554, and plug 574. The height of the top surface of insulating layer 555c and the height of the top surface of plug 556 are the same or approximately the same. Various conductive materials can be used for the plug.

 また、発光素子110R、110G、及び110B上には保護層121が設けられている。保護層121上には、接着層171によって基板170が貼り合わされている。 In addition, a protective layer 121 is provided on the light-emitting elements 110R, 110G, and 110B. A substrate 170 is bonded to the protective layer 121 by an adhesive layer 171.

 隣接する2つの画素電極111間には、画素電極111の上面端部を覆う絶縁層が設けられていない。そのため、隣り合う発光素子の間隔を極めて狭くすることができる。したがって、高精細、または、高解像度の表示装置とすることができる。 There is no insulating layer covering the top edge of each of the two adjacent pixel electrodes 111. This allows the distance between adjacent light-emitting elements to be extremely narrow. This allows for a high-definition or high-resolution display device.

 本実施の形態は、少なくともその一部を本明細書中に記載する他の実施の形態と適宜組み合わせて実施することができる。 This embodiment can be implemented by appropriately combining at least a portion of it with other embodiments described in this specification.

(実施の形態5)
 本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様のトランジスタを用いて作製される表示装置に適用可能な、表示装置の構成例について説明する。以下で例示する表示装置は、上記実施の形態4の画素部584などに適用することができる。
Fifth Embodiment
In this embodiment, a structural example of a display device that can be used for a display device manufactured using a transistor of one embodiment of the present invention will be described. The display device exemplified below can be used for the pixel portion 584 in Embodiment 4, for example.

 本発明の一態様は、EL層をファインメタルマスク(FMM)などのシャドーマスクを用いることなく、フォトリソグラフィにより、微細なパターンに加工する。これにより、これまで実現が困難であった高い精細度と、大きな開口率を有する表示装置を実現できる。さらに、EL層を作り分けることができるため、極めて鮮やかで、コントラストが高く、表示品位の高い表示装置を実現できる。なお、例えば、EL層をメタルマスクと、フォトリソグラフィと、の双方を用いて微細なパターンに加工してもよい。 In one embodiment of the present invention, the EL layer is processed into a fine pattern by photolithography without using a shadow mask such as a fine metal mask (FMM). This makes it possible to realize a display device with high definition and a large aperture ratio, which has been difficult to achieve until now. Furthermore, because the EL layer can be produced separately, it is possible to realize a display device that is extremely vivid, has high contrast, and has high display quality. Note that, for example, the EL layer may be processed into a fine pattern using both a metal mask and photolithography.

 また、EL層の一部または全部を物理的に分断することができる。これにより、隣接する発光素子間で共通に用いる層(共通層ともいう)を介した、発光素子間のリーク電流を抑制することができる。これにより、意図しない発光に起因したクロストークを防ぐことができ、コントラストの極めて高い表示装置を実現できる。特に、低輝度における電流効率の高い表示装置を実現できる。 Furthermore, part or all of the EL layer can be physically separated. This makes it possible to suppress leakage current between light-emitting elements via a layer shared between adjacent light-emitting elements (also called a common layer). This makes it possible to prevent crosstalk caused by unintended light emission, and realize a display device with extremely high contrast. In particular, it makes it possible to realize a display device with high current efficiency at low luminance.

 本発明の一態様は、白色発光の発光素子と、カラーフィルタとを組み合わせた表示装置とすることもできる。この場合、異なる色の光を呈する画素(副画素)に設けられる発光素子に、それぞれ同じ構成の発光素子を適用することができ、全ての層を共通層とすることができる。さらに、それぞれのEL層の一部または全部を、フォトリソグラフィにより分断してもよい。これにより、共通層を介したリーク電流が抑制され、コントラストの高い表示装置を実現できる。特に、導電性の高い中間層を介して、複数の発光層を積層したタンデム構造を有する素子では、当該中間層を介したリーク電流を効果的に防ぐことができるため、高い輝度、高い精細度、及び高いコントラストを兼ね備えた表示装置を実現できる。 One embodiment of the present invention can also be a display device that combines a white-emitting light-emitting element with a color filter. In this case, light-emitting elements provided in pixels (sub-pixels) that emit light of different colors can each have the same configuration, and all layers can be common layers. Furthermore, part or all of each EL layer can be separated by photolithography. This suppresses leakage current through the common layer, making it possible to realize a display device with high contrast. In particular, in an element having a tandem structure in which multiple light-emitting layers are stacked via a highly conductive intermediate layer, leakage current through the intermediate layer can be effectively prevented, making it possible to realize a display device that combines high brightness, high definition, and high contrast.

 EL層をフォトリソグラフィ法により加工する場合、発光層の一部が露出し、劣化の要因となる場合がある。そのため、少なくとも島状の発光層の側面を覆う絶縁層を設けることが好ましい。当該絶縁層は、島状のEL層の上面の一部を覆う構成としてもよい。当該絶縁層としては、水及び酸素に対してバリア性を有する材料を用いることが好ましい。例えば、水または酸素を拡散しにくい、無機絶縁膜を用いることができる。これにより、EL層の劣化を抑制し、信頼性の高い表示装置を実現できる。 When the EL layer is processed using photolithography, part of the light-emitting layer may be exposed, which may lead to deterioration. For this reason, it is preferable to provide an insulating layer that covers at least the side surfaces of the island-shaped light-emitting layers. The insulating layer may also be configured to cover part of the top surface of the island-shaped EL layer. For the insulating layer, it is preferable to use a material that has barrier properties against water and oxygen. For example, an inorganic insulating film that does not easily diffuse water or oxygen can be used. This suppresses deterioration of the EL layer and enables the realization of a highly reliable display device.

 さらに、隣接する2つの発光素子間には、いずれの発光素子のEL層も設けられない領域(凹部)を有する。当該凹部を覆って共通電極、または共通電極及び共通層を形成する場合、共通電極がEL層の端部の段差により分断されてしまう現象(段切れともいう)が生じ、EL層上の共通電極が絶縁してしまう場合がある。そこで、隣接する2つの発光素子間に位置する局所的な段差を、平坦化膜として機能する樹脂層により埋める構成(LFP:Local Filling Planarizationともいう)とすることが好ましい。当該樹脂層は、平坦化膜としての機能を有する。これにより、共通層または共通電極の段切れを抑制し、信頼性の高い表示装置を実現できる。 Furthermore, there is a region (recess) between two adjacent light-emitting elements where the EL layer of either light-emitting element is not provided. If a common electrode, or a common electrode and common layer, is formed to cover this recess, a phenomenon occurs in which the common electrode is separated by a step at the edge of the EL layer (also known as a step disconnection), and the common electrode on the EL layer may become insulated. Therefore, it is preferable to use a configuration in which the local step located between two adjacent light-emitting elements is filled with a resin layer that functions as a planarizing film (also known as LFP: Local Filling Planarization). This resin layer functions as a planarizing film. This suppresses step disconnection of the common layer or common electrode, making it possible to realize a highly reliable display device.

 以下では、本発明の一態様の表示装置の、より具体的な構成例について、図面を参照して説明する。 Below, a more specific configuration example of a display device according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[構成例1]
 図19Aに、本発明の一態様の表示装置100の上面概略図を示す。表示装置100は、基板101上に、赤色を呈する発光素子110R、緑色を呈する発光素子110G、及び青色を呈する発光素子110Bをそれぞれ複数有する。図19Aでは、各発光素子の区別を簡単にするため、各発光素子の発光領域内にR、G、Bの符号を付している。
[Configuration Example 1]
19A is a schematic top view of a display device 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention. The display device 100 includes a plurality of red light-emitting elements 110R, a plurality of green light-emitting elements 110G, and a plurality of blue light-emitting elements 110B over a substrate 101. In FIG. 19A , the light-emitting regions of the light-emitting elements are labeled with R, G, and B to easily distinguish the light-emitting elements from one another.

 発光素子110R、発光素子110G、及び発光素子110Bは、それぞれマトリクス状に配列している。図19Aは、一方向に同一の色の発光素子が配列する、いわゆるストライプ配列を示している。なお、発光素子の配列方法はこれに限られず、Sストライプ配列、デルタ配列、ベイヤー配列、ジグザグ配列などの配列方法を適用してもよいし、ペンタイル配列、ダイヤモンド配列などを用いることもできる。 Light-emitting elements 110R, 110G, and 110B are each arranged in a matrix. Figure 19A shows a so-called stripe arrangement, in which light-emitting elements of the same color are arranged in one direction. Note that the arrangement method for the light-emitting elements is not limited to this, and arrangement methods such as an S-stripe arrangement, a delta arrangement, a Bayer arrangement, or a zigzag arrangement may also be used, and a pentile arrangement, diamond arrangement, etc. may also be used.

 発光素子110R、発光素子110G、及び発光素子110Bとしては、例えばOLED(Organic Light Emitting Diode)、またはQLED(Quantum−dot Light Emitting Diode)を用いることが好ましい。EL素子が有する発光物質としては、例えば蛍光を発する物質(蛍光材料)、燐光を発する物質(燐光材料)、及び熱活性化遅延蛍光を示す物質(熱活性化遅延蛍光(Thermally activated delayed fluorescence:TADF)材料)が挙げられる。EL素子が有する発光物質としては、有機化合物だけでなく、無機化合物(量子ドット材料など)を用いることができる。 As light-emitting elements 110R, 110G, and 110B, it is preferable to use, for example, an OLED (organic light-emitting diode) or a QLED (quantum-dot light-emitting diode). Examples of light-emitting materials that EL elements have include fluorescent materials, phosphorescent materials, and thermally activated delayed fluorescence (TADF materials). As light-emitting materials that EL elements have, not only organic compounds but also inorganic compounds (such as quantum dot materials) can be used.

 また、図19Aには、共通電極113と電気的に接続する接続電極111Cを示している。接続電極111Cは、共通電極113に供給するための電位(例えばアノード電位、またはカソード電位)が与えられる。接続電極111Cは、発光素子110Rなどが配列する表示領域の外に設けられる。 FIG. 19A also shows a connection electrode 111C that is electrically connected to the common electrode 113. A potential (e.g., an anode potential or a cathode potential) is applied to the connection electrode 111C to be supplied to the common electrode 113. The connection electrode 111C is provided outside the display area where the light-emitting elements 110R and the like are arranged.

 接続電極111Cは、表示領域の外周に沿って設けることができる。例えば、表示領域の外周の一辺に沿って設けられていてもよいし、表示領域の外周の2辺以上にわたって設けられていてもよい。すなわち、表示領域の上面形状が長方形である場合には、接続電極111Cの上面形状は、帯状(長方形)、L字状、コの字状(角括弧状)、または四角形などとすることができる。 The connection electrode 111C can be provided along the periphery of the display area. For example, it may be provided along one side of the periphery of the display area, or it may be provided across two or more sides of the periphery of the display area. In other words, if the top surface shape of the display area is rectangular, the top surface shape of the connection electrode 111C can be strip-shaped (rectangular), L-shaped, U-shaped (square bracket shaped), square, or the like.

 図19B、図19Cはそれぞれ、図19A中の一点鎖線A1−A2、一点鎖線A3−A4に対応する断面概略図である。図19Bには、発光素子110R、発光素子110G、及び発光素子110Bの断面概略図を示し、図19Cには、接続電極111Cと共通電極113とが接続される接続部140の断面概略図を示している。 FIGS. 19B and 19C are schematic cross-sectional views corresponding to dashed dotted lines A1-A2 and A3-A4 in FIG. 19A, respectively. FIG. 19B shows a schematic cross-sectional view of light-emitting element 110R, light-emitting element 110G, and light-emitting element 110B, and FIG. 19C shows a schematic cross-sectional view of connection portion 140 where connection electrode 111C and common electrode 113 are connected.

 発光素子110Rは、画素電極111R、有機層112R、共通層114、及び共通電極113を有する。発光素子110Gは、画素電極111G、有機層112G、共通層114、及び共通電極113を有する。発光素子110Bは、画素電極111B、有機層112B、共通層114、及び共通電極113を有する。共通層114と共通電極113は、発光素子110R、発光素子110G、及び発光素子110Bに共通に設けられる。 Light-emitting element 110R has pixel electrode 111R, organic layer 112R, common layer 114, and common electrode 113. Light-emitting element 110G has pixel electrode 111G, organic layer 112G, common layer 114, and common electrode 113. Light-emitting element 110B has pixel electrode 111B, organic layer 112B, common layer 114, and common electrode 113. Common layer 114 and common electrode 113 are provided in common to light-emitting element 110R, light-emitting element 110G, and light-emitting element 110B.

 発光素子110Rが有する有機層112Rは、少なくとも赤色の光を発する発光性の有機化合物を有する。発光素子110Gが有する有機層112Gは、少なくとも緑色の光を発する発光性の有機化合物を有する。発光素子110Bが有する有機層112Bは、少なくとも青色の光を発する発光性の有機化合物を有する。有機層112R、有機層112G、及び有機層112Bは、それぞれEL層とも呼ぶことができ、少なくとも発光性の有機化合物を含む層(発光層)を有する。 Organic layer 112R of light-emitting element 110R contains a light-emitting organic compound that emits at least red light. Organic layer 112G of light-emitting element 110G contains a light-emitting organic compound that emits at least green light. Organic layer 112B of light-emitting element 110B contains a light-emitting organic compound that emits at least blue light. Organic layer 112R, organic layer 112G, and organic layer 112B can each be referred to as an EL layer, and each contains at least a layer (light-emitting layer) that contains a light-emitting organic compound.

 以下では、発光素子110R、発光素子110G、及び発光素子110Bに共通する事項を説明する場合には、発光素子110と呼称して説明する場合がある。同様に、有機層112R、有機層112G、及び有機層112Bなど、アルファベットで区別する構成要素についても、これらに共通する事項を説明する場合には、アルファベットを省略した符号を用いて説明する場合がある。 Hereinafter, when describing matters common to light-emitting element 110R, light-emitting element 110G, and light-emitting element 110B, they may be referred to as light-emitting element 110. Similarly, when describing matters common to components distinguished by letters, such as organic layer 112R, organic layer 112G, and organic layer 112B, they may be described using symbols without the letters.

 有機層112、及び共通層114は、それぞれ独立に電子注入層、電子輸送層、正孔注入層、及び正孔輸送層のうち、一以上を有することができる。例えば、有機層112が、画素電極111側から正孔注入層、正孔輸送層、発光層、電子輸送層の積層構造を有し、共通層114が電子注入層を有する構成とすることができる。 The organic layer 112 and the common layer 114 can each independently have one or more of an electron injection layer, an electron transport layer, a hole injection layer, and a hole transport layer. For example, the organic layer 112 can have a layered structure of, from the pixel electrode 111 side, a hole injection layer, a hole transport layer, a light-emitting layer, and an electron transport layer, and the common layer 114 can have an electron injection layer.

 画素電極111R、画素電極111G、及び画素電極111Bは、それぞれ発光素子毎に設けられている。また、共通電極113及び共通層114は、各発光素子に共通な一続きの層として設けられている。各画素電極と共通電極113のいずれか一方に可視光に対して透光性を有する導電膜を用い、他方に反射性を有する導電膜を用いる。各画素電極を透光性、共通電極113を反射性とすることで、下面射出型(ボトムエミッション型)の表示装置とすることができ、反対に各画素電極を反射性、共通電極113を透光性とすることで、上面射出型(トップエミッション型)の表示装置とすることができる。なお、各画素電極と共通電極113の双方を透光性とすることで、両面射出型(デュアルエミッション型)の表示装置とすることもできる。 Pixel electrode 111R, pixel electrode 111G, and pixel electrode 111B are each provided for each light-emitting element. Common electrode 113 and common layer 114 are provided as a continuous layer common to each light-emitting element. A conductive film that is translucent to visible light is used for either each pixel electrode or common electrode 113, and a conductive film that is reflective is used for the other. Making each pixel electrode translucent and the common electrode 113 reflective can result in a bottom-emission display device. Conversely, making each pixel electrode reflective and the common electrode 113 translucent can result in a top-emission display device. Making both each pixel electrode and common electrode 113 translucent can also result in a dual-emission display device.

 共通電極113上には、発光素子110R、発光素子110G、及び発光素子110Bを覆って、保護層121が設けられている。保護層121は、上方から各発光素子に水などの不純物が拡散することを防ぐ機能を有する。 A protective layer 121 is provided on the common electrode 113, covering the light-emitting elements 110R, 110G, and 110B. The protective layer 121 prevents impurities such as water from diffusing from above into each light-emitting element.

 画素電極111の端部はテーパ形状を有することが好ましい。画素電極111の端部がテーパ形状を有する場合、画素電極111の端部に沿って設けられる有機層112も、テーパ形状とすることができる。画素電極111の端部をテーパ形状とすることで、画素電極111の端部を乗り越えて設けられる有機層112の被覆性を高めることができる。また、画素電極111の側面をテーパ形状とすることで、作製工程中の異物(例えば、ゴミ、またはパーティクルなどともいう)を、洗浄などの処理により除去することが容易となり好ましい。 It is preferable that the edge of the pixel electrode 111 has a tapered shape. If the edge of the pixel electrode 111 has a tapered shape, the organic layer 112 provided along the edge of the pixel electrode 111 can also be tapered. By tapering the edge of the pixel electrode 111, the coverage of the organic layer 112 provided over the edge of the pixel electrode 111 can be improved. In addition, tapering the side surface of the pixel electrode 111 makes it easier to remove foreign matter (for example, dust or particles) during the manufacturing process by processes such as cleaning, which is preferable.

 例えば、傾斜した側面と基板面とがなす角(テーパ角ともいう)が90°未満である領域を有すると好ましい。 For example, it is preferable to have an area where the angle between the inclined side surface and the substrate surface (also called the taper angle) is less than 90°.

 有機層112は、フォトリソグラフィ法により島状に加工されている。そのため、有機層112は、その端部において、上面と側面との成す角が90度に近い形状となる。一方、FMM(Fine Metal Mask)などを用いて形成された有機膜は、その厚さが端部に近いほど徐々に薄くなる傾向があり、例えば端部まで1μm以上10μm以下の範囲にわたって、上面がスロープ状に形成されるため、上面と側面の区別が困難な形状となる。 The organic layer 112 is processed into an island shape using photolithography. As a result, the angle between the top surface and the side surface of the organic layer 112 at its edges is close to 90 degrees. On the other hand, organic films formed using FMM (Fine Metal Mask) or the like tend to become gradually thinner the closer they are to the edges. For example, the top surface is formed in a sloped shape over a range of 1 μm to 10 μm all the way to the edges, making it difficult to distinguish between the top surface and the side surface.

 隣接する2つの発光素子間には、絶縁層125、樹脂層126及び層128を有する。 Between two adjacent light-emitting elements are an insulating layer 125, a resin layer 126, and a layer 128.

 隣接する2つの発光素子間において、互いの有機層112の側面が樹脂層126を挟んで対向して設けられている。樹脂層126は、隣接する2つの発光素子の間に位置し、それぞれの有機層112の端部、及び2つの有機層112の間の領域を埋めるように設けられている。樹脂層126は、滑らかな凸状の上面形状を有しており、樹脂層126の上面を覆って、共通層114及び共通電極113が設けられている。 Between two adjacent light-emitting elements, the side surfaces of the organic layers 112 face each other with a resin layer 126 sandwiched between them. The resin layer 126 is located between the two adjacent light-emitting elements and is provided so as to fill the ends of each organic layer 112 and the area between the two organic layers 112. The resin layer 126 has a smooth, convex upper surface, and a common layer 114 and a common electrode 113 are provided covering the upper surface of the resin layer 126.

 樹脂層126は、隣接する2つの発光素子間に位置する段差を埋める平坦化膜として機能する。樹脂層126を設けることにより、共通電極113が有機層112の端部の段差により分断されてしまう現象(段切れともいう)が生じ、有機層112上の共通電極が絶縁してしまうことを防ぐことができる。樹脂層126は、LFP(Local Filling Planarization)層ともいうことができる。 The resin layer 126 functions as a planarization film that fills in the step between two adjacent light-emitting elements. By providing the resin layer 126, it is possible to prevent the common electrode 113 from being separated by the step at the edge of the organic layer 112 (also known as step disconnection), which would otherwise result in insulation of the common electrode on the organic layer 112. The resin layer 126 can also be referred to as an LFP (Local Filling Planarization) layer.

 樹脂層126としては、有機材料を有する絶縁層を好適に用いることができる。例えば、樹脂層126として、アクリル樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、イミド樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、ポリイミドアミド樹脂、シリコーン樹脂、シロキサン樹脂、ベンゾシクロブテン系樹脂、フェノール樹脂、及びこれら樹脂の前駆体等を適用することができる。また、樹脂層126として、ポリビニルアルコール(PVA)、ポリビニルブチラール、ポリビニルピロリドン、ポリエチレングリコール、ポリグリセリン、プルラン、水溶性のセルロース、またはアルコール可溶性のポリアミド樹脂などの有機材料を用いてもよい。 An insulating layer containing an organic material can be suitably used as the resin layer 126. For example, acrylic resin, polyimide resin, epoxy resin, imide resin, polyamide resin, polyimideamide resin, silicone resin, siloxane resin, benzocyclobutene resin, phenolic resin, and precursors of these resins can be used as the resin layer 126. Alternatively, organic materials such as polyvinyl alcohol (PVA), polyvinyl butyral, polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyethylene glycol, polyglycerin, pullulan, water-soluble cellulose, or alcohol-soluble polyamide resin can also be used as the resin layer 126.

 また、樹脂層126として、感光性の樹脂を用いることができる。感光性の樹脂としてはフォトレジストを用いてもよい。感光性の樹脂は、ポジ型の材料、またはネガ型の材料を用いることができる。 In addition, a photosensitive resin can be used as the resin layer 126. Photoresist can also be used as the photosensitive resin. The photosensitive resin can be a positive-type material or a negative-type material.

 樹脂層126は、可視光を吸収する材料を含んでいてもよい。例えば、樹脂層126自体が可視光を吸収する材料により構成されていてもよいし、樹脂層126が、可視光を吸収する顔料を含んでいてもよい。樹脂層126としては、例えば、赤色、青色、または緑色の光を透過し、他の光を吸収するカラーフィルタとして用いることのできる樹脂、またはカーボンブラックを顔料として含み、ブラックマトリクスとして機能する樹脂などを用いることができる。 The resin layer 126 may contain a material that absorbs visible light. For example, the resin layer 126 itself may be made of a material that absorbs visible light, or the resin layer 126 may contain a pigment that absorbs visible light. The resin layer 126 may be, for example, a resin that can be used as a color filter that transmits red, blue, or green light and absorbs other light, or a resin that contains carbon black as a pigment and functions as a black matrix.

 絶縁層125は、有機層112の側面に接して設けられている。また絶縁層125は、有機層112の上端部を覆って設けられている。また絶縁層125の一部は、基板101の上面に接して設けられている。 The insulating layer 125 is provided in contact with the side surface of the organic layer 112. The insulating layer 125 is also provided to cover the upper end portion of the organic layer 112. A portion of the insulating layer 125 is also provided in contact with the upper surface of the substrate 101.

 絶縁層125は、樹脂層126と有機層112との間に位置し、樹脂層126が有機層112に接することを防ぐための保護膜として機能する。有機層112と樹脂層126とが接すると、樹脂層126の形成時に用いられる有機溶媒などにより有機層112が溶解する可能性がある。そのため、有機層112と樹脂層126との間に絶縁層125を設ける構成とすることで、有機層112の側面を保護することが可能となる。 The insulating layer 125 is located between the resin layer 126 and the organic layer 112, and functions as a protective film to prevent the resin layer 126 from coming into contact with the organic layer 112. If the organic layer 112 and the resin layer 126 come into contact, the organic layer 112 may be dissolved by the organic solvent used in forming the resin layer 126. Therefore, by providing the insulating layer 125 between the organic layer 112 and the resin layer 126, it is possible to protect the side surfaces of the organic layer 112.

 絶縁層125としては、無機材料を有する絶縁層とすることができる。絶縁層125には、例えば、酸化絶縁膜、窒化絶縁膜、酸化窒化絶縁膜、及び窒化酸化絶縁膜などの無機絶縁膜を用いることができる。絶縁層125は単層構造であってもよく積層構造であってもよい。酸化絶縁膜としては、酸化シリコン膜、酸化アルミニウム膜、酸化マグネシウム膜、インジウムガリウム亜鉛酸化物膜、酸化ガリウム膜、酸化ゲルマニウム膜、酸化イットリウム膜、酸化ジルコニウム膜、酸化ランタン膜、酸化ネオジム膜、酸化ハフニウム膜、及び酸化タンタル膜などが挙げられる。窒化絶縁膜としては、窒化シリコン膜及び窒化アルミニウム膜などが挙げられる。酸化窒化絶縁膜としては、酸化窒化シリコン膜、酸化窒化アルミニウム膜などが挙げられる。窒化酸化絶縁膜としては、窒化酸化シリコン膜、窒化酸化アルミニウム膜などが挙げられる。特にALD法により形成した酸化アルミニウム膜、酸化ハフニウム膜などの酸化金属膜、または酸化シリコン膜などの無機絶縁膜を絶縁層125に適用することで、ピンホールが少なく、EL層を保護する機能に優れた絶縁層125を形成することができる。 The insulating layer 125 can be an insulating layer containing an inorganic material. For example, inorganic insulating films such as an insulating oxide film, a nitride insulating film, an oxynitride insulating film, and a nitride oxide insulating film can be used for the insulating layer 125. The insulating layer 125 can have a single-layer structure or a stacked structure. Examples of oxide insulating films include silicon oxide films, aluminum oxide films, magnesium oxide films, indium gallium zinc oxide films, gallium oxide films, germanium oxide films, yttrium oxide films, zirconium oxide films, lanthanum oxide films, neodymium oxide films, hafnium oxide films, and tantalum oxide films. Examples of nitride insulating films include silicon nitride films and aluminum nitride films. Examples of oxynitride insulating films include silicon oxynitride films and aluminum oxynitride films. Examples of nitride oxide insulating films include silicon nitride oxide films and aluminum nitride oxide films. In particular, by using inorganic insulating films such as metal oxide films, such as aluminum oxide films and hafnium oxide films, or silicon oxide films formed by the ALD method as the insulating layer 125, an insulating layer 125 with few pinholes and excellent protection of the EL layer can be formed.

 絶縁層125の形成は、スパッタリング法、CVD法、PLD法、ALD法などを用いることができる。絶縁層125は、被覆性が良好なALD法を用いて形成することが好ましい。 The insulating layer 125 can be formed by sputtering, CVD, PLD, ALD, or other methods. It is preferable to form the insulating layer 125 using the ALD method, which has good coverage.

 また、絶縁層125と、樹脂層126との間に、反射膜(例えば、銀、パラジウム、銅、チタン、及びアルミニウムなどの中から選ばれる一または複数を含む金属膜)を設け、発光層から射出される光を上記反射膜により反射させる構成としてもよい。これにより、光取り出し効率を向上させることができる。 Furthermore, a reflective film (for example, a metal film containing one or more selected from the group consisting of silver, palladium, copper, titanium, and aluminum) may be provided between the insulating layer 125 and the resin layer 126, and the light emitted from the light-emitting layer may be reflected by the reflective film. This can improve the light extraction efficiency.

 層128は、有機層112のエッチング時に、有機層112を保護するための保護層(マスク層、犠牲層ともいう)の一部が残存したものである。層128には、上記絶縁層125に用いることのできる材料を用いることができる。特に、層128と絶縁層125とに同じ材料を用いると、加工のための装置等を共通に用いることができるため、好ましい。 Layer 128 is a portion of a protective layer (also called a mask layer or sacrificial layer) that protects organic layer 112 when it is etched. Layer 128 can be made of the same material as that used for insulating layer 125. It is particularly preferable to use the same material for layer 128 and insulating layer 125, as this allows the use of common processing equipment, etc.

 特にALD法により形成した酸化アルミニウム膜、酸化ハフニウム膜などの酸化金属膜、または酸化シリコン膜などの無機絶縁膜はピンホールが少ないため、EL層を保護する機能に優れ、絶縁層125及び層128に好適に用いることができる。 In particular, inorganic insulating films such as aluminum oxide films, metal oxide films such as hafnium oxide films, or silicon oxide films formed by the ALD method have few pinholes, making them excellent at protecting the EL layer and suitable for use in insulating layer 125 and layer 128.

 保護層121としては、例えば、少なくとも無機絶縁膜を含む単層構造または積層構造とすることができる。無機絶縁膜としては、例えば、酸化シリコン膜、酸化窒化シリコン膜、窒化酸化シリコン膜、窒化シリコン膜、酸化アルミニウム膜、酸化窒化アルミニウム膜、酸化ハフニウム膜などの酸化物膜または窒化物膜が挙げられる。または、保護層121としてインジウムガリウム酸化物、インジウム亜鉛酸化物、インジウムスズ酸化物、インジウムガリウム亜鉛酸化物などの半導体材料または導電性材料を用いてもよい。 The protective layer 121 can have, for example, a single-layer structure or a multilayer structure including at least an inorganic insulating film. Examples of inorganic insulating films include oxide or nitride films such as silicon oxide film, silicon oxynitride film, silicon nitride oxide film, silicon nitride film, aluminum oxide film, aluminum oxynitride film, and hafnium oxide film. Alternatively, the protective layer 121 may be made of a semiconductor or conductive material such as indium gallium oxide, indium zinc oxide, indium tin oxide, or indium gallium zinc oxide.

 保護層121としては、無機絶縁膜と、有機絶縁膜の積層膜を用いることもできる。例えば、一対の無機絶縁膜の間に、有機絶縁膜を挟んだ構成とすることが好ましい。さらに有機絶縁膜が平坦化膜として機能することが好ましい。これにより、有機絶縁膜の上面を平坦なものとすることができるため、その上の無機絶縁膜の被覆性が向上し、バリア性を高めることができる。また、保護層121の上面が平坦となるため、保護層121の上方に構造物(例えばカラーフィルタ、タッチセンサの電極、またはレンズアレイなど)を設ける場合に、下方の構造に起因する凹凸形状の影響を軽減できるため好ましい。 The protective layer 121 can also be a laminated film of an inorganic insulating film and an organic insulating film. For example, it is preferable to have a configuration in which an organic insulating film is sandwiched between a pair of inorganic insulating films. Furthermore, it is preferable that the organic insulating film functions as a planarizing film. This makes it possible to make the upper surface of the organic insulating film flat, improving the coverage of the inorganic insulating film on top of it and increasing the barrier properties. Furthermore, since the upper surface of the protective layer 121 is flat, when a structure (e.g., a color filter, a touch sensor electrode, or a lens array) is provided above the protective layer 121, this is preferable because it reduces the impact of uneven shapes caused by the structure below.

 図19Cには、接続電極111Cと共通電極113とが電気的に接続する接続部140を示している。接続部140では、接続電極111C上において、絶縁層125及び樹脂層126に開口部が設けられる。当該開口部において、接続電極111Cと共通電極113とが電気的に接続されている。 Figure 19C shows a connection portion 140 where the connection electrode 111C and the common electrode 113 are electrically connected. In the connection portion 140, an opening is provided in the insulating layer 125 and the resin layer 126 above the connection electrode 111C. The connection electrode 111C and the common electrode 113 are electrically connected through this opening.

 なお、図19Cには、接続電極111Cと共通電極113とが電気的に接続する接続部140を示しているが、接続電極111C上に共通層114を介して共通電極113が設けられていてもよい。特に共通層114にキャリア注入層を用いた場合などでは、当該共通層114に用いる材料の電気抵抗率が十分に低く、且つ厚さも薄く形成できるため、共通層114が接続部140に位置していても問題は生じない場合が多い。これにより、共通電極113と共通層114とを同じ遮蔽マスクを用いて形成することができるため、製造コストを低減できる。 Note that while Figure 19C shows connection portion 140 electrically connecting connection electrode 111C and common electrode 113, common electrode 113 may also be provided on connection electrode 111C via common layer 114. In particular, when a carrier injection layer is used for common layer 114, the electrical resistivity of the material used for common layer 114 is sufficiently low and it can be formed thin, so there are often no problems even if common layer 114 is located at connection portion 140. This allows common electrode 113 and common layer 114 to be formed using the same shielding mask, thereby reducing manufacturing costs.

[構成例2]
 以下では、上記構成例1とは一部の構成が異なる表示装置について説明する。なお、上記構成例1と共通する部分はこれを参照し、説明を省略する場合がある。
[Configuration Example 2]
The following describes a display device that has a configuration that is partially different from that of the above-described Configuration Example 1. Note that parts that are common to the above-described Configuration Example 1 will be referred to, and descriptions thereof may be omitted.

 図20Aに、表示装置100aの断面概略図を示す。表示装置100aは、発光素子の構成が異なる点、及び着色層を有する点で、上記表示装置100と主に相違している。 Figure 20A shows a schematic cross-sectional view of display device 100a. Display device 100a differs from display device 100 above mainly in that it has a different configuration of light-emitting elements and in that it has a colored layer.

 表示装置100aは、白色光を呈する発光素子110Wを有する。発光素子110Wは、画素電極111、有機層112W、共通層114、及び共通電極113を有する。有機層112Wは、白色発光を呈する。例えば、有機層112Wは、発光色が補色の関係となる2種類以上の発光材料を含む構成とすることができる。例えば、有機層112Wは、赤色の光を発する発光性の有機化合物と、緑色の光を発する発光性の有機化合物と、青色の光を発する発光性の有機化合物と、を有する構成とすることができる。また、青色の光を発する発光性の有機化合物と、黄色の光を発する発光性の有機化合物と、を有する構成としてもよい。 The display device 100a has a light-emitting element 110W that emits white light. The light-emitting element 110W has a pixel electrode 111, an organic layer 112W, a common layer 114, and a common electrode 113. The organic layer 112W emits white light. For example, the organic layer 112W can be configured to include two or more light-emitting materials whose emitted light colors are complementary to each other. For example, the organic layer 112W can be configured to include a light-emitting organic compound that emits red light, a light-emitting organic compound that emits green light, and a light-emitting organic compound that emits blue light. It may also be configured to include a light-emitting organic compound that emits blue light and a light-emitting organic compound that emits yellow light.

 隣接する2つの発光素子110W間において、それぞれの有機層112Wは分断されている。これにより、有機層112Wを介して隣接する発光素子110W間に流れるリーク電流を抑制することができ、当該リーク電流に起因したクロストークを抑制できる。そのため、コントラスト、及び色再現性の高い表示装置を実現できる。 The organic layers 112W are separated between two adjacent light-emitting elements 110W. This makes it possible to suppress leakage current flowing between adjacent light-emitting elements 110W via the organic layers 112W, thereby suppressing crosstalk caused by this leakage current. This makes it possible to realize a display device with high contrast and color reproducibility.

 保護層121上には、平坦化膜として機能する絶縁層122が設けられ、絶縁層122上には着色層116R、着色層116G、及び着色層116Bが設けられている。 An insulating layer 122 that functions as a planarizing film is provided on the protective layer 121, and colored layers 116R, 116G, and 116B are provided on the insulating layer 122.

 絶縁層122としては、有機樹脂膜、または上面が平坦化された無機絶縁膜を用いることができる。絶縁層122は、着色層116R、着色層116G、及び着色層116Bの被形成面を成すため、絶縁層122の上面が平坦であることで、着色層116R等の厚さを均一にできるため、色純度を高めることができる。なお、着色層116R等の厚さが不均一であると、光の吸収量が着色層116Rの場所によって変わるため、色純度が低下してしまう恐れがある。 The insulating layer 122 can be an organic resin film or an inorganic insulating film with a flattened top surface. The insulating layer 122 forms the surface on which the colored layers 116R, 116G, and 116B are formed. Therefore, a flat top surface of the insulating layer 122 allows the thickness of the colored layers 116R and others to be uniform, thereby improving color purity. However, if the thickness of the colored layers 116R and others is uneven, the amount of light absorption will vary depending on the location of the colored layer 116R, which could result in a decrease in color purity.

[構成例3]
 図20Bに、表示装置100bの断面概略図を示す。
[Configuration Example 3]
FIG. 20B shows a schematic cross-sectional view of the display device 100b.

 発光素子110Rは、画素電極111、導電層115R、有機層112W、及び共通電極113を有する。発光素子110Gは、画素電極111、導電層115G、有機層112W、及び共通電極113を有する。発光素子110Bは、画素電極111、導電層115B、有機層112W、及び共通電極113を有する。導電層115R、導電層115G、及び導電層115Bはそれぞれ透光性を有し、光学調整層として機能する。 Light-emitting element 110R has a pixel electrode 111, a conductive layer 115R, an organic layer 112W, and a common electrode 113. Light-emitting element 110G has a pixel electrode 111, a conductive layer 115G, an organic layer 112W, and a common electrode 113. Light-emitting element 110B has a pixel electrode 111, a conductive layer 115B, an organic layer 112W, and a common electrode 113. Conductive layer 115R, conductive layer 115G, and conductive layer 115B are each translucent and function as optical adjustment layers.

 画素電極111に、可視光を反射する膜を用い、共通電極113に、可視光に対して反射性と透過性の両方を有する膜を用いることにより、微小共振器(マイクロキャビティ)構造を実現することができる。このとき、導電層115R、導電層115G、及び導電層115Bの厚さをそれぞれ、最適な光路長となるように調整することで、白色発光を呈する有機層112を用いた場合であっても、発光素子110R、発光素子110G、及び発光素子110Bからは、それぞれ異なる波長の光が強められた光を得ることができる。 By using a film that reflects visible light for the pixel electrode 111 and a film that is both reflective and transparent to visible light for the common electrode 113, a microresonator (microcavity) structure can be realized. In this case, by adjusting the thicknesses of conductive layer 115R, conductive layer 115G, and conductive layer 115B to achieve the optimal optical path length, even when an organic layer 112 that emits white light is used, it is possible to obtain light of different wavelengths that are intensified from light-emitting element 110R, light-emitting element 110G, and light-emitting element 110B.

 さらに、発光素子110R、発光素子110G、及び発光素子110Bの光路上には、それぞれ着色層116R、着色層116G、着色層116Bが設けられることで、色純度の高い光を得ることができる。 Furthermore, colored layers 116R, 116G, and 116B are provided on the optical paths of light-emitting elements 110R, 110G, and 110B, respectively, thereby enabling light with high color purity to be obtained.

 また、画素電極111及び導電層115の端部を覆う絶縁層123が設けられている。絶縁層123は、端部がテーパ形状を有していることが好ましい。絶縁層123を設けることで、その上に形成される有機層112W、共通電極113、及び保護層121などによる被覆性を高めることができる。 In addition, an insulating layer 123 is provided to cover the edges of the pixel electrode 111 and the conductive layer 115. The edges of the insulating layer 123 preferably have a tapered shape. By providing the insulating layer 123, it is possible to improve the coverage of the organic layer 112W, common electrode 113, protective layer 121, and the like that are formed on top of it.

 有機層112W及び共通電極113は、それぞれ一続きの膜として、各発光素子に共通して設けられている。このような構成とすることで、表示装置の作製工程を大幅に簡略化できるため好ましい。 The organic layer 112W and the common electrode 113 are each provided as a continuous film common to each light-emitting element. This configuration is preferable because it significantly simplifies the manufacturing process of the display device.

 ここで、画素電極111は、その端部が垂直に近い形状であることが好ましい。これにより、絶縁層123の表面に傾斜が急峻な部分を形成することができ、この部分を被覆する有機層112Wの一部に厚さの薄い部分を形成すること、または有機層112Wの一部を分断することができる。そのため、フォトリソグラフィ法などによる有機層112Wの加工を行うことなく、隣接する発光素子間に生じる有機層112Wを介したリーク電流を抑制することができる。 Here, it is preferable that the edges of the pixel electrode 111 are nearly vertical. This allows for the formation of steeply inclined portions on the surface of the insulating layer 123, and makes it possible to form thin portions in the organic layer 112W that covers these portions, or to separate portions of the organic layer 112W. This makes it possible to suppress leakage current that occurs between adjacent light-emitting elements through the organic layer 112W, without processing the organic layer 112W using photolithography or the like.

 以上が、表示装置の構成例についての説明である。 The above is an explanation of an example configuration of a display device.

 本実施の形態は、少なくともその一部を本明細書中に記載する他の実施の形態と適宜組み合わせて実施することができる。 This embodiment can be implemented by appropriately combining at least a portion of it with other embodiments described in this specification.

(実施の形態6)
 本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の電子機器について、図21乃至図23を用いて説明する。
(Embodiment 6)
In this embodiment, electronic devices of one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

 本実施の形態の電子機器は、表示部に本発明の一態様のトランジスタが適用された表示パネル(表示装置)を有する。本発明の一態様の表示装置は、高精細化及び高解像度化が容易であり、また、高い表示品位を実現できる。したがって、様々な電子機器の表示部に用いることができる。 The electronic device of this embodiment has a display panel (display device) in which the transistor of one embodiment of the present invention is used in a display portion. The display device of one embodiment of the present invention can easily achieve high definition and high resolution and can also achieve high display quality. Therefore, the display device can be used in the display portion of a variety of electronic devices.

 電子機器としては、例えば、テレビジョン装置、デスクトップ型もしくはノート型のパーソナルコンピュータ、コンピュータ用などのモニタ、デジタルサイネージ、パチンコ機などの大型ゲーム機などの比較的大きな画面を備える電子機器の他、デジタルカメラ、デジタルビデオカメラ、デジタルフォトフレーム、携帯電話機、携帯型ゲーム機、携帯情報端末、音響再生装置、などが挙げられる。 Electronic devices include, for example, electronic devices with relatively large screens such as television sets, desktop or notebook personal computers, computer monitors, digital signage, and large game machines such as pachinko machines, as well as digital cameras, digital video cameras, digital photo frames, mobile phones, portable game machines, personal digital assistants, and audio playback devices.

 特に、本発明の一態様の表示パネルは、精細度を高めることが可能なため、比較的小さな表示部を有する電子機器に好適に用いることができる。このような電子機器としては、例えば、腕時計型及びブレスレット型の情報端末機(ウェアラブル機器)、並びに、ヘッドマウントディスプレイなどのVR向け機器、メガネ型のAR向け機器、及び、MR向け機器など、頭部に装着可能なウェアラブル機器等が挙げられる。 In particular, the display panel of one embodiment of the present invention can achieve high resolution and is therefore suitable for use in electronic devices with relatively small display areas. Examples of such electronic devices include wristwatch-type and bracelet-type information terminals (wearable devices), as well as wearable devices that can be worn on the head, such as VR devices such as head-mounted displays, AR glasses-type devices, and MR devices.

 本発明の一態様の表示パネルは、HD(画素数1280×720)、FHD(画素数1920×1080)、WQHD(画素数2560×1440)、WQXGA(画素数2560×1600)、4K(画素数3840×2160)、8K(画素数7680×4320)といった極めて高い解像度を有していることが好ましい。特に4K、8K、またはそれ以上の解像度とすることが好ましい。また、本発明の一態様の表示パネルにおける画素密度(精細度)は、100ppi以上が好ましく、300ppi以上が好ましく、500ppi以上がより好ましく、1000ppi以上がより好ましく、2000ppi以上がより好ましく、3000ppi以上がより好ましく、5000ppi以上がより好ましく、7000ppi以上がさらに好ましい。このように高い解像度及び高い精細度の一方または双方を有する表示パネルを用いることで、臨場感及び奥行き感などをより高めることが可能となる。また、本発明の一態様の表示パネルの画面比率(アスペクト比)については、特に限定はない。例えば、表示パネルは、1:1(正方形)、4:3、16:9、16:10など様々な画面比率に対応することができる。 The display panel of one embodiment of the present invention preferably has an extremely high resolution such as HD (1280 x 720 pixels), FHD (1920 x 1080 pixels), WQHD (2560 x 1440 pixels), WQXGA (2560 x 1600 pixels), 4K (3840 x 2160 pixels), or 8K (7680 x 4320 pixels). A resolution of 4K, 8K, or higher is particularly preferable. Furthermore, the pixel density (resolution) of the display panel of one embodiment of the present invention is preferably 100 ppi or more, preferably 300 ppi or more, more preferably 500 ppi or more, more preferably 1000 ppi or more, more preferably 2000 ppi or more, more preferably 3000 ppi or more, more preferably 5000 ppi or more, and even more preferably 7000 ppi or more. By using a display panel having either or both of high resolution and high definition, it is possible to further enhance the sense of realism and depth. Furthermore, there is no particular limitation on the screen ratio (aspect ratio) of the display panel of one embodiment of the present invention. For example, the display panel can support various screen ratios such as 1:1 (square), 4:3, 16:9, and 16:10.

 本実施の形態の電子機器は、センサ(力、変位、位置、速度、加速度、角速度、回転数、距離、光、液、磁気、温度、化学物質、音声、時間、硬度、電場、電流、電圧、電力、放射線、流量、湿度、傾度、振動、においまたは赤外線を検知、検出、または測定する機能を含むもの)を有していてもよい。 The electronic device of this embodiment may have a sensor (including the function of sensing, detecting, or measuring force, displacement, position, velocity, acceleration, angular velocity, rotation speed, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemical substances, sound, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration, odor, or infrared light).

 本実施の形態の電子機器は、様々な機能を有することができる。例えば、様々な情報(静止画、動画、テキスト画像など)を表示部に表示する機能、タッチパネル機能、カレンダー、日付または時刻などを表示する機能、様々なソフトウェア(プログラム)を実行する機能、無線通信機能、記録媒体に記録されているプログラムまたはデータを読み出す機能等を有することができる。 The electronic device of this embodiment can have a variety of functions. For example, it can have a function to display various information (still images, videos, text images, etc.) on the display unit, a touch panel function, a function to display a calendar, date or time, etc., a function to execute various software (programs), a wireless communication function, a function to read programs or data recorded on a recording medium, etc.

 図21A乃至図21Dを用いて、頭部に装着可能なウェアラブル機器の一例を説明する。これらウェアラブル機器は、ARのコンテンツを表示する機能、及びVRのコンテンツを表示する機能の一方または双方を有する。なお、これらウェアラブル機器は、AR、VRの他に、SRまたはMRのコンテンツを表示する機能を有していてもよい。電子機器が、AR、VR、SR、及びMRなどのうち少なくとも一つのコンテンツを表示する機能を有することで、使用者の没入感を高めることが可能となる。 An example of a wearable device that can be worn on the head will be described using Figures 21A to 21D. These wearable devices have one or both of the functions of displaying AR content and VR content. Note that these wearable devices may also have the function of displaying SR or MR content in addition to AR and VR. By having an electronic device have the function of displaying at least one of AR, VR, SR, and MR content, it is possible to enhance the user's sense of immersion.

 図21Aに示す電子機器700A、及び、図21Bに示す電子機器700Bは、それぞれ、一対の表示パネル751と、一対の筐体721と、通信部(図示しない)と、一対の装着部723と、制御部(図示しない)と、撮像部(図示しない)と、一対の光学部材753と、フレーム757と、一対の鼻パッド758と、を有する。 Electronic device 700A shown in FIG. 21A and electronic device 700B shown in FIG. 21B each have a pair of display panels 751, a pair of housings 721, a communication unit (not shown), a pair of mounting units 723, a control unit (not shown), an imaging unit (not shown), a pair of optical members 753, a frame 757, and a pair of nose pads 758.

 表示パネル751には、本発明の一態様の表示パネルを適用することができる。したがって極めて精細度の高い表示が可能な電子機器とすることができる。 A display panel according to one embodiment of the present invention can be applied to the display panel 751. Therefore, the electronic device can display images with extremely high resolution.

 電子機器700A、及び、電子機器700Bは、それぞれ、光学部材753の表示領域756に、表示パネル751で表示した画像を投影することができる。光学部材753は透光性を有するため、使用者は光学部材753を通して視認される透過像に重ねて、表示領域に表示された画像を見ることができる。したがって、電子機器700A、及び、電子機器700Bは、それぞれ、AR表示が可能な電子機器である。 Electronic device 700A and electronic device 700B can each project an image displayed on display panel 751 onto display area 756 of optical element 753. Because optical element 753 is translucent, the user can see the image displayed in the display area superimposed on a transmitted image visible through optical element 753. Therefore, electronic device 700A and electronic device 700B are each electronic devices capable of AR display.

 電子機器700A、及び、電子機器700Bには、撮像部として、前方を撮像することのできるカメラが設けられていてもよい。また、電子機器700A、及び、電子機器700Bは、それぞれ、ジャイロセンサなどの加速度センサを備えることで、使用者の頭部の向きを検知して、その向きに応じた画像を表示領域756に表示することもできる。 Electronic device 700A and electronic device 700B may be provided with a camera capable of capturing images in front of them as an imaging unit. Furthermore, electronic device 700A and electronic device 700B may each be provided with an acceleration sensor such as a gyro sensor, thereby detecting the orientation of the user's head and displaying an image corresponding to that orientation in display area 756.

 通信部は無線通信機を有し、当該無線通信機により映像信号等を供給することができる。なお、無線通信機に代えて、または無線通信機に加えて、映像信号及び電源電位が供給されるケーブルを接続可能なコネクタを備えていてもよい。 The communication unit has a wireless communication device, which can supply video signals, etc. Note that instead of or in addition to the wireless communication device, a connector may be provided to which a cable through which a video signal and power supply potential can be connected.

 また、電子機器700A、及び、電子機器700Bには、バッテリが設けられており、無線及び有線の一方または双方によって充電することができる。 In addition, electronic device 700A and electronic device 700B are equipped with batteries that can be charged wirelessly, wired, or both.

 筐体721には、タッチセンサモジュールが設けられていてもよい。タッチセンサモジュールは、筐体721の外側の面がタッチされることを検出する機能を有する。タッチセンサモジュールにより、使用者のタップ操作またはスライド操作などを検出し、様々な処理を実行することができる。例えば、タップ操作によって動画の一時停止または再開などの処理を実行することが可能となり、スライド操作により、早送りまたは早戻しの処理を実行することなどが可能となる。また、2つの筐体721のそれぞれにタッチセンサモジュールを設けることで、操作の幅を広げることができる。 The housing 721 may be provided with a touch sensor module. The touch sensor module has a function of detecting when the outer surface of the housing 721 is touched. The touch sensor module can detect tapping or sliding operations by the user and perform various processes. For example, a tapping operation can perform processes such as pausing or resuming a video, and a sliding operation can perform processes such as fast-forwarding or fast-rewinding. Furthermore, providing a touch sensor module on each of the two housings 721 can expand the range of operations available.

 タッチセンサモジュールとしては、様々なタッチセンサを適用することができる。例えば、静電容量方式、抵抗膜方式、赤外線方式、電磁誘導方式、表面弾性波方式、光学方式等、種々の方式を採用することができる。特に、静電容量方式または光学方式のセンサを、タッチセンサモジュールに適用することが好ましい。 A variety of touch sensors can be used as touch sensor modules. For example, various types can be used, such as capacitance, resistive film, infrared, electromagnetic induction, surface acoustic wave, and optical types. In particular, it is preferable to use capacitance or optical sensors in touch sensor modules.

 光学方式のタッチセンサを用いる場合には、受光デバイス(受光素子ともいう)として、光電変換デバイス(光電変換素子ともいう)を用いることができる。光電変換デバイスの活性層には、無機半導体及び有機半導体の一方または双方を用いることができる。 When using an optical touch sensor, a photoelectric conversion device (also called a photoelectric conversion element) can be used as the light-receiving device (also called a light-receiving element). The active layer of the photoelectric conversion device can be made of either or both an inorganic semiconductor and an organic semiconductor.

 図21Cに示す電子機器800A、及び、図21Dに示す電子機器800Bは、それぞれ、一対の表示部820と、筐体821と、通信部822と、一対の装着部823と、制御部824と、一対の撮像部825と、一対のレンズ832と、を有する。 Electronic device 800A shown in FIG. 21C and electronic device 800B shown in FIG. 21D each have a pair of display units 820, a housing 821, a communication unit 822, a pair of attachment units 823, a control unit 824, a pair of imaging units 825, and a pair of lenses 832.

 表示部820には、本発明の一態様の表示パネルを適用することができる。したがって極めて精細度の高い表示が可能な電子機器とすることができる。これにより、使用者に高い没入感を感じさせることができる。 A display panel according to one embodiment of the present invention can be applied to the display portion 820. Therefore, an electronic device capable of displaying images with extremely high resolution can be provided. This allows the user to feel a high sense of immersion.

 表示部820は、筐体821の内部の、レンズ832を通して視認できる位置に設けられる。また、一対の表示部820に異なる画像を表示させることで、視差を用いた3次元表示を行うこともできる。 The display unit 820 is provided inside the housing 821 in a position that can be seen through the lens 832. Also, by displaying different images on the pair of display units 820, it is possible to perform a three-dimensional display using parallax.

 電子機器800A、及び、電子機器800Bは、それぞれ、VR向けの電子機器ということができる。電子機器800Aまたは電子機器800Bを装着した使用者は、レンズ832を通して、表示部820に表示される画像を視認することができる。 Electronic device 800A and electronic device 800B can each be considered electronic devices for VR. A user wearing electronic device 800A or electronic device 800B can view the image displayed on display unit 820 through lens 832.

 電子機器800A、及び、電子機器800Bは、それぞれ、レンズ832及び表示部820が、使用者の目の位置に応じて最適な位置となるように、これらの左右の位置を調整可能な機構を有していることが好ましい。また、レンズ832と表示部820との距離を変えることで、ピントを調整する機構を有していることが好ましい。 Electronic device 800A and electronic device 800B each preferably have a mechanism that can adjust the left-right positions of lens 832 and display unit 820 so that they are optimally positioned according to the position of the user's eyes. They also preferably have a mechanism that can adjust the focus by changing the distance between lens 832 and display unit 820.

 装着部823により、使用者は電子機器800Aまたは電子機器800Bを頭部に装着することができる。なお、図21Cなどにおいては、メガネのつる(テンプルなどともいう)のような形状として例示しているがこれに限定されない。装着部823は、使用者が装着できればよく、例えば、ヘルメット型またはバンド型の形状としてもよい。 The attachment unit 823 allows the user to wear the electronic device 800A or electronic device 800B on the head. Note that in Figure 21C and other figures, the attachment unit 823 is shown shaped like the temples of glasses, but is not limited to this. The attachment unit 823 may be shaped like a helmet or band, for example, as long as it can be worn by the user.

 撮像部825は、外部の情報を取得する機能を有する。撮像部825が取得したデータは、表示部820に出力することができる。撮像部825には、イメージセンサを用いることができる。また、望遠、広角などの複数の画角に対応可能なように複数のカメラを設けてもよい。 The imaging unit 825 has the function of acquiring external information. Data acquired by the imaging unit 825 can be output to the display unit 820. An image sensor can be used for the imaging unit 825. Multiple cameras may also be provided to accommodate multiple angles of view, such as telephoto and wide-angle.

 なお、ここでは撮像部825を有する例を示したが、対象物の距離を測定することのできる測距センサ(以下、検知部ともよぶ)を設ければよい。すなわち、撮像部825は、検知部の一態様である。検知部としては、例えばイメージセンサ、または、ライダー(LIDAR:Light Detection and Ranging)などの距離画像センサを用いることができる。カメラによって得られた画像と、距離画像センサによって得られた画像とを用いることにより、より多くの情報を取得し、より高精度なジェスチャー操作を可能とすることができる。 Note that while an example having an imaging unit 825 has been shown here, it is also possible to provide a distance measuring sensor (hereinafter also referred to as a detection unit) that can measure the distance to an object. In other words, the imaging unit 825 is one aspect of the detection unit. The detection unit can be, for example, an image sensor or a range image sensor such as a LIDAR (Light Detection and Ranging). By using images obtained by the camera and the range image sensor, more information can be obtained, enabling more precise gesture operations.

 電子機器800Aは、骨伝導イヤホンとして機能する振動機構を有していてもよい。例えば、表示部820、筐体821、及び装着部823のいずれか一または複数に、当該振動機構を有する構成を適用することができる。これにより、別途、ヘッドホン、イヤホン、またはスピーカなどの音響機器を必要とせず、電子機器800Aを装着しただけで映像と音声を楽しむことができる。 Electronic device 800A may have a vibration mechanism that functions as a bone conduction earphone. For example, a configuration having such a vibration mechanism can be applied to one or more of display unit 820, housing 821, and wearing unit 823. This allows users to enjoy video and audio simply by wearing electronic device 800A, without the need for separate audio equipment such as headphones, earphones, or speakers.

 電子機器800A、及び、電子機器800Bは、それぞれ、入力端子を有していてもよい。入力端子には映像出力機器等からの映像信号、及び、電子機器内に設けられるバッテリを充電するための電力等を供給するケーブルを接続することができる。 Electronic device 800A and electronic device 800B may each have an input terminal. The input terminal can be connected to a cable that supplies video signals from a video output device or the like, and power for charging a battery provided within the electronic device.

 本発明の一態様の電子機器は、イヤホン750と無線通信を行う機能を有していてもよい。イヤホン750は、通信部(図示しない)を有し、無線通信機能を有する。イヤホン750は、無線通信機能により、電子機器から情報(例えば音声データ)を受信することができる。例えば、図21Aに示す電子機器700Aは、無線通信機能によって、イヤホン750に情報を送信する機能を有する。また、例えば、図21Cに示す電子機器800Aは、無線通信機能によって、イヤホン750に情報を送信する機能を有する。 The electronic device of one embodiment of the present invention may have a function of wireless communication with an earphone 750. The earphone 750 has a communication unit (not shown) and has a wireless communication function. The earphone 750 can receive information (e.g., audio data) from the electronic device through the wireless communication function. For example, the electronic device 700A shown in FIG. 21A has a function of transmitting information to the earphone 750 through the wireless communication function. Furthermore, for example, the electronic device 800A shown in FIG. 21C has a function of transmitting information to the earphone 750 through the wireless communication function.

 また、電子機器がイヤホン部を有していてもよい。図21Bに示す電子機器700Bは、イヤホン部727を有する。例えば、イヤホン部727と制御部とは、互いに有線接続されている構成とすることができる。イヤホン部727と制御部とをつなぐ配線の一部は、筐体721または装着部723の内部に配置されていてもよい。 Furthermore, the electronic device may have an earphone unit. Electronic device 700B shown in FIG. 21B has earphone unit 727. For example, earphone unit 727 and the control unit may be configured to be connected to each other by wire. Part of the wiring connecting earphone unit 727 and the control unit may be located inside the housing 721 or the attachment unit 723.

 同様に、図21Dに示す電子機器800Bは、イヤホン部827を有する。例えば、イヤホン部827と制御部824とは、互いに有線接続されている構成とすることができる。イヤホン部827と制御部824とをつなぐ配線の一部は、筐体821または装着部823の内部に配置されていてもよい。また、イヤホン部827と装着部823とがマグネットを有していてもよい。これにより、イヤホン部827を装着部823に磁力によって固定することができ、収納が容易となり好ましい。 Similarly, the electronic device 800B shown in FIG. 21D has an earphone unit 827. For example, the earphone unit 827 and the control unit 824 can be configured to be connected to each other by wire. Part of the wiring connecting the earphone unit 827 and the control unit 824 may be located inside the housing 821 or the attachment unit 823. The earphone unit 827 and the attachment unit 823 may also have magnets. This allows the earphone unit 827 to be fixed to the attachment unit 823 by magnetic force, making storage easier and preferable.

 なお、電子機器は、イヤホンまたはヘッドホンなどを接続することができる音声出力端子を有していてもよい。また、電子機器は、音声入力端子及び音声入力機構の一方または双方を有していてもよい。音声入力機構としては、例えば、マイクなどの集音装置を用いることができる。電子機器が音声入力機構を有することで、電子機器に、いわゆるヘッドセットとしての機能を付与してもよい。 The electronic device may have an audio output terminal to which earphones or headphones can be connected. The electronic device may also have either or both an audio input terminal and an audio input mechanism. For example, a sound collection device such as a microphone can be used as the audio input mechanism. Having an audio input mechanism in the electronic device may give it the functionality of a so-called headset.

 このように、本発明の一態様の電子機器としては、メガネ型(電子機器700A、及び、電子機器700Bなど)と、ゴーグル型(電子機器800A、及び、電子機器800Bなど)と、のどちらも好適である。 As such, electronic devices according to one embodiment of the present invention are suitable for both eyeglass-type devices (such as electronic devices 700A and 700B) and goggle-type devices (such as electronic devices 800A and 800B).

 図22Aに示す電子機器6500は、スマートフォンとして用いることのできる携帯情報端末機である。 The electronic device 6500 shown in Figure 22A is a portable information terminal that can be used as a smartphone.

 電子機器6500は、筐体6501、表示部6502、電源ボタン6503、ボタン6504、スピーカ6505、マイク6506、カメラ6507、光源6508及び制御装置6509などを有する。表示部6502はタッチパネル機能を備える。なお、制御装置6509としては、例えば、CPU、GPU、及び記憶装置の中から選ばれるいずれか一または複数を有する。本発明の一態様の半導体装置は、表示部6502、制御装置6509などに適用することができる。本発明の一態様の半導体装置を制御装置6509に用いることで、消費電力を低減させることができるため好適である。 The electronic device 6500 includes a housing 6501, a display portion 6502, a power button 6503, a button 6504, a speaker 6505, a microphone 6506, a camera 6507, a light source 6508, a control device 6509, and the like. The display portion 6502 has a touch panel function. Note that the control device 6509 includes, for example, one or more selected from a CPU, a GPU, and a storage device. A semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention can be applied to the display portion 6502, the control device 6509, and the like. Use of the semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention for the control device 6509 is preferable because power consumption can be reduced.

 表示部6502に、本発明の一態様の表示パネルを適用することができる。 A display panel according to one embodiment of the present invention can be applied to the display portion 6502.

 図22Bは、筐体6501のマイク6506側の端部を含む断面概略図である。 Figure 22B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the housing 6501, including the end portion on the microphone 6506 side.

 筐体6501の表示面側には透光性を有する保護部材6510が設けられ、筐体6501と保護部材6510に囲まれた空間内に、表示パネル6511、光学部材6512、タッチセンサパネル6513、プリント基板6517、バッテリ6518等が配置されている。 A translucent protective member 6510 is provided on the display surface side of the housing 6501, and a display panel 6511, optical members 6512, a touch sensor panel 6513, a printed circuit board 6517, a battery 6518, etc. are arranged in the space surrounded by the housing 6501 and the protective member 6510.

 保護部材6510には、表示パネル6511、光学部材6512、及びタッチセンサパネル6513が接着層(図示しない)により固定されている。 The display panel 6511, optical member 6512, and touch sensor panel 6513 are fixed to the protective member 6510 by an adhesive layer (not shown).

 表示部6502よりも外側の領域において、表示パネル6511の一部が折り返されており、当該折り返された部分にFPC6515が接続されている。FPC6515には、IC6516が実装されている。FPC6515は、プリント基板6517に設けられた端子に接続されている。 In the area outside the display unit 6502, a portion of the display panel 6511 is folded back, and an FPC 6515 is connected to this folded back portion. An IC 6516 is mounted on the FPC 6515. The FPC 6515 is connected to a terminal provided on a printed circuit board 6517.

 表示パネル6511には本発明の一態様の表示装置を適用することができる。そのため、極めて軽量な電子機器を実現できる。また、表示パネル6511が極めて薄いため、電子機器の厚さを抑えつつ、大容量のバッテリ6518を搭載することもできる。また、表示パネル6511の一部を折り返して、画素部の裏側にFPC6515との接続部を配置することにより、狭額縁の電子機器を実現できる。 A display device according to one embodiment of the present invention can be applied to the display panel 6511. Therefore, an extremely lightweight electronic device can be realized. Furthermore, since the display panel 6511 is extremely thin, a large-capacity battery 6518 can be mounted thereon while keeping the thickness of the electronic device small. Furthermore, by folding back a part of the display panel 6511 and arranging a connection portion with the FPC 6515 on the back side of the pixel portion, an electronic device with a narrow frame can be realized.

 図22Cにテレビジョン装置の一例を示す。テレビジョン装置7100は、筐体7101に表示部7000が組み込まれている。ここでは、スタンド7103により筐体7101を支持した構成を示している。 Figure 22C shows an example of a television device. The television device 7100 has a display unit 7000 built into a housing 7101. In this example, the housing 7101 is supported by a stand 7103.

 図22Cに示すテレビジョン装置7100の操作は、筐体7101が備える操作スイッチ、及び、別体のリモコン操作機7111により行うことができる。または、表示部7000にタッチセンサを備えていてもよく、指等で表示部7000に触れることでテレビジョン装置7100を操作してもよい。リモコン操作機7111は、当該リモコン操作機7111から出力する情報を表示する表示部を有していてもよい。リモコン操作機7111が備える操作キーまたはタッチパネルにより、チャンネル及び音量の操作を行うことができ、表示部7000に表示される映像を操作することができる。 The television set 7100 shown in FIG. 22C can be operated using operation switches provided on the housing 7101 and a separate remote control 7111. Alternatively, the display portion 7000 may be provided with a touch sensor, and the television set 7100 may be operated by touching the display portion 7000 with a finger or the like. The remote control 7111 may have a display portion that displays information output from the remote control 7111. The channel and volume can be controlled using the operation keys or touch panel provided on the remote control 7111, and the image displayed on the display portion 7000 can be controlled.

 なお、テレビジョン装置7100は、受信機及びモデムなどを備えた構成とする。受信機により一般のテレビ放送の受信を行うことができる。また、モデムを介して有線または無線による通信ネットワークに接続することにより、一方向(送信者から受信者)または双方向(送信者と受信者間、あるいは受信者間など)の情報通信を行うことも可能である。 The television device 7100 is configured to include a receiver and a modem. The receiver can receive general television broadcasts. In addition, by connecting to a wired or wireless communication network via the modem, it is possible to carry out one-way (from sender to receiver) or two-way (between sender and receiver, or between receivers, etc.) information communication.

 図22Dに、ノート型パーソナルコンピュータの一例を示す。ノート型パーソナルコンピュータ7200は、筐体7211、キーボード7212、ポインティングデバイス7213、外部接続ポート7214、制御装置7216等を有する。筐体7211に、表示部7000が組み込まれている。制御装置7216としては、例えば、CPU、GPU、及び記憶装置の中から選ばれるいずれか一または複数を有する。本発明の一態様の半導体装置は、表示部7000、制御装置7216などに適用することができる。本発明の一態様の半導体装置を制御装置7216に用いることで、消費電力を低減させることができるため好適である。 FIG. 22D shows an example of a laptop personal computer. The laptop personal computer 7200 includes a housing 7211, a keyboard 7212, a pointing device 7213, an external connection port 7214, a control device 7216, and the like. A display portion 7000 is incorporated in the housing 7211. The control device 7216 includes, for example, one or more selected from a CPU, a GPU, and a storage device. The semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention can be applied to the display portion 7000, the control device 7216, and the like. Use of the semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention for the control device 7216 is preferable because power consumption can be reduced.

 図22E及び図22Fに、デジタルサイネージの一例を示す。 Figures 22E and 22F show an example of digital signage.

 図22Eに示すデジタルサイネージ7300は、筐体7301、表示部7000、及びスピーカ7303等を有する。さらに、LEDランプ、操作キー(電源スイッチ、または操作スイッチを含む)、接続端子、各種センサ、マイクロフォン等を有することができる。 The digital signage 7300 shown in FIG. 22E includes a housing 7301, a display unit 7000, and a speaker 7303. It may also include LED lamps, operation keys (including a power switch or an operation switch), connection terminals, various sensors, a microphone, etc.

 図22Fは円柱状の柱7401に取り付けられたデジタルサイネージ7400である。デジタルサイネージ7400は、柱7401の曲面に沿って設けられた表示部7000を有する。 Figure 22F shows digital signage 7400 attached to a cylindrical pillar 7401. Digital signage 7400 has a display unit 7000 that is provided along the curved surface of pillar 7401.

 表示部7000が広いほど、一度に提供できる情報量を増やすことができる。また、表示部7000が広いほど、人の目につきやすく、例えば、広告の宣伝効果を高めることができる。 The larger the display unit 7000, the more information can be provided at one time. Also, the larger the display unit 7000, the more likely it is to catch people's attention, which can increase the advertising effectiveness of, for example, advertising.

 表示部7000にタッチパネルを適用することで、表示部7000に画像または動画を表示するだけでなく、使用者が直感的に操作することができ、好ましい。また、路線情報もしくは交通情報などの情報を提供するための用途に用いる場合には、直感的な操作によりユーザビリティを高めることができる。 Applying a touch panel to the display unit 7000 is preferable because it not only displays images or videos on the display unit 7000, but also allows the user to operate it intuitively. Furthermore, when used to provide information such as route information or traffic information, intuitive operation can improve usability.

 また、図22E及び図22Fに示すように、デジタルサイネージ7300またはデジタルサイネージ7400は、使用者が所持するスマートフォン等の情報端末機7311または情報端末機7411と無線通信により連携可能であることが好ましい。例えば、表示部7000に表示される広告の情報を、情報端末機7311または情報端末機7411の画面に表示させることができる。また、情報端末機7311または情報端末機7411を操作することで、表示部7000の表示を切り替えることができる。 Furthermore, as shown in Figures 22E and 22F, it is preferable that the digital signage 7300 or the digital signage 7400 can be linked via wireless communication with an information terminal 7311 or an information terminal 7411 such as a smartphone carried by a user. For example, advertising information displayed on the display unit 7000 can be displayed on the screen of the information terminal 7311 or the information terminal 7411. Furthermore, the display on the display unit 7000 can be switched by operating the information terminal 7311 or the information terminal 7411.

 また、デジタルサイネージ7300またはデジタルサイネージ7400に、情報端末機7311または情報端末機7411の画面を操作手段(コントローラ)としたゲームを実行させることもできる。これにより、不特定多数の使用者が同時にゲームに参加し、楽しむことができる。 It is also possible to have the digital signage 7300 or digital signage 7400 run a game using the screen of the information terminal 7311 or information terminal 7411 as the operating means (controller). This allows an unspecified number of users to simultaneously participate in and enjoy the game.

 図22C乃至図22Fにおいて、表示部7000に、本発明の一態様の表示パネルを適用することができる。 In Figures 22C to 22F, a display panel of one embodiment of the present invention can be applied to the display portion 7000.

 図23A乃至図23Gに示す電子機器は、筐体9000、表示部9001、スピーカ9003、操作キー9005(電源スイッチ、または操作スイッチを含む)、接続端子9006、センサ9007(力、変位、位置、速度、加速度、角速度、回転数、距離、光、液、磁気、温度、化学物質、音声、時間、硬度、電場、電流、電圧、電力、放射線、流量、湿度、傾度、振動、においまたは赤外線を検知、検出、または測定する機能を含むもの)、マイクロフォン9008、等を有する。 The electronic device shown in Figures 23A to 23G has a housing 9000, a display unit 9001, a speaker 9003, operation keys 9005 (including a power switch or an operation switch), a connection terminal 9006, a sensor 9007 (including the function of sensing, detecting, or measuring force, displacement, position, speed, acceleration, angular velocity, rotation speed, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemical substance, sound, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration, odor, or infrared light), a microphone 9008, etc.

 図23A乃至図23Gに示す電子機器は、様々な機能を有する。例えば、様々な情報(静止画、動画、テキスト画像など)を表示部に表示する機能、タッチパネル機能、カレンダー、日付または時刻などを表示する機能、様々なソフトウェア(プログラム)によって処理を制御する機能、無線通信機能、記録媒体に記録されているプログラムまたはデータを読み出して処理する機能、等を有することができる。なお、電子機器の機能はこれらに限られず、様々な機能を有することができる。電子機器は、複数の表示部を有していてもよい。また、電子機器にカメラ等を設け、静止画または動画を撮影し、記録媒体(外部またはカメラに内蔵)に保存する機能、撮影した画像を表示部に表示する機能、等を有していてもよい。 The electronic devices shown in Figures 23A to 23G have various functions. For example, they may have a function to display various information (still images, videos, text images, etc.) on the display unit, a touch panel function, a function to display a calendar, date or time, etc., a function to control processing using various software (programs), a wireless communication function, a function to read and process programs or data recorded on a recording medium, etc. Note that the functions of the electronic devices are not limited to these, and they may have a variety of functions. The electronic devices may have multiple display units. They may also have a function to include a camera or the like to capture still images or videos and save them on a recording medium (external or built into the camera), and a function to display the captured images on the display unit.

 図23A乃至図23Gに示す電子機器の詳細について、以下説明を行う。 The details of the electronic devices shown in Figures 23A to 23G are described below.

 図23Aは、携帯情報端末9101を示す斜視図である。携帯情報端末9101は、例えばスマートフォンとして用いることができる。なお、携帯情報端末9101は、スピーカ9003、接続端子9006、センサ9007等を設けてもよい。また、携帯情報端末9101は、文字及び画像情報をその複数の面に表示することができる。図23Aでは3つのアイコン9050を表示した例を示している。また、破線の矩形で示す情報9051を表示部9001の他の面に表示することもできる。情報9051の一例としては、電子メール、SNS、電話などの着信の通知、電子メールまたはSNSなどの題名、送信者名、日時、時刻、バッテリの残量、電波強度などがある。または、情報9051が表示されている位置にはアイコン9050などを表示してもよい。 Figure 23A is a perspective view showing a mobile information terminal 9101. The mobile information terminal 9101 can be used as a smartphone, for example. The mobile information terminal 9101 may be provided with a speaker 9003, a connection terminal 9006, a sensor 9007, and the like. The mobile information terminal 9101 can also display text and image information on multiple surfaces. Figure 23A shows an example in which three icons 9050 are displayed. Information 9051, indicated by a dashed rectangle, can also be displayed on another surface of the display unit 9001. Examples of the information 9051 include notifications of incoming emails, SNS messages, phone calls, etc., the title of the email or SNS message, the sender's name, the date and time, the remaining battery level, and signal strength. Alternatively, an icon 9050 or the like may be displayed in the position where the information 9051 is displayed.

 図23Bは、携帯情報端末9102を示す斜視図である。携帯情報端末9102は、表示部9001の3面以上に情報を表示する機能を有する。ここでは、情報9052、情報9053、情報9054がそれぞれ異なる面に表示されている例を示す。例えば使用者は、洋服の胸ポケットに携帯情報端末9102を収納した状態で、携帯情報端末9102の上方から観察できる位置に表示された情報9053を確認することもできる。使用者は、携帯情報端末9102をポケットから取り出すことなく表示を確認し、例えば電話を受けるか否かを判断できる。 Figure 23B is a perspective view showing the mobile information terminal 9102. The mobile information terminal 9102 has the function of displaying information on three or more sides of the display unit 9001. Here, an example is shown in which information 9052, information 9053, and information 9054 are displayed on different sides. For example, a user can check information 9053 displayed in a position that can be observed from above the mobile information terminal 9102 while the mobile information terminal 9102 is stored in a breast pocket of clothes. The user can check the display without taking the mobile information terminal 9102 out of their pocket and decide, for example, whether to answer a call.

 図23Cは、タブレット端末9103を示す斜視図である。タブレット端末9103は、一例として、移動電話、電子メール、文章閲覧及び作成、音楽再生、インターネット通信、コンピュータゲーム等の種々のアプリケーションの実行が可能である。タブレット端末9103は、筐体9000の正面に表示部9001、カメラ9002、マイクロフォン9008、スピーカ9003を有し、筐体9000の左側面には操作用のボタンとしての操作キー9005、底面には接続端子9006を有する。 Figure 23C is a perspective view showing a tablet terminal 9103. The tablet terminal 9103 is capable of executing various applications, such as mobile phone calls, e-mail, document browsing and creation, music playback, internet communication, and computer games. The tablet terminal 9103 has a display unit 9001, a camera 9002, a microphone 9008, and a speaker 9003 on the front of the housing 9000, operation keys 9005 as operation buttons on the left side of the housing 9000, and a connection terminal 9006 on the bottom.

 図23Dは、腕時計型の携帯情報端末9200を示す斜視図である。携帯情報端末9200は、例えばスマートウォッチ(登録商標)として用いることができる。また、表示部9001はその表示面が湾曲して設けられ、湾曲した表示面に沿って表示を行うことができる。また、携帯情報端末9200は、例えば無線通信可能なヘッドセットと相互通信することによって、ハンズフリーで通話することもできる。また、携帯情報端末9200は、接続端子9006により、他の情報端末と相互にデータ伝送を行うこと、及び、充電を行うこともできる。なお、充電動作は無線給電により行ってもよい。 Figure 23D is a perspective view showing a wristwatch-type mobile information terminal 9200. The mobile information terminal 9200 can be used, for example, as a smart watch (registered trademark). The display surface of the display unit 9001 is curved, allowing display along the curved display surface. The mobile information terminal 9200 can also perform hands-free conversations by communicating with, for example, a wirelessly capable headset. The mobile information terminal 9200 can also perform data transmission and charging with other information terminals via the connection terminal 9006. Charging may be performed by wireless power supply.

 図23E乃至図23Gは、折り畳み可能な携帯情報端末9201を示す斜視図である。また、図23Eは携帯情報端末9201を展開した状態、図23Gは折り畳んだ状態、図23Fは図23Eと図23Gの一方から他方に変化する途中の状態の斜視図である。携帯情報端末9201は、折り畳んだ状態では可搬性に優れ、展開した状態では継ぎ目のない広い表示領域により表示の一覧性に優れる。携帯情報端末9201が有する表示部9001は、ヒンジ9055によって連結された3つの筐体9000に支持されている。例えば、表示部9001は、曲率半径0.1mm以上150mm以下で曲げることができる。 Figures 23E to 23G are perspective views showing a foldable mobile information terminal 9201. Figure 23E is a perspective view of the mobile information terminal 9201 in an unfolded state, Figure 23G is a folded state, and Figure 23F is a perspective view of a state in the process of changing from one of Figures 23E and 23G to the other. The mobile information terminal 9201 is highly portable when folded, and has a seamless, wide display area when unfolded, allowing for excellent display visibility. The display unit 9001 of the mobile information terminal 9201 is supported by three housings 9000 connected by hinges 9055. For example, the display unit 9001 can be bent with a curvature radius of 0.1 mm or more and 150 mm or less.

 本実施の形態は、少なくともその一部を本明細書中に記載する他の実施の形態と適宜組み合わせて実施することができる。 This embodiment can be implemented by appropriately combining at least a portion of it with other embodiments described in this specification.

(実施の形態7)
 本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の半導体装置の応用例について説明する。本発明の一態様の半導体装置は、例えば、電子部品、電子機器、大型計算機、宇宙用機器、及びデータセンター(Data Center:DCとも呼称する)に用いることができる。本発明の一態様の半導体装置を用いた、電子部品、電子機器、大型計算機、宇宙用機器、及びデータセンターは、低消費電力化といった高性能化に有効である。
Seventh Embodiment
In this embodiment, an application example of a semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention will be described. The semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention can be used for, for example, electronic components, electronic devices, mainframes, space equipment, and data centers (also referred to as data centers (DCs)). The electronic components, electronic devices, mainframes, space equipment, and data centers using the semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention are effective in achieving high performance, such as low power consumption.

 本発明の一態様の半導体装置が適用された電子部品等は、実施の形態6で例示した電子機器に適用することができる。 An electronic component or the like to which a semiconductor device of one embodiment of the present invention is applied can be applied to the electronic devices exemplified in Embodiment 6.

[電子部品]
 電子部品700が実装された基板(実装基板704)の斜視図を、図24Aに示す。図24Aに示す電子部品700は、モールド711内に半導体装置710を有している。図24Aは、電子部品700の内部を示すために、一部の記載を省略している。電子部品700は、モールド711の外側にランド712を有する。ランド712は電極パッド713と電気的に接続され、電極パッド713は半導体装置710とワイヤ714を介して電気的に接続されている。電子部品700は、例えばプリント基板702に実装される。このような電子部品が複数組み合わされて、それぞれがプリント基板702上で電気的に接続されることで実装基板704が完成する。
[Electronic Components]
FIG. 24A shows a perspective view of a substrate (mounting substrate 704) on which electronic component 700 is mounted. Electronic component 700 shown in FIG. 24A has a semiconductor device 710 inside a mold 711. FIG. 24A omits some parts to show the interior of electronic component 700. Electronic component 700 has lands 712 on the outside of mold 711. Lands 712 are electrically connected to electrode pads 713, and electrode pads 713 are electrically connected to semiconductor device 710 via wires 714. Electronic component 700 is mounted on, for example, a printed circuit board 702. A plurality of such electronic components are combined and electrically connected on printed circuit board 702 to complete mounting substrate 704.

 また、半導体装置710は、駆動回路層715と、記憶層716と、を有する。なお、記憶層716は、複数のメモリセルアレイが積層された構成である。駆動回路層715と、記憶層716と、が積層された構成は、モノリシック積層の構成とすることができる。モノリシック積層の構成では、TSV(Through Silicon Via)などの貫通電極技術、及び、Cu−Cu直接接合などの接合技術、を用いることなく、各層間を接続することができる。駆動回路層715と、記憶層716と、をモノリシック積層の構成とすることで、例えば、プロセッサ上にメモリが直接形成される、いわゆるオンチップメモリの構成とすることができる。オンチップメモリの構成とすることで、プロセッサと、メモリとのインターフェース部分の動作を高速にすることが可能となる。 Semiconductor device 710 also has a drive circuit layer 715 and a memory layer 716. The memory layer 716 is configured with multiple memory cell arrays stacked on top of each other. The stacked configuration of drive circuit layer 715 and memory layer 716 can be a monolithic stacked configuration. A monolithic stacked configuration allows connections between the layers without using through-electrode technology such as TSV (Through Silicon Via) or bonding technology such as Cu-Cu direct bonding. By configuring drive circuit layer 715 and memory layer 716 as a monolithic stacked configuration, it is possible to achieve a so-called on-chip memory configuration, in which memory is formed directly on a processor, for example. An on-chip memory configuration enables faster operation of the interface between the processor and memory.

 また、オンチップメモリの構成とすることで、TSVなどの貫通電極を用いる技術と比較し、接続配線などのサイズを小さくできるため、接続ピン数を増加させることも可能となる。接続ピン数を増加させることで、並列動作が可能となるため、メモリのバンド幅(メモリバンド幅ともいう)を向上させることが可能となる。 Furthermore, by configuring the memory on-chip, the size of the connection wiring can be reduced compared to technologies that use through electrodes such as TSVs, making it possible to increase the number of connection pins. Increasing the number of connection pins enables parallel operation, making it possible to improve the memory bandwidth (also known as memory bandwidth).

 また、記憶層716が有する、複数のメモリセルアレイを、OSトランジスタを用いて形成し、当該複数のメモリセルアレイをモノリシックで積層することが好ましい。複数のメモリセルアレイをモノリシック積層の構成とすることで、メモリのバンド幅、及びメモリのアクセスレイテンシの一方または双方を向上させることができる。なお、バンド幅とは、単位時間あたりのデータ転送量であり、アクセスレイテンシとは、アクセスしてからデータのやり取りが始まるまでの時間である。なお、記憶層716にSiトランジスタを用いる構成の場合、OSトランジスタと比較し、モノリシック積層の構成とすることが困難である。そのため、モノリシック積層の構成において、OSトランジスタは、Siトランジスタよりも優れた構造であるといえる。 Furthermore, it is preferable that the multiple memory cell arrays included in the memory layer 716 are formed using OS transistors and that the multiple memory cell arrays are monolithically stacked. By configuring the multiple memory cell arrays as a monolithic stack, it is possible to improve either or both of the memory bandwidth and the memory access latency. Note that the bandwidth is the amount of data transferred per unit time, and the access latency is the time from access to the start of data exchange. Note that when Si transistors are used for the memory layer 716, it is more difficult to achieve a monolithic stack configuration than OS transistors. Therefore, it can be said that OS transistors have a superior structure to Si transistors in a monolithic stack configuration.

 また、半導体装置710を、ダイと呼称してもよい。なお、本明細書等において、ダイとは、半導体チップの製造工程で、例えば円盤状の基板(ウエハともいう)などに回路パターンを形成し、さいの目状に切り分けて得られたチップ片を表す。なお、ダイに用いることのできる半導体材料として、例えば、シリコン(Si)、炭化ケイ素(SiC)、または窒化ガリウム(GaN)などが挙げられる。例えば、シリコン基板(シリコンウエハともいう)から得られたダイを、シリコンダイという場合がある。 Semiconductor device 710 may also be referred to as a die. In this specification, a die refers to a chip piece obtained during the semiconductor chip manufacturing process by forming a circuit pattern on, for example, a disk-shaped substrate (also called a wafer) and dicing it into cubes. Semiconductor materials that can be used for the die include, for example, silicon (Si), silicon carbide (SiC), or gallium nitride (GaN). For example, a die obtained from a silicon substrate (also called a silicon wafer) may be called a silicon die.

 次に、電子部品730の斜視図を図24Bに示す。電子部品730は、SiP(System in Package)またはMCM(Multi Chip Module)の一例である。電子部品730は、パッケージ基板732(プリント基板)上にインターポーザ731が設けられ、インターポーザ731上に半導体装置735、及び複数の半導体装置710が設けられている。 Next, Figure 24B shows a perspective view of electronic component 730. Electronic component 730 is an example of a SiP (System in Package) or MCM (Multi-Chip Module). Electronic component 730 has an interposer 731 provided on a package substrate 732 (printed circuit board), and a semiconductor device 735 and multiple semiconductor devices 710 provided on interposer 731.

 電子部品730では、半導体装置710を広帯域メモリ(HBM:High Bandwidth Memory)として用いる例を示している。また、半導体装置735は、CPU(Central Processing Unit)、GPU(Graphics Processing Unit)、またはFPGA(Field Programmable Gate Array)等の集積回路に用いることができる。 Electronic component 730 shows an example in which semiconductor device 710 is used as a high bandwidth memory (HBM). Semiconductor device 735 can also be used in integrated circuits such as a CPU (Central Processing Unit), GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), or FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array).

 パッケージ基板732は、例えば、セラミック基板、プラスチック基板、または、ガラスエポキシ基板を用いることができる。インターポーザ731は、例えば、シリコンインターポーザ、または樹脂インターポーザを用いることができる。 The package substrate 732 can be, for example, a ceramic substrate, a plastic substrate, or a glass epoxy substrate. The interposer 731 can be, for example, a silicon interposer or a resin interposer.

 インターポーザ731は、複数の配線を有し、端子ピッチの異なる複数の集積回路を電気的に接続する機能を有する。複数の配線は、単層または多層で設けられる。また、インターポーザ731は、インターポーザ731上に設けられた集積回路をパッケージ基板732に設けられた電極と電気的に接続する機能を有する。これらのことから、インターポーザを「再配線基板」または「中間基板」と呼ぶ場合がある。また、インターポーザ731に貫通電極を設けて、当該貫通電極を用いて集積回路とパッケージ基板732を電気的に接続する場合もある。また、シリコンインターポーザでは、貫通電極として、TSVを用いることもできる。 The interposer 731 has multiple wirings and functions to electrically connect multiple integrated circuits with different terminal pitches. The multiple wirings are provided in a single layer or multiple layers. The interposer 731 also functions to electrically connect the integrated circuits provided on the interposer 731 to electrodes provided on the package substrate 732. For these reasons, the interposer is sometimes called a "rewiring substrate" or "intermediate substrate." In addition, through electrodes may be provided in the interposer 731, and the integrated circuits and package substrate 732 may be electrically connected using these through electrodes. In addition, with silicon interposers, TSVs may also be used as through electrodes.

 HBMでは、広いメモリバンド幅を実現するために多くの配線を接続する必要がある。このため、HBMを実装するインターポーザには、微細かつ高密度の配線形成が求められる。よって、HBMを実装するインターポーザには、シリコンインターポーザを用いることが好ましい。 In HBM, many wiring connections are required to achieve a wide memory bandwidth. For this reason, the interposer on which HBM is implemented must have fine, high-density wiring. Therefore, it is preferable to use a silicon interposer for the interposer on which HBM is implemented.

 また、シリコンインターポーザを用いた、SiP及びMCM等では、集積回路とインターポーザ間の膨張係数の違いによる信頼性の低下が生じにくい。また、シリコンインターポーザは表面の平坦性が高いため、シリコンインターポーザ上に設ける集積回路とシリコンインターポーザ間の接続不良が生じにくい。特に、インターポーザ上に複数の集積回路を横に並べて配置する2.5Dパッケージ(2.5次元実装)では、シリコンインターポーザを用いることが好ましい。 Furthermore, in SiPs and MCMs that use silicon interposers, a decrease in reliability due to differences in the coefficient of expansion between the integrated circuit and the interposer is less likely. Furthermore, because the surface of a silicon interposer is highly flat, poor connections between the integrated circuit mounted on the silicon interposer and the silicon interposer are less likely to occur. It is particularly preferable to use silicon interposers in 2.5D packages (2.5-dimensional packaging), in which multiple integrated circuits are arranged horizontally on an interposer.

 一方で、シリコンインターポーザ、及びTSVなどを用いて端子ピッチの異なる複数の集積回路を電気的に接続する場合、当該端子ピッチの幅などのスペースが必要となる。そのため、電子部品730のサイズを小さくしようとした場合、上記の端子ピッチの幅が問題になり、広いメモリバンド幅を実現するために必要な多くの配線を設けることが、困難になる場合がある。そこで、前述したように、OSトランジスタを用いたモノリシック積層の構成が好適である。TSVを用いて積層したメモリセルアレイと、モノリシック積層したメモリセルアレイと、を組み合わせた複合化構造としてもよい。 On the other hand, when electrically connecting multiple integrated circuits with different terminal pitches using a silicon interposer, TSV, or the like, space is required to accommodate the width of the terminal pitch. Therefore, when attempting to reduce the size of the electronic component 730, the width of the terminal pitch becomes an issue, and it may become difficult to provide the large number of wirings required to achieve a wide memory bandwidth. Therefore, as mentioned above, a monolithic stacked configuration using OS transistors is preferable. A composite structure may also be used that combines a memory cell array stacked using TSVs with a monolithic stacked memory cell array.

 また、電子部品730と重ねてヒートシンク(放熱板)を設けてもよい。ヒートシンクを設ける場合は、インターポーザ731上に設ける集積回路の高さを揃えることが好ましい。例えば、本実施の形態に示す電子部品730では、半導体装置710と半導体装置735の高さを揃えることが好ましい。 A heat sink (heat sink) may also be provided overlapping the electronic component 730. When a heat sink is provided, it is preferable to align the height of the integrated circuit provided on the interposer 731. For example, in the electronic component 730 shown in this embodiment, it is preferable to align the height of the semiconductor device 710 and the semiconductor device 735.

 電子部品730を他の基板に実装するため、パッケージ基板732の底部に電極733を設けてもよい。図24Bでは、電極733を半田ボールで形成する例を示している。パッケージ基板732の底部に半田ボールをマトリクス状に設けることで、BGA(Ball Grid Array)実装を実現できる。また、電極733を導電性のピンで形成してもよい。パッケージ基板732の底部に導電性のピンをマトリクス状に設けることで、PGA(Pin Grid Array)実装を実現できる。 Electrodes 733 may be provided on the bottom of package substrate 732 in order to mount electronic component 730 on another substrate. Figure 24B shows an example in which electrodes 733 are formed from solder balls. By providing solder balls in a matrix on the bottom of package substrate 732, BGA (Ball Grid Array) mounting can be achieved. Electrodes 733 may also be formed from conductive pins. By providing conductive pins in a matrix on the bottom of package substrate 732, PGA (Pin Grid Array) mounting can be achieved.

 電子部品730は、BGA及びPGAに限らず様々な実装方法を用いて他の基板に実装することができる。実装方法としては、例えば、SPGA(Staggered Pin Grid Array)、LGA(Land Grid Array)、QFP(Quad Flat Package)、QFJ(Quad Flat J−leaded package)、及び、QFN(Quad Flat Non−leaded package)が挙げられる。 Electronic component 730 can be mounted on other substrates using various mounting methods, not limited to BGA and PGA. Examples of mounting methods include SPGA (Staggered Pin Grid Array), LGA (Land Grid Array), QFP (Quad Flat Package), QFJ (Quad Flat J-leaded package), and QFN (Quad Flat Non-leaded package).

[大型計算機]
 大型計算機5600の斜視図を図25Aに示す。大型計算機5600には、ラック5610にラックマウント型の計算機5620が複数格納されている。なお、大型計算機5600を、スーパーコンピュータと呼称してもよい。
[Large computer]
25A shows a perspective view of a mainframe computer 5600. The mainframe computer 5600 has a rack 5610 housing a plurality of rack-mounted computers 5620. The mainframe computer 5600 may also be called a supercomputer.

 図25Bに計算機5620の一例の斜視図を示す。計算機5620は、マザーボード5630を有する。マザーボード5630には複数のスロット5631、及び複数の接続端子が設けられる。スロット5631には、PCカード5621が挿入されている。加えて、PCカード5621は、接続端子5623、接続端子5624、接続端子5625を有し、それぞれ、マザーボード5630に接続されている。 Figure 25B shows a perspective view of an example of a computer 5620. Computer 5620 has a motherboard 5630. Motherboard 5630 has multiple slots 5631 and multiple connection terminals. A PC card 5621 is inserted into slot 5631. In addition, PC card 5621 has connection terminals 5623, 5624, and 5625, each of which is connected to motherboard 5630.

 図25CにPCカード5621の一例を示す。PCカード5621は、例えばCPU、GPU、記憶装置などを備えた処理ボードである。PCカード5621は、ボード5622と、ボード5622に実装される、接続端子5623、接続端子5624、接続端子5625、電子部品5626、電子部品5627、電子部品5628、接続端子5629などを有する。なお、図25Cには、電子部品5626、電子部品5627、及び電子部品5628以外の部品を図示している。 Figure 25C shows an example of a PC card 5621. PC card 5621 is a processing board equipped with, for example, a CPU, GPU, and storage device. PC card 5621 has board 5622 and connection terminals 5623, 5624, 5625, electronic components 5626, 5627, 5628, and 5629 mounted on board 5622. Note that Figure 25C also shows components other than electronic components 5626, 5627, and 5628.

 接続端子5629は、マザーボード5630のスロット5631に挿入することができる形状を有しており、接続端子5629は、PCカード5621とマザーボード5630とを接続するためのインターフェースとして機能する。接続端子5629の規格としては、例えば、PCIeなどが挙げられる。 The connection terminal 5629 has a shape that allows it to be inserted into the slot 5631 of the motherboard 5630, and functions as an interface for connecting the PC card 5621 and the motherboard 5630. The connection terminal 5629 may conform to, for example, PCIe.

 接続端子5623、接続端子5624、接続端子5625は、例えば、PCカード5621に対して電力供給、信号入力などを行うためのインターフェースとすることができる。また、例えば、PCカード5621によって計算された信号の出力などを行うためのインターフェースとすることができる。接続端子5623、接続端子5624、接続端子5625のそれぞれの規格としては、例えば、USB(Universal Serial Bus)、SATA(Serial ATA)、SCSI(Small Computer System Interface)などが挙げられる。また、接続端子5623、接続端子5624、接続端子5625から映像信号を出力する場合、それぞれの規格としては、HDMI(登録商標)などが挙げられる。 Connection terminals 5623, 5624, and 5625 can be, for example, interfaces for supplying power to PC card 5621, inputting signals, etc. They can also be, for example, interfaces for outputting signals calculated by PC card 5621. Examples of standards for connection terminals 5623, 5624, and 5625 include USB (Universal Serial Bus), SATA (Serial ATA), and SCSI (Small Computer System Interface). Also, when outputting video signals from connection terminals 5623, 5624, and 5625, examples of standards for each include HDMI (registered trademark).

 電子部品5626は、信号の入出力を行う端子(図示しない)を有しており、当該端子をボード5622が備えるソケット(図示しない)に対して差し込むことで、電子部品5626とボード5622を電気的に接続することができる。 Electronic component 5626 has terminals (not shown) for inputting and outputting signals, and by inserting these terminals into sockets (not shown) provided on board 5622, electronic component 5626 and board 5622 can be electrically connected.

 電子部品5627及び電子部品5628は、複数の端子を有しており、当該端子をボード5622が備える配線に対して、例えば、リフロー方式のはんだ付けを行うことで、実装することができる。電子部品5627としては、例えば、FPGA、GPU、CPUなどが挙げられる。電子部品5627として、例えば、電子部品730を用いることができる。電子部品5628としては、例えば、記憶装置などが挙げられる。電子部品5628として、例えば、電子部品700を用いることができる。 Electronic component 5627 and electronic component 5628 have multiple terminals, and can be mounted to wiring on board 5622 by, for example, reflow soldering the terminals. Examples of electronic component 5627 include FPGAs, GPUs, and CPUs. Electronic component 5627 can be, for example, electronic component 730. Electronic component 5628 can be, for example, a memory device. Electronic component 5628 can be, for example, electronic component 700.

 大型計算機5600は並列計算機としても機能できる。大型計算機5600を並列計算機として用いることで、例えば、人工知能の学習、及び推論に必要な大規模の計算を行うことができる。 The mainframe computer 5600 can also function as a parallel computer. By using the mainframe computer 5600 as a parallel computer, it is possible to perform large-scale calculations required for artificial intelligence learning and inference, for example.

 本実施の形態は、少なくともその一部を本明細書中に記載する他の実施の形態と適宜組み合わせて実施することができる。 This embodiment can be implemented by appropriately combining at least a portion of it with other embodiments described in this specification.

 本実施例では、単結晶基板上に単結晶の酸化物半導体膜を形成し、その断面観察を行った。 In this example, a single-crystal oxide semiconductor film was formed on a single-crystal substrate, and its cross section was observed.

 単結晶基板として、単結晶のYSZ基板を用いた。ここでは、基板面が(111)面である基板と、(100)面である基板の2種類の基板を用いた。 A single-crystal YSZ substrate was used as the single-crystal substrate. Two types of substrates were used here: one with a (111) surface and one with a (100) surface.

 酸化物半導体膜としては、酸化インジウム膜を用いた。ここでは、YSZ基板上にALD法により厚さ約5nmの酸化インジウム膜を成膜した。成膜は、プリカーサにトリエチルインジウムを用い、酸化剤にオゾンを用い、基板温度を200℃として行った。 An indium oxide film was used as the oxide semiconductor film. Here, an indium oxide film approximately 5 nm thick was deposited on a YSZ substrate using the ALD method. The film was deposited using triethylindium as the precursor and ozone as the oxidizing agent at a substrate temperature of 200°C.

 続いて、酸化インジウム膜を形成した2種類の基板について、断面観察を行った。断面観察は、HAADF−STEMにより行った。 Next, cross-sectional observations were performed on the two types of substrates on which the indium oxide film was formed. Cross-sectional observations were performed using HAADF-STEM.

 図26Aに、基板面が(111)面であるYSZ基板と、その上に形成した酸化インジウム膜(Inと表記)を含む断面像を示す。YSZ基板が有する結晶格子を反映して、酸化インジウム膜も結晶化していることが分かる。YSZ基板及び酸化インジウム膜のそれぞれ結晶方位を図中右側に示している。断面像よりYSZ基板と酸化インジウム膜の結晶方位が一致していることが確認できた。 Figure 26A shows a cross-sectional image of a YSZ substrate with a (111) plane and an indium oxide film ( denoted as In2O3 ) formed thereon. It can be seen that the indium oxide film is also crystallized, reflecting the crystal lattice of the YSZ substrate. The crystal orientations of the YSZ substrate and the indium oxide film are shown on the right side of the figure. The cross-sectional image confirms that the crystal orientations of the YSZ substrate and the indium oxide film are consistent.

 またYSZ基板と酸化インジウム膜の間に、コントラストの低い層(バッファ層(buffer layerと表記))が確認された。 In addition, a low-contrast layer (referred to as a buffer layer) was confirmed between the YSZ substrate and the indium oxide film.

 図26Bに、図26Aの一部の拡大図を示している。バッファ層は2原子層であることが確認できる。HAADF−STEM法では試料表面だけでなく奥行き方向の情報も重畳するため、バッファ層ではコントラストが暗く観察されることは、原子が存在しないサイトが存在することを示唆する。すなわち、バッファ層は他の領域よりも低密度な領域ともいえる。 Figure 26B shows an enlarged view of a portion of Figure 26A. It can be seen that the buffer layer is a two-atom layer. Since the HAADF-STEM method superimposes information not only from the sample surface but also from the depth direction, the buffer layer is observed to have a dark contrast, suggesting the presence of sites where no atoms are present. In other words, the buffer layer can be considered a region with a lower density than other regions.

 続いて、YSZ基板と酸化インジウム膜のそれぞれの原子間距離に着目する。図26Bには、YSZ基板と酸化インジウム膜について、それぞれの原子間距離を数値で示している。原子間距離は、観察範囲内での100周期分の平均値とした。YSZ基板における原子間距離は、面内方向では0.313nm、厚さ方向では0.300nmであり、これは理想的なYSZの単結晶と同程度の値であった。一方、酸化インジウム膜の原子間距離は、面内方向では0.313nm、厚さ方向では0.291nmであり、厚さ方向は理想的な酸化インジウム単結晶と同程度であるのに対し、面内方向は理想的な単結晶よりも大きい値であった。そのため、少なくとも本実施例で観察した範囲内では、酸化インジウム膜の結晶構造が面内方向にのみ歪んでいることが分かる。 Next, we will focus on the interatomic distances of the YSZ substrate and the indium oxide film. Figure 26B shows the interatomic distances of the YSZ substrate and the indium oxide film as numerical values. The interatomic distances were averaged over 100 periods within the observation range. The interatomic distances in the YSZ substrate were 0.313 nm in the in-plane direction and 0.300 nm in the thickness direction, which are similar to values for an ideal YSZ single crystal. On the other hand, the interatomic distances in the indium oxide film were 0.313 nm in the in-plane direction and 0.291 nm in the thickness direction. While the thickness direction was similar to that of an ideal indium oxide single crystal, the in-plane direction was larger than that of an ideal single crystal. Therefore, it can be seen that, at least within the range observed in this example, the crystal structure of the indium oxide film was distorted only in the in-plane direction.

 図27Aには、基板面が(100)面であるYSZ基板と、その上に形成した酸化インジウム膜を含む断面像を示している。また図27Bには、その拡大図を示している。基板面が異なる場合であっても、良好な結晶性を有する酸化インジウムが得られていることが分かる。 Figure 27A shows a cross-sectional image of a YSZ substrate with a (100) surface and an indium oxide film formed thereon. Figure 27B shows an enlarged view of the same. It can be seen that even when the substrate surface is different, indium oxide with good crystallinity is obtained.

 原子間距離に着目すると、YSZ基板における原子間距離は、面内方向では0.364nm、厚さ方向では0.258nmであり、これは理想的な単結晶と同程度であった。一方、酸化インジウム膜の原子間距離は、面内方向では0.364nm、厚さ方向では0.252nmであり、厚さ方向は理想的な酸化インジウム単結晶と同程度であるのに対し、面内方向は理想的な単結晶よりも大きい値であった。すなわち、基板面が(111)面である場合と同様に、理想的な単結晶の酸化インジウムと比較して、酸化インジウム膜は面内方向には原子間距離が広がるように歪み、厚さ方向はほとんど歪まない結果であった。 Focusing on interatomic distances, the interatomic distance in the YSZ substrate was 0.364 nm in the in-plane direction and 0.258 nm in the thickness direction, which was comparable to that of an ideal single crystal. On the other hand, the interatomic distance in the indium oxide film was 0.364 nm in the in-plane direction and 0.252 nm in the thickness direction. While the thickness direction was comparable to that of an ideal indium oxide single crystal, the in-plane direction was larger. In other words, just as when the substrate surface was a (111) plane, compared to ideal indium oxide single crystal, the indium oxide film was distorted so that the interatomic distance increased in the in-plane direction, but there was almost no distortion in the thickness direction.

 また、バッファ層に着目すると、基板面が(111)面では2原子層であったのに対し、基板面が(100)面の場合は1原子層であった。このことから、基板の結晶方位の違いにより、被形成膜である酸化インジウム膜にかかる応力の大きさが異なり、その違いがバッファ層の層数に関係していることが分かる。この結果からは、YSZ基板の面方位について、(111)面よりも(100)面の方が、酸化インジウム膜との結晶構造の整合性が良好であることが示唆される。 Furthermore, when we look at the buffer layer, it is two atomic layers thick when the substrate surface is (111), but one atomic layer thick when the substrate surface is (100). This shows that the amount of stress applied to the indium oxide film to be formed varies depending on the crystal orientation of the substrate, and that this difference is related to the number of layers in the buffer layer. These results suggest that, regarding the surface orientation of the YSZ substrate, the (100) plane provides better matching of the crystal structure with the indium oxide film than the (111) plane.

 本実施例によれば、単結晶基板上に酸化物半導体膜をエピタキシャル成長させ、単結晶の酸化物半導体膜を形成できることが確認できた。また、単結晶基板と単結晶の酸化物半導体膜との間には、低密度なバッファ層が形成されうることが確認できた。また、単結晶の酸化物半導体膜は、面内方向では基板との格子不整合を緩和するように、結晶構造が基板と同程度にまで歪むものの、厚さ方向には歪みが小さいことが分かった。 This example confirmed that a single-crystal oxide semiconductor film can be formed by epitaxially growing an oxide semiconductor film on a single-crystal substrate. It also confirmed that a low-density buffer layer can be formed between the single-crystal substrate and the single-crystal oxide semiconductor film. It was also found that the crystal structure of the single-crystal oxide semiconductor film is distorted to the same extent as the substrate in the in-plane direction to alleviate lattice mismatch with the substrate, but the distortion in the thickness direction is small.

10:トランジスタ、11:基板、11a:基板、12:下地膜、12a:層、15f:元素、15m:元素、15s:元素、16:中間層、21:半導体層、21f:半導体膜、22:絶縁層、22f:絶縁膜、23:導電層、24:導電層、24f:導電膜、32:絶縁層、33a:絶縁層、33b:絶縁層、33c:絶縁層、33d:絶縁層、50:トランジスタ、51:基板、51c:半導体領域、52:絶縁層、53:導電層、54:低抵抗領域、61a:プラグ、61b:プラグ、61c:プラグ、61d:プラグ、71a:導電層、71b:導電層、71c:導電層、71d:導電層、81:素子分離層、82:絶縁層、83a:絶縁層、83b:絶縁層、83c:絶縁層、83d:絶縁層、100:表示装置、100a:表示装置、100b:表示装置、101:基板、110:発光素子、110B:発光素子、110G:発光素子、110R:発光素子、110W:発光素子、111:画素電極、111B:画素電極、111C:接続電極、111G:画素電極、111R:画素電極、112:有機層、112B:有機層、112G:有機層、112R:有機層、112W:有機層、113:共通電極、114:共通層、115:導電層、115B:導電層、115G:導電層、115R:導電層、116B:着色層、116G:着色層、116R:着色層、121:保護層、122:絶縁層、123:絶縁層、125:絶縁層、126:樹脂層、128:層、140:接続部、170:基板、171:接着層、200:トランジスタ、201:絶縁層、202:絶縁層、205:導電層、230:半導体層、230f:半導体膜、240a:導電層、240b:導電層、241a:絶縁層、241b:絶縁層、242:導電層、242a:導電層、242b:導電層、242f:導電膜、250:絶縁層、255:絶縁層、260:導電層、260a:導電層、260b:導電層、271a:絶縁層、271b:絶縁層、275:絶縁層、280:絶縁層、282:絶縁層、283:絶縁層、285:絶縁層、301:基板、310:トランジスタ、311:導電層、312:低抵抗領域、313:絶縁層、314:絶縁層、315:素子分離層、320:トランジスタ、350:絶縁層、351:半導体層、352:絶縁層、353:絶縁層、354:導電層、355:導電層、356:絶縁層、357:導電層、358:絶縁層、359:絶縁層、360:絶縁層、361:配線層、362:絶縁層、363:導電層、364:導電層、371:配線層、372:絶縁層、373:導電層、420:層、422:周辺回路、430[1]:素子層、430[2]:素子層、430[5]:素子層、430[m]:素子層、430[m]m:素子層、430:素子層、432[1,1]:メモリセル、432[i,j]:メモリセル、432[m,n]:メモリセル、432:メモリセル、437:トランジスタ、438:容量素子、440:駆動回路、442:行デコーダ、443:行ドライバ、444:列デコーダ、445:列ドライバ、446[1]:センスアンプ、446[2]:センスアンプ、446:センスアンプ、447:入力回路、448:出力回路、470:層、471:PSW、472:PSW、473:コントロール回路、474:電圧生成回路、480:記憶装置、482:スイッチ回路、482_1:トランジスタ、482_2:トランジスタ、483:プリチャージ回路、483_1:トランジスタ、483_3:トランジスタ、484:プリチャージ回路、484_1:トランジスタ、484_3:トランジスタ、485:増幅回路、485_1:トランジスタ、485_2:トランジスタ、485_3:トランジスタ、485_4:トランジスタ、500A:表示装置、540:容量、541:導電層、543:絶縁層、545:導電層、554:絶縁層、555a:絶縁層、555b:絶縁層、555c:絶縁層、556:プラグ、564:絶縁層、565:絶縁層、574:プラグ、574a:導電層、574b:導電層、575:プラグ、575a:導電層、575b:導電層、580:表示モジュール、581:表示部、582:回路部、583:画素回路部、583a:画素回路、584:画素部、584a:画素、585:端子部、586:配線部、590:FPC、591:基板、592:基板、700:電子部品、700A:電子機器、700B:電子機器、702:プリント基板、704:実装基板、710:半導体装置、711:モールド、712:ランド、713:電極パッド、714:ワイヤ、715:駆動回路層、716:記憶層、721:筐体、723:装着部、727:イヤホン部、730:電子部品、731:インターポーザ、732:パッケージ基板、733:電極、735:半導体装置、750:イヤホン、751:表示パネル、753:光学部材、756:表示領域、757:フレーム、758:鼻パッド、800A:電子機器、800B:電子機器、820:表示部、821:筐体、822:通信部、823:装着部、824:制御部、825:撮像部、827:イヤホン部、832:レンズ、5600:大型計算機、5610:ラック、5620:計算機、5621:PCカード、5622:ボード、5623:接続端子、5624:接続端子、5625:接続端子、5626:電子部品、5627:電子部品、5628:電子部品、5629:接続端子、5630:マザーボード、5631:スロット、6500:電子機器、6501:筐体、6502:表示部、6503:電源ボタン、6504:ボタン、6505:スピーカ、6506:マイク、6507:カメラ、6508:光源、6509:制御装置、6510:保護部材、6511:表示パネル、6512:光学部材、6513:タッチセンサパネル、6515:FPC、6516:IC、6517:プリント基板、6518:バッテリ、7000:表示部、7100:テレビジョン装置、7101:筐体、7103:スタンド、7111:リモコン操作機、7200:ノート型パーソナルコンピュータ、7211:筐体、7212:キーボード、7213:ポインティングデバイス、7214:外部接続ポート、7216:制御装置、7300:デジタルサイネージ、7301:筐体、7303:スピーカ、7311:情報端末機、7400:デジタルサイネージ、7401:柱、7411:情報端末機、9000:筐体、9001:表示部、9002:カメラ、9003:スピーカ、9005:操作キー、9006:接続端子、9007:センサ、9008:マイクロフォン、9050:アイコン、9051:情報、9052:情報、9053:情報、9054:情報、9055:ヒンジ、9101:携帯情報端末、9102:携帯情報端末、9103:タブレット端末、9200:携帯情報端末、9201:携帯情報端末 10: transistor, 11: substrate, 11a: substrate, 12: base film, 12a: layer, 15f: element, 15m: element, 15s: element, 16: intermediate layer, 21: semiconductor layer, 21f: semiconductor film, 22: insulating layer, 22f: insulating film, 23: conductive layer, 24: conductive layer, 24f: conductive film, 32: insulating layer, 33a: insulating layer, 33b: insulating layer, 33c: insulating layer, 33d: insulating layer, 50: transistor, 51: substrate, 51c: semiconductor body region, 52: insulating layer, 53: conductive layer, 54: low resistance region, 61a: plug, 61b: plug, 61c: plug, 61d: plug, 71a: conductive layer, 71b: conductive layer, 71c: conductive layer, 71d: conductive layer, 81: element isolation layer, 82: insulating layer, 83a: insulating layer, 83b: insulating layer, 83c: insulating layer, 83d: insulating layer, 100: display device, 100a: display device, 100b: display device, 101: substrate, 110: emitter Optical element, 110B: light-emitting element, 110G: light-emitting element, 110R: light-emitting element, 110W: light-emitting element, 111: pixel electrode, 111B: pixel electrode, 111C: connection electrode, 111G: pixel electrode, 111R: pixel electrode, 112: organic layer, 112B: organic layer, 112G: organic layer, 112R: organic layer, 112W: organic layer, 113: common electrode, 114: common layer, 115: conductive layer, 115B: conductive layer, 115G: conductive layer, 115R: conductive layer, 116B: colored layer, 116G: colored layer, 116R: colored layer, 121: protective layer, 122: insulating layer, 123: insulating layer, 125: insulating layer, 126: resin layer, 128: layer, 140: connecting portion, 170: substrate, 171: adhesive layer, 200: transistor, 201: insulating layer, 202: insulating layer, 205: conductive layer, 230: semiconductor layer, 230f: semiconductor film, 240a: conductive layer, 240b: conductive layer, 241 a: insulating layer, 241b: insulating layer, 242: conductive layer, 242a: conductive layer, 242b: conductive layer, 242f: conductive film, 250: insulating layer, 255: insulating layer, 260: conductive layer, 260a: conductive layer, 260b: conductive layer, 271a: insulating layer, 271b: insulating layer, 275: insulating layer, 280: insulating layer, 282: insulating layer, 283: insulating layer, 285: insulating layer, 301: substrate, 310: transistor, 311: conductive layer, 312: Low resistance region, 313: insulating layer, 314: insulating layer, 315: element isolation layer, 320: transistor, 350: insulating layer, 351: semiconductor layer, 352: insulating layer, 353: insulating layer, 354: conductive layer, 355: conductive layer, 356: insulating layer, 357: conductive layer, 358: insulating layer, 359: insulating layer, 360: insulating layer, 361: wiring layer, 362: insulating layer, 363: conductive layer, 364: conductive layer, 371: wiring layer, 372: insulating layer, 373: conductive layer, 420: layer, 422: peripheral circuit, 430[1]: element layer, 430[2]: element layer, 430[5]: element layer, 430[m]: element layer, 430[m]m: element layer, 430: element layer, 432[1,1]: memory cell, 432[i,j]: memory cell, 432[m,n]: memory cell, 432: memory cell, 437: transistor, 438: capacitance element, 440: driver circuit, 442: row decoder ,443: Row driver, 444: Column decoder, 445: Column driver, 446[1]: Sense amplifier, 446[2]: Sense amplifier, 446: Sense amplifier, 447: Input circuit, 448: Output circuit, 470: Layer, 471: PSW, 472: PSW, 473: Control circuit, 474: Voltage generation circuit, 480: Memory device, 482: Switch circuit, 482_1: Transistor, 482_2: Transistor, 483: precharge circuit, 483_1: transistor, 483_3: transistor, 484: precharge circuit, 484_1: transistor, 484_3: transistor, 485: amplifier circuit, 485_1: transistor, 485_2: transistor, 485_3: transistor, 485_4: transistor, 500A: display device, 540: capacitor, 541: conductive layer, 543: insulating layer, 545: conductive layer, 554: insulating layer, 555a: insulating layer, 555b: insulating layer, 555c: insulating layer, 556: plug, 564: insulating layer, 565: insulating layer, 574: plug, 574a: conductive layer, 574b: conductive layer, 575: plug, 575a: conductive layer, 575b: conductive layer, 580: display module, 581: display section, 582: circuit section, 583: pixel circuit section, 583a: pixel circuit, 584: pixel section, 584a: pixel, 585: terminal Sub-part, 586: wiring part, 590: FPC, 591: substrate, 592: substrate, 700: electronic component, 700A: electronic device, 700B: electronic device, 702: printed circuit board, 704: mounting board, 710: semiconductor device, 711: mold, 712: land, 713: electrode pad, 714: wire, 715: drive circuit layer, 716: memory layer, 721: housing, 723: wearing part, 727: earphone part, 730: electronic component, 7 31: Interposer, 732: Package substrate, 733: Electrode, 735: Semiconductor device, 750: Earphone, 751: Display panel, 753: Optical member, 756: Display area, 757: Frame, 758: Nose pad, 800A: Electronic device, 800B: Electronic device, 820: Display unit, 821: Housing, 822: Communication unit, 823: Wearing unit, 824: Control unit, 825: Imaging unit, 827: Earphone unit, 832: Lens, 5600: mainframe computer, 5610: rack, 5620: computer, 5621: PC card, 5622: board, 5623: connection terminal, 5624: connection terminal, 5625: connection terminal, 5626: electronic component, 5627: electronic component, 5628: electronic component, 5629: connection terminal, 5630: motherboard, 5631: slot, 6500: electronic device, 6501: housing, 6502: display unit, 6503: power button, 6 504: Button, 6505: Speaker, 6506: Microphone, 6507: Camera, 6508: Light source, 6509: Control device, 6510: Protective member, 6511: Display panel, 6512: Optical member, 6513: Touch sensor panel, 6515: FPC, 6516: IC, 6517: Printed circuit board, 6518: Battery, 7000: Display unit, 7100: Television device, 7101: Housing, 7103: Stand, 7111: remote control device, 7200: notebook personal computer, 7211: housing, 7212: keyboard, 7213: pointing device, 7214: external connection port, 7216: control device, 7300: digital signage, 7301: housing, 7303: speaker, 7311: information terminal, 7400: digital signage, 7401: pillar, 7411: information terminal, 9000: housing, 90 01: Display, 9002: Camera, 9003: Speaker, 9005: Operation keys, 9006: Connection terminal, 9007: Sensor, 9008: Microphone, 9050: Icon, 9051: Information, 9052: Information, 9053: Information, 9054: Information, 9055: Hinge, 9101: Mobile information terminal, 9102: Mobile information terminal, 9103: Tablet terminal, 9200: Mobile information terminal, 9201: Mobile information terminal

Claims (10)

 第1のトランジスタと、第2のトランジスタと、第1の絶縁層と、第2の絶縁層と、第1の単結晶基板と、第2の単結晶基板と、を有し、
 前記第1のトランジスタは、前記第1の単結晶基板が有する第1の単結晶半導体にチャネルが形成され、
 前記第2のトランジスタは、前記第1のトランジスタの上方に位置し、且つ、前記第2の単結晶基板と接する第2の単結晶半導体にチャネルが形成され、
 前記第2の単結晶基板は、前記第2のトランジスタの上方に位置し、
 前記第1の絶縁層は、前記第1のトランジスタと前記第2のトランジスタとの間に位置し、
 前記第2の絶縁層は、前記第1の絶縁層と前記第2のトランジスタとの間に位置し、且つ、前記第1の絶縁層と接する第1の接合面を有し、
 前記第1の単結晶半導体は、シリコンを有し、
 前記第2の単結晶半導体は、金属酸化物を有する、
 半導体装置。
a first transistor, a second transistor, a first insulating layer, a second insulating layer, a first single crystal substrate, and a second single crystal substrate;
the first transistor has a channel formed in a first single-crystal semiconductor included in the first single-crystal substrate,
the second transistor is located above the first transistor and has a channel formed in a second single-crystal semiconductor in contact with the second single-crystal substrate;
the second single-crystal substrate is located above the second transistor;
the first insulating layer is located between the first transistor and the second transistor;
the second insulating layer is located between the first insulating layer and the second transistor and has a first junction surface in contact with the first insulating layer;
the first single-crystal semiconductor includes silicon;
the second single crystal semiconductor includes a metal oxide;
Semiconductor device.
 請求項1において、
 前記第2の単結晶基板は、立方晶系の結晶構造を有し、
 前記第2の単結晶半導体は、立方晶系の結晶構造を有する、
 半導体装置。
In claim 1,
the second single crystal substrate has a cubic crystal structure;
the second single crystal semiconductor has a cubic crystal structure;
Semiconductor device.
 請求項1において、
 前記第2の単結晶基板は、イットリウム及びジルコニウムを含む酸化物を有し、
 前記第2の単結晶半導体は、酸化インジウムを有する、
 半導体装置。
In claim 1,
the second single crystal substrate has an oxide containing yttrium and zirconium;
the second single crystal semiconductor includes indium oxide;
Semiconductor device.
 請求項1において、
 前記第2の単結晶半導体は、前記第2の単結晶基板に対して、格子不整合度が−5%以上5%以下である、
 半導体装置。
In claim 1,
the second single crystal semiconductor has a lattice mismatch of −5% or more and 5% or less with respect to the second single crystal substrate;
Semiconductor device.
 請求項1において、
 第1の導電層と、第2の導電層と、を有し、
 前記第1の導電層は、前記第1のトランジスタのソース電極及びドレイン電極の一方と接続され、且つ、前記第1の絶縁層に埋め込まれており、
 前記第2の導電層は、前記第2のトランジスタのソース電極及びドレイン電極の一方と接続され、前記第2の絶縁層に埋め込まれており、且つ、前記第1の導電層と接する第2の接合面を有する、
 半導体装置。
In claim 1,
a first conductive layer and a second conductive layer;
the first conductive layer is connected to one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the first transistor and is embedded in the first insulating layer;
the second conductive layer is connected to one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the second transistor, is embedded in the second insulating layer, and has a second junction surface in contact with the first conductive layer;
Semiconductor device.
 第1のトランジスタと、前記第1のトランジスタ上に第1の絶縁層と、が設けられ、第1の単結晶半導体を含む第1の単結晶基板を準備する工程と、
 第2の単結晶基板を準備する工程と、
 前記第2の単結晶基板上に、第2の単結晶半導体を含む半導体膜を形成する工程と、
 前記半導体膜を島状に加工して、半導体層を形成する工程と、
 前記半導体層上に、ゲート絶縁層、ゲート電極、ソース電極及びドレイン電極を形成し、第2のトランジスタを作製する工程と、
 前記第2のトランジスタ上に第2の絶縁層を形成する工程と、
 前記第1の絶縁層の上面と、前記第2の絶縁層の上面とを接合する工程と、を有する、
 半導体装置の作製方法。
preparing a first single-crystal substrate including a first single-crystal semiconductor, the first single-crystal substrate including a first transistor and a first insulating layer on the first transistor;
providing a second single crystal substrate;
forming a semiconductor film containing a second single crystal semiconductor on the second single crystal substrate;
a step of processing the semiconductor film into an island shape to form a semiconductor layer;
forming a gate insulating layer, a gate electrode, a source electrode, and a drain electrode on the semiconductor layer to fabricate a second transistor;
forming a second insulating layer over the second transistor;
and joining an upper surface of the first insulating layer to an upper surface of the second insulating layer.
A method for manufacturing a semiconductor device.
 請求項6において、
 前記第1の単結晶半導体は、シリコンを含み、
 前記第2の単結晶半導体は、金属酸化物を含む、
 半導体装置の作製方法。
In claim 6,
the first single-crystal semiconductor includes silicon;
the second single-crystal semiconductor includes a metal oxide;
A method for manufacturing a semiconductor device.
 請求項6において、
 前記第2の単結晶基板は、立方晶系の結晶構造を有し、
 前記第2の単結晶半導体は、立方晶系の結晶構造を有する、
 半導体装置の作製方法。
In claim 6,
the second single crystal substrate has a cubic crystal structure;
the second single crystal semiconductor has a cubic crystal structure;
A method for manufacturing a semiconductor device.
 請求項6において、
 前記第2の単結晶基板は、イットリウム及びジルコニウムを含む酸化物を有し、
 前記第2の単結晶半導体は、酸化インジウムを有する、
 半導体装置の作製方法。
In claim 6,
the second single crystal substrate has an oxide containing yttrium and zirconium;
the second single crystal semiconductor includes indium oxide;
A method for manufacturing a semiconductor device.
 請求項6において、
 前記第2の単結晶半導体は、前記第2の単結晶基板に対して、格子不整合度が−5%以上5%以下である、
 半導体装置の作製方法。
In claim 6,
the second single crystal semiconductor has a lattice mismatch of −5% or more and 5% or less with respect to the second single crystal substrate;
A method for manufacturing a semiconductor device.
PCT/IB2025/053337 2024-04-05 2025-03-31 Semiconductor device and production method for same Pending WO2025210468A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2024061340 2024-04-05
JP2024-061340 2024-04-05
JP2025013996 2025-01-30
JP2025-013996 2025-01-30

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2025210468A1 true WO2025210468A1 (en) 2025-10-09

Family

ID=97266615

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/IB2025/053337 Pending WO2025210468A1 (en) 2024-04-05 2025-03-31 Semiconductor device and production method for same

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2025210468A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2015065424A (en) * 2013-08-27 2015-04-09 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 Method for forming oxide film, method for manufacturing semiconductor device
JP2016111368A (en) * 2014-12-08 2016-06-20 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 Transistor
JP2017005693A (en) * 2015-06-08 2017-01-05 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 Imaging apparatus and operation method therefor, and electronic apparatus
WO2020157600A1 (en) * 2019-01-29 2020-08-06 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 Imaging device and electronic device
JP2021082775A (en) * 2019-11-22 2021-05-27 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 Imaging device and manufacturing method for the same

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2015065424A (en) * 2013-08-27 2015-04-09 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 Method for forming oxide film, method for manufacturing semiconductor device
JP2016111368A (en) * 2014-12-08 2016-06-20 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 Transistor
JP2017005693A (en) * 2015-06-08 2017-01-05 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 Imaging apparatus and operation method therefor, and electronic apparatus
WO2020157600A1 (en) * 2019-01-29 2020-08-06 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 Imaging device and electronic device
JP2021082775A (en) * 2019-11-22 2021-05-27 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 Imaging device and manufacturing method for the same

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP2024163896A (en) Semiconductor Device
JP2024169350A (en) Semiconductor device, memory device, and method for manufacturing the semiconductor device
WO2024095113A1 (en) Semiconductor device and method for producing same
WO2024201259A1 (en) Semiconductor device, and semiconductor device manufacturing method
WO2025210468A1 (en) Semiconductor device and production method for same
WO2025196596A1 (en) Semiconductor device and method for fabricating same
US20260040618A1 (en) Semiconductor device and manufacturing method thereof
WO2024105516A1 (en) Semiconductor device and method for manufacturing same
KR20250111314A (en) Semiconductor device and method for manufacturing the same
WO2025074208A1 (en) Semiconductor device
WO2025114840A1 (en) Semiconductor device and method for manufacturing semiconductor device
WO2024194729A1 (en) Semiconductor device and method for manufacturing semiconductor device
WO2024201264A1 (en) Semiconductor device and method for manufacturing semiconductor device
KR20250116005A (en) semiconductor devices
WO2024154036A1 (en) Semiconductor device
CN121533155A (en) Semiconductor device and method of manufacturing semiconductor device
JP2025012733A (en) SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE AND METHOD FOR MANUFACTURING SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE
JP2025010064A (en) Semiconductor Device
WO2024201207A1 (en) Semiconductor device and method for manufacturing semiconductor device
WO2024231787A1 (en) Semiconductor device, and method for manufacturing semiconductor device
WO2024171008A1 (en) Semiconductor device
WO2024224246A1 (en) Semiconductor device, and method for manufacturing semiconductor device
WO2025083533A1 (en) Semiconductor device
WO2024241136A1 (en) Semiconductor device
WO2024201267A1 (en) Semiconductor device and method for manufacturing semiconductor device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 25781940

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1